Blog

Definition of Junub – Cleanliness is part of faith. All provisions have been regulated by Allah SWT in the Al-Qur’an and hadith. It is stated that Allah SWT really loves His holy servant and always purifies himself. This is in line with His words in Surah Al-Baqarah verse 222 which reads as follows:

….اِنَّ اللّٰهَ يُحِبُّ التَّوَّابِيْنَ وَيُحِبُّ الْمُتَطَهِّرِيْنَ

“… Indeed, Allah SWT loves those who repent and loves those who purify themselves ”.

A Muslim can be said to be holy if he is clean from hadas and unclean. Conversely, a person who is still in a state of impurity and exposed to uncleanness is called a junub condition and is prohibited from performing obligatory worship such as prayer.

The term junub is a familiar thing among Muslims. Junub is a condition when a person has large hadas in his body. For example, a husband and wife who have had sexual intercourse are prohibited from performing acts of worship such as praying, fasting, reading the Qur’an, and so on.

In order to be able to return to worship again, the husband and wife are required to perform the junub bath or also known as the obligatory bath or big bath. Junub bath is different from bathing in general because there is an intention that must be read first and the procedure for doing a junub bath.

So, what is junub and what is the law in Islam? To find out more, see the following explanation.

 

Meaning of Junub

In language, junub comes from the word janabah which means far away, while junub in terms is the state of a person after emitting semen ( al-inzal ) for women and men, due to wet dreams or sexual intercourse.

While still in a state of junub, a Muslim is required to take a big bath. If not, he is prohibited from approaching places of worship and performing certain worship. The command to take a junub bath or take a big bath is contained in Surah Al-Maidah verse 6. Allah SWT says as follows:

وَاِنْ كُنْتُمْ جُنُبًا فَاطَّهَّرُوْاۗ

” And if you are junub, you should purify .”

Meanwhile, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), junub is a dirty condition due to discharge of semen or intercourse which requires a person to take a bath by wetting (cleaning) the entire body from the tip of the hair to the toes or a condition with hadas which requires mandatory bathing.

Conditions Requiring Junub Bathing

In the book Having to Take a Mandatory Bath Again, written by Ustadz M. Saiyid Mahadhir mentions Ibn Faris in the Maqayis Al-Lughah dictionary explaining that janabah itself means far away, as opposed to the word near. It is called distant because someone with janabah status is in a remote position (unable to perform) some of the rituals of worship, such as praying, reading the Qur’an and staying silent in the mosque.

The term janabah is used to indicate the condition of someone who is having a big hadats because he has had a husband and wife relationship, or for other reasons, janabah and big hadas are two words that have the same meaning.

If someone says he is in a state of janabah , it means he is in a state of great hadas. There are seven reasons why a person has janabat and is obligated to take a big bath, among them.

First , discharge of semen. Semen is a liquid that comes out of the genitals with a distinctive aroma, slightly fishy, ​​slightly thick and dries easily like an egg when it dries. Usually, the discharge is accompanied by a feeling of pleasure by radiating.

Regardless of how it came out, intentional (masturbation) or dream, or by way of husband and wife intercourse, all must wash. It turns out that this does not only apply to men. Women can also release semen, and women also have the same obligation if semen comes out of them.

From Umm Salamah RA that Umm Sulaym, the wife of Abu Talhah RA, asked RA, ” O Messenger of Allah, really Allah SWT is not ashamed when it comes to the truth, is it obligatory for a woman to take a bath when she dreams?” Rasulullah SAW replied: ” Yes, if he finds semen ” (HR Bukhari and Muslim).

Second, related husband and wife. If intercourse between husband and wife is accompanied by discharge of semen or not, even if it is only limited to the meeting of the two genitals, then this condition makes a person obliged to take a bath. Rasulullah SAW said:

  Amen 

” If two genitals meet or if the genitals touch the other genitals, it is obligatory to bathe .”

Third , women who have finished their menstrual period. The obligation to bathe is as stated by Allah SWT in Al Baqarah verse 222:

وَيَسْأَلُونَكَ عَنِ الْمَحِيضِ ۖ قُلْ هُوَ أَذًى فَاعْتَزِلُوا النِّسَاءَ فِي الْمَحِيضِ ۖ وَلَا تَقْرَبُوهُنَّ حَتَّىٰ يَطْهُرْنَ ۖ فَإِذَا تَطَهَّرْنَ فَأْتُوهُنَّ مِنْ حَيْثُ أَمَرَكُمُ اللَّهُ ۚ إِنَّ اللَّهَ يُحِبُّ التَّوَّابِينَ وَيُحِبُّ الْمُتَطَهِّرِينَ

“ And they ask you (Muhammad) about menstruation. Say, “That is something dirty.” Therefore, stay away from your wife during menstruation, and do not approach them until they are pure. When they are pure, interfere with them according to (the conditions) that Allah has commanded you. Indeed, Allah loves those who repent and loves those who purify themselves .”

Fourth , finish the puerperium. Puerperal is the blood that comes out accompanying the release of the baby as well as the blood that comes out afterwards. The discharge of puerperal blood obliges to take a bath even though it turns out that the baby who was born died. After the blood has stopped, then hurry up to take a shower, so that you can carry out the worship activities that have been left behind.

Fifth, women who have given birth. The obligation to bathe is based on the ijma (consensus) of the scholars, as emphasized by Ibn Al Mundzir. Part of the things that oblige a person to take a bath, even though giving birth is not accompanied by childbirth. According to the narrative of some of the husbands, there are indeed some of their wives who give birth without giving birth.

Sixth, people who died. This is the last condition that makes it obligatory for a person to bathe, because he has died and is unable to bathe himself, the obligation to bathe rests on the shoulders of those who are still alive.

Rasulullah SAW said when one of his daughters died, ” Wash her three times or five times or more from there ” (HR Bukhari and Muslim).

Seventh , people who have just converted to Islam. The Islamic issue of a non-believer is still being debated among scholars as to whether they are obliged to bathe or not. Scholars from the Maliki and Hanbali schools are of the opinion that infidels who convert to Islam are obliged to take a bath.

Abu Hurairah RA narrated that Tsumamah bin Atsal RA had just converted to Islam, then Rasulullah SAW said, ” Take him to one of the walls of the so and so, and order him to take a bath ” (HR Ahmad).

Apart from that, it is very likely that those who disbelieve have experienced a major hadith status, either because of a dream or a husband and wife relationship, so it is on this basis that they are obliged to take a bath. And in these two schools of thought the obligation to bathe does not differentiate between those who are true disbelievers and those who are apostates.

 

Hadiths that Explain about Junub

Apart from being explained in the Al-Quran, discussion of junub is also explained in several hadiths. The following are hadiths about junub that Sinaumed’s friends need to know:

First Hadith

عن عائشة رضي الله عنها ق الت : كان رس ول الله صلى الله عليه وس لم إذا اغتسل من الجنابة غسل يديه ، ث م توضأ وضوءه للصلاة ، ثم اغتسل ، ثم يخلل بيده شع ره حتى إذا ظ ن أنه قد أرو ى بشرته أفاض عليه الماء ثلاث مرات ، ثم غسل سائر جسده

It means:

“From Aisyah radhiyallahu ‘anha; he said, “ That if the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam was taking a bath from the janabah then he would start by washing his hands, then do his ablution as he would for prayer, then put his fingers in the water and then interrupt the roots of his hair, until he thought the water was down to the base of his hair then watered his head with both hands three times then he splashed his entire body ” (Reported by Bukhari and Muslim).

Second Hadith

God bless you

It means:

“Aisyah radhiallahu ‘anha also said, “ I bathed with the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam from a jar, and we both took water from the jar ” (HR Muslim).

Third Hadith

عن ميمونة بن ت الحارث رضي الله عنها ز وجة النبي صل ى الله عليه وسلم أنها قا لت : وضعتُ ل رسول الله صل ى الله عليه وسلم وَضوء ا لجنابة ، فأك فا بيمينه عل ى يساره مرتي ن أو ثلاثا ، ثم غسل فرجه ، ثم ضرب يد ه بالأرض أو الحائط – مرت ين أو ثلاثا – ثم تمضمض و استنشق ، ثم غسل وجهه وذر اعيه ، ثم أف اض على رأسه الماء ، ثم غ سل سائر جسده ، ثم تنحّى فغسل رجليه ، قالت : فأتي ته بخرقة فلم يُردها ، وج عل ينفض الما ء بيده

It means:

From Maimunah bint Al-Harith radhiyallahu’anha; he said, “ I prepared water for the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam to bathe junub. Then he  poured (the water)  with his right hand over his left hand twice – or three times, then he  washed his private parts , then  rubbed his hands on the ground or on the wall  twice – or three times. Next, he  rinsed his mouth and took istinsyaq  (breathing water), then he  washed his face and his hands up to the elbows . Then he  flushed his head and then his whole body . Then he took a position/place, shifted, then washed his feet . Then I gave him a cloth (a kind of towel, pen.) but he didn’t want it, so he wiped the water (on his body) using both hands “(HR Bukhari and Muslim).

Mandatory Bathing Prayer According to Sunnah

The Islamic religion requires its followers to remove major hadas by means of a mandatory bath or large bath. Hadas besar is the condition of someone who is not pure because after sexual intercourse, semen comes out for men, menstruation and childbirth for women.

It is obligatory for Muslims to take a large bath after having hadas. If a Muslim does not perform the obligatory ghusl when he has a large period, it can prevent him from doing some acts of worship such as praying, reading the Qur’an, and thawaf.

As a form of worship, of course there are prayers and procedures for bathing obligatory according to the hadith of the Prophet Muhammad. Prayers and procedures for bathing must be known by all Muslims so that this matter of purification can be carried out correctly. Prayers and procedures for bathing are obligatory in accordance with the sunnah to be carried out with the aim of cleaning oneself after menstruation, childbirth, semen and after intercourse.

Here are the obligatory prayers and procedures for bathing that you need to know.

1. Mandatory Bathing Prayer After Junub

“Bismillahirahmanirahim, nawaitul ghusla liraf’il hadatsil Akbari minal janabati fardlo lillahi ta’ala”.

It means:

” By mentioning the name of Allah SWT, I intend to take a bath to remove large hadas from jinabah, fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala “.

2. Obligatory Bathing Prayer After Postpartum

During a major hadas in a woman who is in childbirth or bleeding from the sex organs after giving birth, the obligatory bath prayer that must be read is as follows:

“Bismillahirahmanirrahim, nawaitu ghusla liraf’il hadatsil Akbari minan nifasi fardlo lillahi ta’ala”.

It means:

” By mentioning the name of Allah SWT, I intend to take a bath to remove large hadas from childbirth, fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala “.

3. Obligatory Bathing Prayer After Menstruation

The following is a mandatory bath prayer after menstruation that needs to be read:

“Bismillahirahmanirahim, nawaitul ghusla liraf’il hadatsil Akbari minal haidi fardlo lillahi ta’ala”.

It means:

” By mentioning the name of Allah SWT, I intend to take a bath to remove large hadas from menstruation, fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala “.

After reading the obligatory bathing prayer above, the next step is to start bathing according to the good and correct procedures for taking a junub bath.

Mandatory Bathing Procedures

Prayers and procedures for bathing are obligatory according to sunnah, not like regular bathing, but there are rules according to hadith. Every Muslim who has reached puberty  must know fully the correct prayers and procedures for obligatory bathing in order to be lawful to perform worship.

Junub bath or obligatory bath must be done perfectly as exemplified by Rasulullah SAW. Quoting the Fiqh book for Class VII MTs by Hasbiyallah, here are the mandatory bathing procedures that you can see:

1. Before taking a bath, first wash your hands three times.
2. Followed by washing the genitals.
3. Then perform complete ablution, before sprinkling water all over the body.
4. Pouring water on your head three times, insert your fingers through your hair to wet your scalp.
5. Finally, splash water all over the body starting from the right side before the left side, while rubbing the areas that are difficult for water to enter, such as the inside of the ears, navel, under the arms, between the toes and other indentations of the body.

Especially for women who take a junub bath to purify themselves from menstruation or childbirth, it is recommended to use cotton that is slightly perfumed, where the blood has been coming out. The point is to remove the remnants of the smell if it is still there.

 

Prohibited Things When in Junub Condition

Before purifying himself with a large bath, a Muslim who is still in a junub state is prohibited from performing certain rituals. Quoting the book Fiqh of Purification and Prayer According to the Guidance of the Prophet by Abu Usman Kharisman, these prohibitions include:

1. Salat.
2. Tawaf in Baitullah.
3. Holding the Koran.
4. Read the Qur’an even without touching the Mushaf.
5. Live or remain silent in the mosque.

Benefits of Mandatory Bathing

After knowing the prayers and procedures for obligatory bathing according to the syara ‘ above, then we discuss the benefits of carrying out obligatory bathing.

Quoting from  Sharia Discussion , Sheikh Muhyiddin writes in his book Ibadatul Islam: Fiqhuha, Asroruha, wa Ta’allumu Kaifiyyatiha  in the chapter on the benefits of bathing ( fawaidul ghusli ) about the benefits of obligatory bathing, namely:

• When a Muslim performs the obligatory ghusl, he has carried out the command of Allah SWT and gets a great reward, happiness, serenity and joy.
• Having sex between husband and wife will cause fatigue and laziness. Mandatory bathing will restore lost body strength after intercourse.
• Bathing is one of the efforts to maintain cleanliness and health of the body.
• The benefits of taking a big bath also make the body more enthusiastic about activities, and drive away laziness.

That is the explanation of junub, which is a condition when a Muslim, both men and women have hadas and it is obligatory for them to take junub bath as an effort to purify themselves. That way, someone who has done a junub bath can perform worship again in a holy condition.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Meaning of Image –  Image is an effort to highlight a good self-image to the public. The impression of this image itself is usually bad because many then practice it with lies and exaggeration. Even so, what was really wrong was not the image but the elements who then made the fake image.

Imaging will also be wrong if someone then performs a fake image by presenting something completely different from the original conditions. Imaging can be said as proof of self-quality that is in accordance with actual abilities which will be better if done consistently, and for a longer period of time. Imaging also in a popular positive connotation is also known as personal branding.

So, to find out more about imaging, then you can see this article till the end, Sinaumed’s. Here below is further imaging from various sources:

Definition of Imaging

Image is an effort made to describe someone or something as better or worse in the eyes of the public. The meaning of imaging itself can be defined in several meanings, among others.

• An attempt to highlight the best image for someone or something in the public eye.
• The attempt to prove one’s existence in public and also to show what one actually feels is so exaggerated that it doesn’t match the truth.

The term image itself is often used in politics and art. However, basically this term is used to explain that there are efforts or efforts that are then made to describe something or someone to be better in front of the public, so that it will influence public opinion.

Meanwhile, in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), imagery is a process, a way of forming a personal mental image or an image of something or a description.

Understanding Imaging According to Experts

The following is an explanation of what imaging is according to experts:

1.Huddleston

According to Huddleston (Buchari Alma, 2008: 55), the notion of image is a series of beliefs which are then connected with an image that is owned or obtained from experience.

2. Bill Canton

According to Bill Canton (S. Soemirat and Ardianto. E 2007:111), the meaning of image is impressions, feelings, self-image of the public to the company; the impression that is deliberately created from an object, person or organization.

3.Philip Kotler

According to Philip Kotler (2009: 299), the meaning of imagery is a set of beliefs, ideas, and impressions that a person has of an object.

4. Frank Jeffkins

According to Frank Jefkins (Soemirat and Adrianto, 2007:114), the notion of image is the impression of a person or individual about something that arises as a result of their knowledge and experience.

5. Suharta Abdul Manjid

According to Suharta Abdul Majid (2009: 70), the notion of image is a picture that is formed in society (consumers/customers) about the good and bad of a company.

Recommended Books Related to Imaging that You Must Read

Introduction to the Psychology of Intelligence

Saifuddin Azwar, the author of this book, is Associate Professor at the Faculty of Psychology, Gadjah Mada University, teaching courses in Test Construction, Thesis Writing Techniques, and Learning Psychology. Besides that, he also teaches as a non-permanent lecturer for Psychology and Statistics courses at the Faculty of Psychology, Wangsa Manggala University, Surakarta Muhammadiyah University, Ahmad Dahlan University Yogyakarta, and the Islamic University of Indonesia. The author’s books include: Achievement Test (Edition 2-1996), Introduction to the Psychology of Intelligence (1996), Human Attitudes Theory and Measurement (1995, 1997), Reliability and Validity (Edition 3-1997)

Thinking, Fast and Slow

Daniel Kahneman is one of the most important thinkers of this century. His ideas had a profound and far-reaching impact on a variety of fields including economics, medicine and politics. In this highly anticipated book, Kahneman describes two systems that drive the way we think. System 1 is fast, intuitive, and emotional; System 2 is slower, more purposeful, and more logical. Kahneman points out the extraordinary abilities as well as the shortcomings and biases of quick thinking, and reveals the impact intuitive impressions have on our thoughts and behavior. By knowing how these two systems shape our judgments and decisions, we can understand, among other things:

• The impact of loss of enthusiasm and too much trust in corporate strategy.
• It’s hard to predict what will make us happy in the future
• The challenge is to create a clear framework for risks in the workplace as well as at home.
• The profound impact of cognitive biases is on everything from trading in the stock market to planning your next vacation.

 

The Power Of Now : A Guide To Spiritual Enlightenment

Before we had control over our thoughts, they controlled us. The mind is constantly talking to itself and it is difficult to stop. The mind has many opinions, but all of them are usually based on what has happened in the past. As a result, it becomes difficult for us to perceive things that exist today as something new. Constantly thinking makes us unable to enjoy the present moment. Accept it—then act. Whatever is in the present, accept it as if you had chosen it. Always cooperate with the present, don’t fight it. Make the present your friend and ally, not your enemy. It will miraculously change your whole life. The Power of Now focuses intensely on the problems we face today and who we are today. The most practical of all practical guides, success or spiritual, and can be used to change our lives.

 

Live Once Wise Execute

“Life is not only about sharing and loving. It’s not just about giving and loving. Not only about depriving and oppressing. This life never escapes the name of loss, struggle, and letting go. Isn’t that what life is like? As long as we are alive, we have made many decisions. The decision is for ourselves or others. However, is it true that the decision is good for us? Or is it just not the best? Therefore, you only live once, so use it as best you can. Choose a good friend to live in, choose a good environment to live in, and so on. If you have chosen, then decide, execute it. Before executing it, don’t forget to ask Allah SWT for guidance. That way we will get good things for us and others.”

 

Imaging Type

Image or personal branding can now also be interpreted as credibility, character, impression, perception and opinion in the public. The person who performs the image then has no value or is meaningless if it is only based on lies only to influence public opinion.

Image itself is not always negative, because imagery that is based on value or meaning can then benefit the perpetrators. The impression of a good image itself is referred to as personal branding.

This imaging can be further divided into several types. The various types of imaging include the following:

1. Visual imagery

Visual imagery is imagery that arises due to the presence of visual aids.

2. Auditory imagery

Auditory imagery is an image that arises through the image of the ear to then evoke a certain atmosphere.

3. Olfactory imagery

Olfactory imagery is an imagery that is done by going through the sense of smell and depicting an abstract idea into a concrete idea.

4. Imagery of feelings

The feeling image is an image that arises through emotional stimulation and then directs one’s imagination as if the taste buds feel something.

5. Tactile imagery

Tactile imagery is an image that arises through touch, so that a person can then feel as if he is being touched or anything that involves the effectiveness of his skin senses.

6. Motion imagery

Motion imagery is imagery which then aims to make a picture more lively by depicting something that is still as if it is moving.

Imaging Purpose

From the explanation above, we then know that image is all efforts made as a way to form or build a good opinion of something or a person or company so that then get attention and a response that is in accordance with the intent and purpose.

In addition to discussing the meaning and types of imagery, we will also discuss the purpose of imagery. Following are some of the purposes of imaging.

1. Predicting Results 

Imaging that is carried out will then help reasoning and problem solving, namely by giving someone the ability to be able to predict the results of an action. For example, when someone sees that the contents of the house are messy, he will immediately understand how to tidy it up.

2. Reasoning 

With imaging, one can then reason abstract concepts by visualizing a symbol, such as a diagram or graph about something.

3. Describe the Situation 

Imaging abilities can also then assist a person in providing a verbal description of something or someone.

4. Recall 

Imaging can also be used to recall visual or spatial information. For example, when someone tries to remember about the dinner that was served the previous day.

5. Memorizing Information 

Through imaging, one can also memorize information. For example, if a person’s memory will increase sharply when he visualizes various objects which are then given names as if the names of these objects interact with each other.

6. Improve Ability 

Imaging can also then help a person improve his abilities by visualizing himself by taking an action so that it will then direct him to that action.

7. Provide Ideas or Insights 

Every image that is done by someone will then remind him of an important insight, or give an idea.

Relationship of Self Image with Other Aspects of Self 

Self-image in psychology is closely related to what a person sees when he is looking in the mirror, but the true meaning of self-image is much deeper than that. This self-image refers to how a person sees himself at a broader level, both internally and externally.

By definition, self-image is about how a person then perceives himself. Self-image as a number of self-impressions that have been built over time. In addition, self-image also has a relationship with other aspects of self. The following is the relationship between self-image and other aspects of self.

1. Self-Concept 

Self-image can be said to be related to a person’s self-concept. Self-concept is our personal knowledge of who we are including all thoughts and feelings about ourselves physically, personally and socially.

These two things would then be closely related, but they are not the same thing. Self-concept is also more comprehensive than self-image, will involve how a person sees himself, thinks about himself and how he then feels about himself so that it develops into types of self-concept. Self-image is also a component that forms self-concept, according to Mc Leod (2008).

2. Self Esteem 

Self-image is related to self-esteem. This is because how we see ourselves will then be a major factor in how we feel about ourselves. However, self-esteem also has a deeper meaning than self-image.

Overall self-esteem is the respect we have for ourselves that involves how favorable or unfavorable this feeling is towards us. Negative self-image will greatly affect self-esteem and concepts in psychology. Low self-esteem can be said to tend to be accompanied by negative self-image, and vice versa.

3. Identity 

Identity as a concept that is closely related to self-image in psychology, identity is bigger and more comprehensive than self-image. Identity is the whole idea of ​​who we are, as stated by Roy Baumeister: The term identity refers to the definition that is made and superimposed on someone’s self (1997:681).

Thus, it can be said that identity is the whole picture of who we are that we believe in or believe in the importance of finding identity, and self-image is part of the whole picture.

Self-image in healthy psychology is mainly based on an individual’s personal feelings and perspective, where a person will no longer be influenced by other people’s opinions about them or by social expectations which then build self-concepts in communication psychology. Instead, he will establish his own mind regarding internal mental pictures and ideas about himself.

Closing

Basically, everyone will always try to show their image to everyone, especially workers. Self-image can be said as a way for a person to be known by many people. Therefore, to do that, one needs to know oneself first.

From all the discussion above it can be said that imagery is an action that shows a positive attitude in front of many people. Thus the discussion about the meaning of imagery, starting from the meaning, types, to the purpose of doing imagery.

If you want to find books on psychology, you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Sofyan

Source: from various sources

Meaning and Origins of 5 Classical Dances from Central Java – Sinaumed’s, as we all know that dance is a form of culture that is full of meaning. Jazuli (2008) in the Contextual Paradigm of Art Education states that dance is a beautiful form of movement, born from a body that moves, rhythmically, and has a soul according to its intent and purpose.

Furthermore, Soedarsono (1986) through his Introduction to Dance Knowledge and Composition in Knowledge of Dance Elements and Some Dance Problems also added that dance is an expression of the human soul which is expressed by beautiful rhythmic movements.

Dance is a rhythmic movement which (with awareness) is formed with the body as a medium in space. This art can then become a cultural statement. This is why the nature, style, and function of dance cannot be separated from the culture that produces it.

Indonesia on the other hand consists of various tribes and very diverse cultures, thus producing dances that also have different characteristics. One area that has various types of classical dance is Central Java.

This province, which has a thousand cities in Semarang, has many dances, most of which still survive today. There are interesting facts behind the emergence of some of these dances to become part of the cultural development of Central Java.

So, what are the classical dances? In the following, we will present brief explanations and facts about 5 classical dances that are still developing in Central Java today.

1. Ampil Kridha Warastra Jurit Dance

Jurit Ampil Kridha Warastra dance is a classical dance originating from the city of Salatiga. This dance has meaning, namely jurit which means “warrior”, garwa ampil which means “concubine” (from Mangkunegara I), and warastra which means “gendewa”.

In general, the dance depicts the garwa ampil (concubine) troop of Mangkunegara I in the Salatiga Agreement which was executed on March 17, 1757. Each party (Hamengkubuwana I, Pakubuwana III, and Mangkunegara I) in the agreement agreed to bring and show their strength his troops. Mangkunegara I himself also showed some of the bregada (army units) he brought with him, one of which was the Jurit Ampil, namely the soldiers’ unit of the daughters of his concubines.

This dance is classified as a loose dance, meaning that it can be performed in teams, pairs and singles. The classical elements of the dance are contained in the movements, song accompaniment, clothing, and make-up, but now it has been combined with new elements that keep up with the times.

This dance is also a fusion of Surakarta style classical dance and folk dance, which take many movements from the Warrior dance. The musical accompaniment uses Javanese gamelan with pelog tunings which include gender, kendhang, demung, saron, kenong, kempul, and gong, while the forms of the music are smooth , srepeg , and palaran .

The clothing worn in the dance is a princess warrior dress with her hair in small buns and wearing a golden crown. The main shirt is blue, short-sleeved with gold decoration, belt and dodot, while the pants are knee-length.

For his weapons, he uses jemparing (archery), endhong , nyenyep , gendewa , and cundrik. The makeup of the dancers aims to help shape the character and soul of a soldier.

2. Warrior Dance

The Warrior Dance is a traditional dance in the form of a mass dance that first appeared in Getasan Village, Getasan District, Semarang Regency, Central Java Province. This dance then developed into other areas in Semarang Regency with different versions of origins and themes, including Ambarawa District, Banyubiru District, Sumowono District, and Ungaran City. This dance also developed in Salatiga City, to be precise in Tegalrejo Village, Argomulyo District, Salatiga City.

The elements contained in the dance include clothing, make-up, movement, and musical instruments. This dance is indeed included in the category of group dances, but the number of dancers is sometimes adjusted according to the needs and size of the venue.

This dance on the other hand is not a dance of new creations which is more dynamic and has many variations according to the tastes of young people. This is because the movements and accompaniments tend to be monotonous. Folk dances are also rarely performed, so people don’t appreciate them, not even a few don’t know about them.

This dance procession is thick with the nuances of war, which can be seen from the clothes of the dancers and their movements that carry weapons following the accompaniment of gamelan organs. The dance in its implementation has undergone changes along with the times and the various factors that influence it. One of the intrinsic factors of change in this dance can be seen from changes in the composition of the dancers.

At the beginning of its appearance, this dance was danced by male dancers, but now it is also danced by female dancers. This is why the makeup used is male makeup. In addition, the real influence on the appearance of this dance is the modern songs that are performed to accompany it. The extrinsic factors that drive changes in the composition of dancers are economic and market reasons, not merely functional reasons for art as entertainment.

Warrior dancers used to only wear cloth pants and ngligo (not wearing clothes). The clothes worn by the dancers of the warrior section currently consist of trousers, camouflage cloth, beskap, songkok, and sampur, while the dancers of the Manggalayuda (war leader or line leader) use trousers, camouflage cloth, beskap, blangkon, and keris.

The movements performed in the Warrior dance include:

• Lumaksana , means that humans must be responsible for carrying out their duties and always remember God Almighty;
• Merong megar , means that humans must always look at various sides in carrying out their obligations;
• Garuda nglayang , means that any action taken by humans must look at the state order. This movement is taken from the symbol of Indonesia, namely the eagle;
• Nyongklang , means humans who travel in carrying out their duties;
• Gedrug , means human awareness of life on earth;
• Fishing sandals , means that one must face various problems patiently and not in a hurry;
• Barn , means that all the results of the work to be used and stored properly.

The musical instruments used to accompany the Warrior dance include:

• Jedhor , which is a small beduk made of teak wood and covered on both sides with goat skin. The bat is made of teak wood with black rubber wrapped around the end. Diameter size + 25 centimeters;
• Dhodhog kendang , which is a smaller drum than jedor made of teak wood. One side is closed using goat skin, while the other side is left open. The bat is made of teak wood with black rubber wrapped around the end. Diameter size + 12.5 centimeters;
• Bendhe , namely the gamelan organ made of iron and brass, while the beaters are made of teak wood wrapped in black rubber. Bendhe consists of majors (diameter + 20 centimeters), keprah (diameter + 18 centimeters), successors (diameter + 18 centimeters), and kenthing (diameter + 15 centimeters).

Jedor and dhodhog drums are hit almost simultaneously, only one beat apart. The majors and keprak are beaten monotonously, while the successor and kenthing are beaten alternately. When changing movements, use the whistle brought by Manggalayuda as a marker.

3. Ireng Mask Dance

Based on stories circulating in the community, the Topeng Ireng art began to develop among the people on the slopes of Merapi–Merbabu since the Dutch colonial era, which then continued its development in the 1960s.

At that time, the Dutch colonial government prohibited the public from practicing silat as a precautionary measure so that the people would not have the skills if they later resisted. This is what made the local people develop the various silat movements into folk dances.

At first, the dance was presented to the accompaniment of gamelan music and Javanese songs, which in essence concern various advice about the goodness of life. This art is growing when presented as part of the construction procession of mosques and prayer rooms.

Before being installed, the dome of the mosque will usually be paraded around the village first. The carnival or procession will be followed by all the people around the mosque with dances accompanied by tambourines and hymns of praise. This is what later caused this dance to develop into the Topeng Ireng art.

The name “topeng ireng” itself comes from the word kenceng rhythm plates . Tata means “arrange”, plate means “straight”, rhythm means “tone”, and kenceng means “loud/fast”. Therefore, the dancers perform this dance in straight lines and accompanied by loud and enthusiastic rhythmic music.

This dance is a form of traditional art performance that combines Islamic religious symbols and the martial arts of pencak silat. Not surprisingly, Topeng Ireng is always accompanied by Islamic rhythms and songs. Aside from being a symbol of Islam, the Topeng Ireng performance also depicts the lives of rural communities living on the slopes of Merapi–Merbabu. Judging from its firm movements, this dance describes the physical strength possessed by the village community when fighting or making friends with nature to defend their lives.

Before being known as Topeng Ireng, this performing art was known as the Dayakan art. The name is based on the costumes worn by the dancers, namely the lower clothing worn by the dancers resembling traditional Dayak clothing.

Around 1995, the word Dayakan was considered to contain SARA elements. This is what later made this art changed its name to Topeng Ireng art. However, the name Dayakan has been popularized again since 2005, thus making this art known by two names, namely Topeng Ireng and Dayakan.

4. Gambyong Dance

Gambyong dance is a form of classical Javanese dance originating from the Surakarta region. This dance is usually performed to welcome guests. Gambyong is not just one dance, but consists of many choreographies – the best known are the Gambyong Pareanom Dance (with several variations) and the Gambyong Pangkur Dance (with several variations).

Before the Mangkunegaran Duchy reorganized and standardized the structure of its movements, the dance belonged to the people as part of agricultural ceremonies so that the rice planted would thrive and obtain an abundant harvest. Dewi Sri is described as dancers who are dancing. Now, the Gambyong dance is used to enliven wedding receptions and welcome guests of honor or statehood.

In general, the Gambyong dance consists of three parts, namely the beginning, the content, and the end (in terms of Javanese dance, the Surakarta style is called the advanced beksan, beksan , and backward beksan ). The center of the whole dance lies in the movement of the feet, arms, body and head.

Conceptual head and hand movements are the main characteristic of the dance. The dancer’s eyes always accompany or follow every movement of the hand and the direction of the fingers. In addition, the foot movements that are so harmonious in rhythm make the dance beautiful to look at.

The clothes worn by the dancers are colored yellow and green as a symbol of prosperity and fertility. Before the dance begins, it is always opened with Pangkur gending. Movement techniques, rhythm, accompaniment, and drum patterns in this dance are also able to display the dancer’s flexible character.

5. Serimpi Dance

Serimpi is a form of presentation of classical Javanese dance from the Mataram Sultanate tradition, which was then continued to be preserved and developed until now by its four heir palaces in Surakarta and Yogyakarta. Serimpi dance in the Sultanate of Yogyakarta is classified into Serimpi Babul Layar, Serimpi Dhempel, and Serimpi Genjung. For Surakarta Sunanate, Serimpi is classified into Serimpi Anglir Mendhung and Serimpi Sangupati.

The emergence of this dance began when the Mataram Sultanate was ruled by Sultan Agung in 1613–1646. This dance is considered sacred because it is only performed in the palace environment for state rituals and the commemoration of the sultan’s ascension.

In 1775, the Mataram Sultanate split into two, namely the Yogyakarta Sultanate and the Surakarta Sultanate. This division has an impact on the differences in the movements of the Srimpi dance between the two, even though the essence of the dance is still the same. This dance appeared in the Surakarta Sunanate environment around 1788–1820.

Since the 1920s, this classical dance practice was included in the Taman Siswa subject in Yogyakarta and in the Kridha Beksa Wirama dance or karawitan association. After Indonesia’s independence, this dance was taught at the government dance and karawitan academies, both in Surakarta and Yogyakarta.

The presentation of this dance is characterized by four dancers performing graceful movements depicting politeness, delicacy and gentleness. Serimpi is considered to have a similar social position to the Pakarena dance from Makassar, which is seen in terms of the softness of the dancers’ movements and as a palace dance.

Since ancient times, the Serimpi dance has had a special position in Javanese courts and cannot be compared to other staged dances because of its sacred nature. In the past, this dance could only be performed by people chosen by the palace. Serimpi has the same sacred level as heirlooms or objects that symbolize the power of the king, although it is not as sacred as the Bedhaya dance.

In its performance, this dance does not always require offerings like the Bedhaya dance, but only at certain times. The musical accompaniment for the Srimpi dance prioritizes a combined choir, namely when singing Javanese songs.

Serimpi has experienced many developments from time to time, one of which is the duration of the performance. The dance has now been developed into several new variants with shorter durations. For example, Serimpi Anglirmendhung was changed to 11 minutes and Serimpi Gondokusumo was changed to 15 minutes, both of which were originally presented with a duration of approximately 60 minutes.

So, that’s a brief explanation of the Meaning and Origins of 5 Classical Dances from Central Java. These dances generally fade away with the times. For this reason, friends of Sinaumed’s, let us protect and preserve the culture of our ancestors together. Do not let us lose to cultures from outside Indonesia which are now better known globally, such as Anime, Korean Pop, and Gangnam Style Dance.

Sinaumed’s can also visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com to obtain references about social conditions in the Central Java region. The following are recommendations for sinaumedia books that Sinaumed’s can read to study them in full. Happy reading.

Recommended Books & Articles Related to Classical Dance from Central Java

Author: Fandy Aprianto Rohman

 

Matrilineal is – Matrilineal is a kinship system that draws bloodline from the mother’s side only. The child will then be connected to the mother including connected to the mother’s relatives, based on the unilateral female lineage.

The consequence of this kinship system is to attract offspring from the mother’s line which is considered very important. In matters of inheritance, it is the people from the mother’s line who will get more portions than those from the father’s line.

This kinship system can then be found in the Minangkabau and Semando communities. Children who are related to their mother based on female lineage.

In a matrilineal society, descent according to the mother’s own line is considered very important, so that it will give rise to family relations that are far more pervasive in families with descent according to the mother’s line. In Indonesia, this kinship system applies to the Minangkabau people.

Matrilineal in the Minangkabau Tribe

In family relationships there is a kinship system. This kinship system will then connect a nuclear family or small family with extended family members. Unlike the patrilineal kinship system adopted by tribes in general, the matrilineal system itself is rarely used.

In Indonesia there are not many tribes that adhere to this kinship system. However, one of the surviving tribes adhering to the matrilineal system is the Minangkabau tribe. The existence of the Minangkabau tribe dominates the province of West Sumatra with a large population.

Here are some unique facts regarding the matrilineal system adopted by the Minangkabau tribe that you need to know.

1. Doing Exogamy Marriage

In the matrilineal system, adat in Minangkabau does not support inter-tribal marriages. Even if they come from a different nagari (a village or area) but have the same tribe, then marriage is still seen as something that is not good.

Minangkabau custom is often concerned about damage to the ethnic line if two people from the same ethnic group marry. Those who end up violating these provisions will generally receive social sanctions, such as being ostracized from society.

With regard to exogamy marriages, it is not uncommon for the man to be given the dowry. The position of men with this condition will make them referred to as pick-up people. After marriage, a man will become a “guest” because they will then live in his wife’s family home.

2. The generation that is born will affect the size of the Gadang house that is inhabited

Rumah Gadang is an heirloom and is a place for various important events, from birth ceremonies to weddings. If a man has a family, the Gadang house is occupied by his sister with her husband and their children.

Home development will also adapt to the needs of girls. The more contents, the bigger the size of the house. Women also play a central role in the family structure. Several experts such as Naim, Anwar, and M. Radjab then mentioned what the meaning of family in a Gadang house includes, includingparuik, jurai, and samande.

Paruik is a term for 5–6 generations who occupy the Gadang house. This larger group is also known as jurai, while the smaller group is also known as samande.

In general, there is no neglect because each generation and group has an equally important role. For the Minangkabau people, living with a large family is the same as receiving great protection from the family.

Parents have responsibility for the survival of children, while children are responsible for families with old age. If these two provisions do not work, the responsibility will then be transferred to the saparuik family members.

If not, it will be taken over by members of the sajurai family, and so on up to a higher family level

3. Name of Descendant Withdrawn from One of the Parties

Matrilineal is a term that refers to a kinship system that draws lineage from the female (mother), both sons and daughters. They then bear the tribe in their name according to the tribe owned by the mother.

Starting from the ancestors to the newly born generation, Minangkabau children generally will not use the tribe from their father’s side. Because of this, the birth of a daughter was welcomed very well because later she would become the successor to the lineage of her tribe.

4. Inheritance for Collective Use

As previously mentioned, the Minangkabau people then have a very close relationship with their relatives. The strength of this relationship itself is based on common goals and interests, namely the ownership of houses and land.

So, even though women play a big role in ethnicity, it does not mean that women will get full power over inheritance or inheritance in their family. The Minangkabau people have the philosophy of Adat Basandi Syarak, Syarak Basandi Kitabullah. This means that besides adhering to adat, the Minangkabau people will also make Islamic teachings a guide in life, including in the distribution of inheritance.

Minangkabau people in general also adhere to inheritance from mamak (uncle or mother’s brother) to nephews. From the division of this inheritance, usually the inheritance will be used jointly by the recipient of the inheritance with other family members. In a way, the inherited property then cannot be divided and must remain intact because it belongs together.

5. There are some relationships between women and men in the system

The matrilineal system adopted by the Minangkabau tribe causes women and men to receive different titles. The difference itself depends on the type of relationship that is established. Here’s an explanation.

• Mother-niece relationship. Mamak is the name for the uncle and nephew is the name for the uncle’s nephew. This relationship itself is established between the uncle and the child of his sister or the relationship between a man or a woman and his uncle.
  It is Mamak who will play an important role in preserving the matrilineal system. He also served as a protector for his family at the Gadang house. Starting from guiding daughters to continue the matrilineal system of their tribe to guiding boys to be wise if one day they are faced with inheritance.
• The relationship is based on the Bako mother and the banana child. Induk bako is a term for a woman when it comes to the child of her brother. Meanwhile, the banana child itself shows the relationship between men and women with their father’s sister. The role of women here will be even wider when compared to the relationship in the previous point.
• Relations on the basis of trust. Husbands will be called sumando because they will be the party who stays in or lives in the house of his wife’s family while the wife is called pasumandan because they become the party that is boarded.

Even though it is somewhat complex, it cannot be denied that the matrilineal system which was later adopted by the Minangkabau tribe has given birth to a generation of strong women. The role of women in the Minang realm itself then occupies a high position until now.

Ethnicity in a World that Still Executes Matrilineal Customs

As we already know, matrilineal is a custom that passes inheritance to women or from the mother’s line. Apart from Indonesia, there are several ethnic groups in the world who still adhere to matrilineal culture, which countries are they?

1. Minangkabau

In the Minangkabau community, also known as Minang, located in Indonesia, all property, land and inheritance are passed from mother to daughter. Meanwhile, the father’s income will be passed on to the son.

In the past, this would then make women in Minang have power, but now, low incomes have contributed little to changes in modern social life. Even so, inheritance continues to be passed down to the mother’s line and the mother is still the head of the family.

The groom will generally be given to the bride from a female family member, who will escort him to the bride’s house. Overall power and authority would be divided equally between men and women, with women ruling the house, while men had spiritual and political roles. Both parties believed that this would make them equal.

Women in Minang have the right and power to choose a man to be made the chief of the tribe, then remove him from that position if it is felt that he is not the right person to be made the chief of the tribe.

2. Will

The Akan people are a multi-ethnic group in Ghana, where everything is governed according to matrilineal custom. In Ghana men are often the leaders of the tribe, while their power stems from the matrilineal line.

The men will not only help their own families, but also the families of the women. In general, women in Ghana will carry out many rituals and ceremonies, such as funerals, making food, as well as various house rules.

3. Mosoo

Mosuo China is a tribe that lives at the foot of the Himalayas. Mosuo is one of the most well-known examples of a society with matrilineal customs. They even have a tradition of “walking marriage” where women then have the right to choose their partner by walking directly to the house of the man they choose.

In this tribe the woman is entitled to more than one man and undergoes more than one marriage. Their offspring will later bear the last name and live with their mother, while the male may or may not be involved in raising the child.

4. Bribri

Located in northern Panama and Costa Rica, Bribri adheres to a matrilineal custom in which women inherit land and create a large family. The children who will enter the family of their mother and a grandmother are then seen as bearers of tradition and a source of knowledge.

While men with important roles are not allowed to impart knowledge or give jobs to their sons, only the sons of their sisters.

The women then have the right to prepare cocoa for the sacred Bribri ritual as one of the most important things in a tribe.

5. Garo

Garo is an indigenous tribe in Bangladesh and India. The Garo gave their tribal name after their mother, with the youngest daughter to be heir to all of the mother’s property. Adhering to the matrilineal custom, the women from Garo hold power and will be given the right to rule in the house.

6. Tuaregs

The Tuareg consist of a Berber people who have a nomadic lifestyle in the Sahara desert area. In social life, the women of the Tuareg will then have a high status and every tribe within it will be gathered together so that everyone can listen to the women who write and read.

While the men will raise animals. Most of the property and livestock will be owned by women, while private property will be inherited regardless of gender. Although the majority of them adhere to Islam, the Tuareg ethnicity is also influenced by several other cultures, one of which is matrilineal.

Matrilineal Related Books

1. Chinese Padang people – Dima the Earth is stepped on, Disinan Langik is upheld

There are two kongsi that are the pillars of Chinese society – the gedang and kecik kongsi, the temple as a moral binder and guardian of civilization, as well as close interaction with the Minang community based on a common language. As a result of this adaptation process, their culture now appears with mixed Chinese and Minang characteristics or is experiencing cultural hybridity.

2. Cultural Communication Understanding Interhuman and Intercultural Communication

Intercultural communication is the process of exchanging thoughts and meanings between people of different cultures. When communication occurs between people of different nationalities, racial groups or language communities, the communication is called intercultural communication (hereinafter referred to as KAB).

So basically intercultural communication examines how culture influences communication activities, what are the meanings of verbal and nonverbal messages according to the cultures concerned, what is appropriate to be communicated, when to communicate it, and how to communicate it verbally and nonverbally.

3. Intercultural Communication in the Age of Cyber ​​Culture

The development and growth of the internet today has changed the face of the world. There are many things that have changed. Things that were previously limited by geographic conditions and terrain are now slowly fading away, making the exchange of information take place continuously all the time.

But on the other hand, this condition also blurs the boundaries between cultures, changes the way of communicating between cultures, and directly or indirectly creates a mixture of cultures.

Now we know that matrilineal is a system of kinship and culture or custom which is still carried out by several tribes in the world, including the Minang tribe in Indonesia. Sinaumed’s can read books related to culture on sinaumedia.com so they can understand it better. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products so you have #MoreWithReading information.

In the previous article, Eduteam has discussed the simple present tense and simple past tense material which includes definitions, formulas, and example questions. The next general form of tenses is the simple future tense, which is a tense that describes an event that will occur in the future. If You masters these three basic forms of tenses, it will be easier to learn other tenses which are variations of the three

A. Definition of Simple Future Tense

Simple future tense is a tense to describe an event that has not yet started and will occur in the future. Sentences in the simple future tense can be marked by using the words will, shall, and going to. The simple future tense is also used to express a prediction or desire.

B. The Simple Future Tense formula

In simple future tense sentences, the basic verb (V1) will be followed by the auxilary modal will or the phrasal modal be going to. Take a look at the following form of the simple future tense formula:

C. Adverb of Time

Adverbs of time are very important to know so that You can determine which tenses the sentence uses. The following is a description of the time that is generally used in the simple future tense:

Tomorrow : tomorrow

Later : later

Next week : next week

Next month : next month

Next year : next year

soon : immediately

Tonight : tonight

By and by: Soon

The day after tomorrow : The day after tomorrow

It’s actually quite easy to remember the timestamp. The time of the event that “will happen” or “happens later” is a future tense sentence. For example, in this morning, in this evening, in this afternoon can be used as a description of the future tense if the context of that time has not happened and will happen. You can learn this more easily through the book The 1st Students Choice Changing Times Changing Tenses.

D. Use of the Simple Future Tense

1. Declare an event that will occur in the future.

2. Declare something that has been decided to do.

3. Declare an offer/request/invitation to other people.

4. Declare a decision to do something without a plan.

5. Expressing an emotion or feeling.

E. The difference between Will, Shall, and Going to

Broadly speaking, the words will, shall, and going to have the same meaning, which means “will”. However, in some circumstances the word can also have different meanings based on the context.

Will/Shall

Will is used for the subjects I, You, We, They, He, She and It

Shall is used for the subject I, We

Expresses a desire and an unwillingness (definite possibility)

Stating a fact or general truth

Stating a promise or offering yourself spontaneously

going to

Can be used for subjects I, You, We, They, He, She, and It

Using to be am/is/are after the subject, for example: I am going to…, She is going to…

Expressing a desire but only limited to the intention

F. Simple Future Tense Practice Questions

Lia : … to Surabaya?

Hana : Next month

a. When do you move

b. When will you move

c. Where are you going to move

d. Will you move

Discussion :

The correct interrogative sentence is When will you move because Hana’s answer next moth which means next month shows that the dialogue above uses the simple future tense.

Iga : The car won’t start, Mom. I think it’s broken.

Ms. X : Don’t worry. The mechanics… it soon.

a. has fixed

b. will fix

c. fixed

d. have fixed

Discussion :

Ms. X answered using the time description soon, which means later/as soon as possible. Soon is an adverb of time used in the simple future tense.

You … (be) able to drive after another five lessons

a. are being

b. is be

c. shall be

d. will be

d. well being

Discussion :

In the sentence there is an adverb “after” which means “after”, but the form of the sentence used is not past, meaning it is a plan.

Ardi : When … you go there?

Bian : I think next week.

a. did

b. are

c. will

d. do

Discussion:

next week = next week, indicating that the sentence is asking for an action that will be carried out in the future (future tense), so the correct word is will.

Nanda : This letter is in French, and I don’t speak a word in French. Can you help me?

Lois: Sure, I … it’s for you.

a. will translate

b. am going to translate

c. won’t translate

d. am not going to translate

Discussion :

During the conversation, Lois offers her help in translating the letter Nanda received. Lois did it because she voluntarily wanted to do it, without her planning it first.

How about You, now you understand how to learn the simple future tense. You can do similar questions at Sinaumedia.com. Have a good study!

Before going into the discussion of the past future tense material , Sinaumedia would like to repeat a little about the simple past tense and simple future tense which form the tenses which we will discuss further. The simple past tense is used to talk about an event that happened in the past and ended in the past at a specific time.

Sentences in the simple past tense are marked with a second verb (verb2) which shows the past tense. One of the characteristics of this sentence is the simple past tense is the use of verb 2 in the positive sentence.

Well, for the simple future tense, it is a tense to explain an event that has not yet started and will occur in the future. Sentences in the simple future tense can be marked by using the words will, shall, and going to. The simple future tense is also used to express a prediction or desire.

Definition of Past Future Tense

Past future tense is a tense that describes events in the future from the perspective of the past. For example, I would come to Nina’s birthday. In would come, it describes an action (in the form of a promise to come) in the past that will occur in the future, namely Nina’s birthday.

The past future tense can be used to express an event that will be carried out, make predictions and make promises in the future while in the past. The Book of Propositions 16 Tense Edition I by Polce Aryanto Bessies Ifoni Ludji Teresia Yanti summarizes the 16 tenses to make it easier for You to learn them.

Past Future Tense formula

Past future tense has two different forms. First, it is a past form of modals shall/will so that the use of the past future tense becomes should/would. The second is the past form of the auxiliary verb “be”, namely am, is, are, were, were, and going to. This book entitled The 1st Students Choice Changing Times Changing Tenses will help you in constructing the right sentence for a particular time.

Notes:

would+not can be shortened to wouldn’t, and should+not can be shortened to shouldn’t.

Example of sentences:

I would buy pizza for you
I would not buy pizza for you
would I buy pizza for you? (Shall I buy you pizza?)

They were going to visit me
They were not going to visit me > not going to here the context could be not so
Were they going to visit me? (Will they visit me?)

Each of the examples above has a context in the form of an action or intention that was carried out in the past for future events.

Use of Past Future Tense

1. Declare an event that will occur at a time that will have occurred in the past.
Example:
I should go to Semarang last year (I will go to Semarang last year)

2. Declare an event, action, and deed that becomes a habit.
Example:
I would sit here for a long time

3. Declare an event, action, and deed that becomes a must.
Example:
We should obey the rules

Understanding this verb itself is not easy and requires constant memory and practice. For You who want to learn and memorize verbs in tenses, you can read the Complete New Phrasal Verb Dictionary (English-Indonesia) which provides verbs for each word and also its translation.

Time Signal

The way to find out which sentence is being discussed uses which tenses, can be identified by looking at the context and the time information used. Usually the past future tense uses the following time information:

Yesterday : Yesterday

Last week : Last week

Last month : Last month

Last year : Last year

The next day : The next day

The day before : Before today

The week before : The week before

The month before : The month before

Examples of Sentences Past Future Tense

You would meet him if you knew about him

They were not going to go to the party

I thought that he would forgive you for making a mistakes (I thought that he would forgive you for your mistakes)

I already told her that when she arrived, we would watch a movie together

I knew he would make a dinner

He told me he was going to Manila

I would not be angry if you say the truth

Were they going to pick me up? (Will they pick me up)

Would your mom believe you? (Will your mother believe you?)

Dina would finish her study in an hour

Examples of Past Future Tense Questions

1. i … came late to your party tonight

A. will

B. would

C.am

D. was

Discussion: to your party tonight is a sentence that will occur in the future, while the context of the conversation is in the past. So the word used is would because I predicts that he will arrive late.

2. Jasmine … going to give you a present

A.is

B. has

C. was

D were

Discussion: The sentence is in the context of the past future tense. Jasmine is the subject she uses to be “was. So the answer is C.

3. My dad told me that he would … on time

A. come

B. came

C. comes

D. comed

Discussion: Past future tense uses the formula S + would/should + V1 , from the multiple choices above the one that fits the formula is A.

4. Dani told me that he was going to … pizza

A. bought

B. bought

C. buy

D. buys

Discussion: there are 2 formulas in the past future tense, besides S + would/should + V1 , you can also use S + was/were + going to + V1, from the multiple choices above the one that fits the formula is C.

5. My Mom … me a cake

A. were going to buy

B. will be going to buy

C. would buy

D. would buy

Discussion: based on multiple choice, the correct sentence to complete it is would buy because in the past future tense the sentence structure is S + should/would + V1. While the other options are not in accordance with any tenses sentence patterns.

Definition of Future Perfect Tense

Future Perfect Tense is a sentence that functions to express an event that was started in the past and will be completed in the future. The use of the future perfect tense is to include a clear time in the future. For example in the form of hours, next day, etc. This is to provide clarity that the event will be completed before another event occurs.

When to use the future perfect tense? The answer is when you want to state something that will be done or done in the past and will be completed in the future.

The tenses in English vary greatly according to the time of delivery which you can all learn in the book Definitely Can! English Communicative Teaching 12 Tenses Grammar Materials.

Future Perfect Tense formula

Basically the main formula of the future perfect tense in a positive form is subject + will + have + verb-3 + complement. Meanwhile, in the negative form, subject + will + not + have + verb-3 + complement. Whereas in the form of an interrogative sentence it becomes will + subject + + have + verb-3 + complement?

However, as in the present perfect tense and simple present tense , the English Academy will divide the formula for the future perfect tenses into nominal sentence types and verbal sentences. So, you can see the further discussion below.

Verbal Formulas

The verbal formula in the future perfect tense is in the positive form ( subject + will + have + verb-3 + complement), in the negative form ( subject + will + not+ have + verb-3 + complement ), in the form of questions ( will + subject + + have + verb-3 + complement? ). To make it easier to understand the verbal formula in the future perfect tense, you can see the example below.

(+) I will have graduated when we meet next year
(-) I will have not taken the exam
(?) Will he have done it by this evening? (Has he been going to finish it this afternoon?)

(+) I will have watched the film The Batman (I will have watched the film The Batman )
(-) I will not have watched the film The Batman (I will not have watched the film The Batman )
(?) Will he have watched the film The Batman (Has he been going to watch The Batman movie yet ?)

Nominal Formula

Nominal formulas in future perfect tense sentences in the form of positive sentences ( subject + will + have + been + complement ), negative sentences ( subject + will + not+ have + been + complement ), and interrogative sentences or sentences ( will + subject + have + been + complement? ).

(+) I will have been at your house when the party starts
(-) I will have not been there by this evening
(?) Will you have been here tonight? (Will you be here tonight?)

Characteristics of the Future Perfect Tense

After discussing the formula of the future perfect tense, the next discussion is its characteristics.

• The future perfect tense in the form of a nominal sentence after have will have a third verb from “be”, namely been . Therefore, in this sentence formula, do not use regular or irregular verbs which function to provide a clear explanation of an action or event.
• In the verbal sentence formula, the writing of the verb is changed to a third verb by adding an additional affix, namely “ed”. The prefix “ed” is placed at the end of the verb in the sentence.
• In all subjects used in future perfect tense sentences, use have, whether it’s a singular or plural subject. As for singular subjects, such as (I, she, he, and it) and plural subjects, such as (you, we, and they).

Future Perfect Tense function

The future perfect tense has the function of talking about or discussing an event or events that have occurred in the future. Therefore, when using this tense, it is as if we are thinking or imagining someone or ourselves in the future. In addition, this tense also talks about an action or event that will be completed at a time after now. In simple terms, the future perfect tense functions to express time expressions relating to the future.

How to Make Future Perfect Tense

The Future Perfect tense can be said to be tricky because we need to pay attention to the third verb of the verb (verb). In addition, sentence structure also needs to be considered, such as positive sentences, negative sentences using “not”, and use in interrogative sentences. Here’s how to make future perfect tense sentences.

1. Must see the formula, want to use the verbal formula or nominal formula

2. Follow the structure of each formula (verbal or nominal)

3. Notice the use of the verb in the third verb form

Time Description Future Perfect Tense

by next … : ahead of … ahead
by next week : ahead of next week
by Sunday : ahead of Sunday
by tomorrow : ahead of tomorrow
by next month : ahead of next month

The use of tenses to describe adverbs of time is very important, such as the use of adverbs of time above as adverbs of time in the future tense. You can learn this more easily through the book The 1st Students Choice Changing Times Changing Tenses.

Examples of Future Perfect Tense Sentenes

I will not have graduated next May
The work will not have been finished next month
I will not have been at your house tomorrow tomorrow)
Will you have graduated next May? (Have you graduated next May?)
Rina will have done her home work (
Rina will have left at 9 pm)
He will have posted 100 images next week (He will publish 100 pictures next week)

Examples of Future Perfect Tense Questions

Problem 1

She … the meeting room by 12 ‘oclock.

A. will have left

B. will left

C. is leaving

D. was left

Discussion: The question contains specific time information, namely 12 o’clock, so the sentence can use the future perfect tense with the formula S + will + have + V3. So the answer is A .

Problem 2

They … their study by evening

A. finished

B. will have finished

C. will have finished

D. are finishing

Discussion: The question contains a specific time statement, namely by evening, so the sentence can use the future perfect tense with the formula S + will + have + V3. So the answer is B .

Problem 3

Will we … it tomorrow?

A. do

B. did

C. are doing

D. have done

Discussion: The question contains a specific time statement, namely tomorrow, so the sentence can use the future perfect tense with the formula will + S + have + V3. So the answer is D .

Problem 4

I will … when we meet next year.

A. graduates

B. graduate

C. have graduated

D. graduates

Discussion: The question contains specific time information, namely next year, so the sentence can use the future perfect tense with the formula S + will + have + V3. So the answer is C.

Problem 5

Will my mom…?

A. slept

B. sleep

C. have slept

D. will sleep

Discussion: The interrogative sentence of the future perfect tense is will + S + have + V3. So the answer is C .

It should be underlined, the future perfect tense has little resemblance to the simple future tense. However, if the sentence whose context is the future perfect tense, then use a specific adverb of time.

Mass Communication – Mass communication is communication addressed to a wide audience or the general public with heterogeneous nature of communication. Mass communication can occur by using a variety of mass media as a suggestion to support this communication.

The mass media used in mass communication can also be in the form of audio, audio visual, print media or outdoor media. What is mass communication? The following is an explanation of the meaning, function and characteristics of mass communication. Check out this article to the end to find out more!

Understanding Mass Communication According to Experts

In order for Sinaumed’s to know and understand about mass communication, Sinaumed’s must first know the meaning of mass communication. The following is the definition of mass communication according to experts.

1. John R Bittner
   Bittner revealed that mass communication is a message that can be communicated or conveyed through the mass media to a large number of people at once.
2. Gerbner
   Mass communication according to Gerbner is the production and distribution that has a foundation on an institutional technology through the flow of messages that have a continuity or continuity. Gerbner also argued that mass communication can produce a product in the form of a communication message. The product of this mass communication will be disseminated to a wide audience continuously at regular intervals, for example, every week or every month.
3. Maletzke
   Maletzke argues that mass communication is a form of communication that can convey statements openly through technical dissemination media, indirectly and has a one-way nature.
4. Freidson
   Mass communication is defined by Freidson as communication aimed at a number of populations originating from various groups, mass communication according to Freidson does not only target one individual but several individuals at once.
   Friedson also argues that communication has the implicit assumption that there will be a special tool to be able to send messages so that they can arrive at the same time to everyone at once without having to represent only a few layers of society.
5. Wright
   Mass communication according to Wright is a form of communication directed to a heterogeneous and anonymous wide audience. Messages conveyed through the mass media also have an open nature and the message is able to be received simultaneously to the general public.
6. Pearce
   Pearce argues that mass communication is a process that occurs between an individual, a group of people or an organization that can create a message by transmitting it through several types of media to a large audience heterogeneously and anonymously.
7. Jalaludin Rakhmat
   According to Jalaludin Rakhmat mass communication is one of the types of communication addressed to several audiences which is spread through print media, magazines, newspapers, electronics, television and radio. Because the message is conveyed through various media, the message can be received simultaneously and momentarily.
8. Josep A Devito
   Mass communication is communication addressed to a large audience or large masses. According to Devito, mass communication can be carried out by several institutions through media such as television, radio, newspapers, films, books and magazines.
9. Mass Communication According to Language
   In discussing, mass communication or mass communication is a process of delivering messages through mass media or communicating with the media. The term mass communication is an abbreviation derived from mass media communication. Mass media also stands for mass communication media.
   When viewed in more detail, the meaning of mass communication according to language is, message delivery communication, the media is the channel or means of conveying messages and the masses are the crowds or the public.
   From the notion of mass communication according to that language, Littlejohn argues that communication cannot be separated by any one person from the communication media and the process of mass communication, because according to Littlejohn only communication media is capable of connecting sources with audiences, both as individuals and as institutions in society. .

According to the understanding of mass communication from several experts and according to the language, the notion of mass communication can be concluded, mass communication is a type of communication delivered to the general public using various mass media and carried out heterogeneously and anonymously.

 

 

Characteristics of Mass Communication

Hafied Cangara argues that mass communication is one type of communication that has a significant difference from other forms of communication. Mass communication has messages that are open to a wide variety of audiences, such as differences in terms of age, ethnicity, religion, occupation and needs.

Having a significant difference with other types of communication, here are the characteristics of mass communication to distinguish it from other types of communication.

1. Institutional communicators

Mass communication has the characteristic of being a communicator in mass communication who can move in a complex organization but has an institutional nature. The mass communication message delivery agency conveys its message through various mass media, such as newspapers, the internet, radio, television, books, magazines and so on.

2. The message conveyed has a general nature

In contrast to the types of interpersonal or personal communication, messages conveyed through mass communication have a general nature. Thus, the message is not only addressed to one individual or several individuals and is not personal.

Mass communication conveys a general message and is addressed to a broad general audience. Therefore, the process of mass communication is running openly. This can happen, because the communicants of mass communication are spread in various places, besides that the messages conveyed also contain news and have elements of facts that are important and interesting to all levels of society from various walks of life.

3. The communicants of mass communication are heterogeneous and anonymous

From the understanding of mass communication according to experts, it can be seen that some experts argue that mass communication has one of the same characteristics, namely its communication is heterogeneous and anonymous. Communicators or recipients of information in mass communication are heterogeneous and anonymous.

This is because, mass communication conveys messages from the communicator in a general way to the whole community or the general public, with varied community conditions and not knowing each other. Regardless of gender, age, customs, culture, race, social strata and others, mass communication messages are conveyed to the general public and openly.

4. Has a unison nature

According to Effendy, mass communication has the same characteristics. Mass communication is delivered to many people, the general public with a very large number of individuals and communicants over long distances. Messages conveyed using mass media simultaneously and quickly.

5. The message conveyed is one-way

The fifth characteristic of mass communication is that it is one-way. That is, mass communication occurs directly between the communicant and the communicator, but the communicator and communicant do not meet each other and cannot respond directly to the message conveyed. Is one-way, the communicator in mass communication who has control of the communication.

6. Delayed feedback occurs or the feedback given is delayed

This sixth characteristic of mass communication is related to the fifth characteristic. Because the communicant and communicator do not communicate directly and communication is one-way, the feedback will be delayed.

Communicators and communicators in mass communication do not know the reaction of the general public when the message is conveyed. So there is feedback delayed in mass communication.

In general, those are the six characteristics of mass communication. However, several experts also expressed opinions regarding the characteristics of mass communication. The following are the characteristics of mass communication according to experts.

 

 

Characteristics of Mass Communication According to Experts

According to experts such as William R. Rivers, McQuail and others, here are some of the characteristics of mass communication that distinguish mass communication from other types of communication.

1. William R Rivers, et al

The characteristics of mass communication according to RIvers et al are as follows:

• Walk one way.
• There is a process between media selection to select audiences as communicants.
• Can reach a wide audience from various walks of life.
• Aiming or targeting certain communicants with the segmentation desired by the communicator.
• Carried out by a social institution such as the press and the media as well as the public influence each other and interact from mass communication.

2. McCail

According to McQuail, mass communication has five characteristics that distinguish it from other types of communication.

• The source of communication is not only one person, but also involves a formal organization, the sender or sender of the message is often a professional communicator who is an expert in his field.
• Messages conveyed through mass communication can be varied, easily predictable, can be processed, through standardization, reproduced and become commodity products that have valuable exchange values.
• Recipients of mass communication messages are part of the wider audience.
• Mass communication includes simultaneous contact between one sender and many message recipients.

3. Michael W Gamble and Teri Kwal Gamble

In 1986, both of them stated that mass communication has the following characteristics.

• In mass communication, communicators can rely on modern equipment to be able to spread or transmit messages quickly to the general public and disseminated through the mass media.
• Communicators in mass communication can spread messages with the intention of trying to get variety, understanding or attention from millions of people who do not know each other.
• Messages conveyed through mass communication belong to the public. This means that the message is easy to obtain and can be received by anyone.
• Communicators in mass communication are generally formal organizations such as organizations, certain group networks, associations and so on. The communicator also does not come from a person or individual, but from something that has a larger nature, such as an institution.
• Mass communication is controlled by a number of people or referred to as gatekeepers to control a message before the message is disseminated to the general public. Gatekeepers can be someone who works as an editor or editor.
• In mass communication, feedback has a delayed nature. The delayed feedback is caused because mass communication is conveyed through different mass media than other types of communication. Because, mass communication is not done directly.

4. Elizabeth Noelle Neuman

According to Neuman in 1983 in one of his books, there are four main characteristics of mass communication, along with their characteristics.

• Mass communication has an indirect nature when the message is conveyed to the communicant.
• Mass communication has one-way characteristics.
• Mass communication has the characteristics of being open and the messages conveyed are not closed.
• Mass communication has the characteristic of publics that are geographically dispersed anywhere.

Mass Communication Function

Mass communication does not exist only to achieve one goal, especially with the various evolutions that have occurred, mass communication has become an increasing role in social life. According to Wright, there are seven functions of mass communication, one of which is to offer insight into the role of humans or society in life. The following is the function of communication and its explanation.

1. Supervision, mass communication has a supervisory function that becomes the eyes and ears of people who are looking for information about something. An example is the internet and newspapers which are now a means for every individual to seek important information, ranging from information about the weather, current issues and even gossip. Now, people rely more on mass communication to access information easily and quickly.
2. Correlation, the function of correlation in mass communication means that the media presents facts that are used by society to move around the world. Information disseminated through mass communication is not objective and without bias.
3. Sensationalization, according to the function of sensationalization in mass communication, means that the media prioritizes the most sensational messages to achieve passion from consumers.
4. Entertainment, mass communication also has a function as entertainment, for example, mass communication that is spread through magazines, television, online news and others that provide various information or entertaining messages for the general public. The fourth function of mass communication is more pronounced than the other functions of mass communication. Especially when the internet began to develop and many communicants spread entertaining messages through various mass media that are easily accessible to the general public.
5. Transmission or dissemination, mass communication using mass media has the function of being a ‘vehicle’ or means of transmission that helps convey cultural norms, rules, values ​​and customs. The mass media has an important role in the process of socialization and dissemination of information.
6. Mobilization, the sixth function of mass communication is to mobilize people who have been in a period of crisis. An example is when an event occurs that befalls a city in a country. In this case, the mass media has a role to mobilize the general public to share in the experience or event so as to create a feeling that the event also happened to him because it happened in the country he lives in.
7. Validation, the final function of mass communication is validation of the status and norms of certain individuals, organizations, movements and products. The validation of certain people and groups has a function to be able to uphold social norms. The mass media in mass communication can validate certain cultural norms while eliminating differences and variations from existing norms.

The seven functions of mass communication make Mc Luhan and Fiore argue that mass communication needs to be reflected in the life of every society. Especially when the mass communication media is now growing.

That is an explanation of what is mass communication? Starting from the understanding according to language and experts, the characteristics and functions of mass communication. Sinaumed’s can find out more about mass communication by reading books.

Masochist Is – Today, many people don’t understand the definition of the term masochist, but often use it to make it look cool. But the truth is that this masochist is a form of sexual deviance, you know… and can even risk the death of his partner. Indirectly, the laws in our country have regulated that this masochist action is strictly prohibited because it violates the rules. So, what is a masochist? What is the perspective of human rights and law in Indonesia in viewing this masochist action? So, so that You understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

What is a Masochist?

The term “masochist” originally came from the name of an Austrian writer in the 19th century, namely Leopold von Sacher-Masoch. In the novels he wrote, it is quite common to mention characters who have an obsession with the combination of sex and pain. That is what underlies the definition of a masochist, namely a person’s disorder where a person will feel passionate if he is hurt or even humiliated (verbally) by his partner. In a broader sense, this masochist refers to an experience of receiving pleasure or satisfaction from painful suffering.

Not many people know that this masochist belongs to the paraphilia section, which is a disorder related to impulses, behavior, and the desire to generate strong sexual arousal through deviant sexual behavior. Often, this sexual disorder is associated with sadistic behavior, because the perpetrator will indeed do sadistic things during sexual intercourse to get sexual satisfaction, on a reciprocal basis. In a sense, the perpetrators of sadism will get sexual arousal satisfaction through efforts to hurt their partners, while their partners will also feel satisfied after they have been hurt or humiliated (verbally).

It should be noted that this masochistic activity can lead to death. Of all the activities of masochism, the most dangerous is hypoxyphilia. In this hypoxophilic activity, the patient will be sexually aroused by the lack of oxygen consumption. Starting with using plastic bags, rope snares, to chemicals that can suppress the chest so that breathing will be disturbed and cause death.

Since this masochistic actor likes painful things to gain sexual satisfaction, he will also do things that most people rarely do. For example by tying or hurting himself when he was having sex fantasies or masturbating. Meanwhile, if the masochist is going to have sex, he will ask his partner to tie him up, close his eyes, and whip him to make him more aroused. This masochist is referred to as a sexual disorder that turns out to occur from childhood to adolescence and is usually experienced by women.

The hallmark of a masochist is to hurt himself. Related to this, masochism is divided into 2 things, namely moral masochists and eros masochists. This moral masochist refers to someone who has an unconscious pleasure when someone hurts his feelings. When her feelings are hurt, of course she will cry and look sad, but that sadness actually makes her feel “happy”. Meanwhile, masochist eros deals with things that are physical in nature and not only in sexual activity.

Masochist Becomes a Life-Threatening Sexual Disorder

For You , who is old enough and has seen the film Fifty Shades of Gray , he must be aware that the film shows a sexual disorder in the form of masochism. Since this sexual disorder is often used as a theme in a film, surely many will consider it understandable. When in fact, when viewed from a psychological perspective, this sexual disorder can be very dangerous and can even be life threatening, both for himself and his sexual partner.

This masochistic behavior often manifests his sexual fantasies by injuring himself. So that not infrequently, he will cut his skin or burn himself in order to get sexual satisfaction. Indeed, often perpetrators realize that their sexual fantasies only apply in an effort to “play a role” when they are having sexual intercourse. However, it is not uncommon for the hardness to level up to the stage of autocortic asphyxiation.

Just a little trivia , this autoorotic asphyxiation is a subtype of sexual masochism, in which the culprit deliberately suffocates or suffocates himself. Usually, masochists at this level of asphyxia will wrap their heads in plastic until they run out of oxygen. Then, there were also those who wrapped ropes around their necks so that they suffocated. This of course can cause a lack or depletion of the supply of oxygen from within the body so that it becomes difficult to breathe and dies.

Masochist in the Perspective of Human Rights and Criminal Law in Indonesia

According to a research article written by Inna Fauziatal Ngazizah and Maria Ulfa Fatmawati with the title Sadomasochism in Indonesia Perspective on Human Rights and Criminal Law, it states that in fact masochist actions which are included in the form of sadomasochism have included actions that are prohibited by criminal law as well as violating human rights. This research was conducted using the field observation method, then analyzed using the description-analysis method.

Does You know what sadomasochism is? This sadomasochism is cruel, vicious, or violent behavior that actually gives sexual satisfaction to the perpetrator. So, it can be said that sexual satisfaction will be obtained by hurting or being hurt by the person he loves, both physically and spiritually. This action actually becomes a form of mental disorder , you know… which makes the sufferer will get satisfaction when hurting or being hurt by other parties. If based on the term, this sadomasochism comes from two meanings namely “sadism” and “masochism”. Sadism itself is a form of sexual deviation by obtaining satisfaction, through the torture givento partner. Meanwhile, masochism is a form of sexual satisfaction he receives from his partner.

In Islam, scholars have agreed to prohibit marital relations with all forms of violence. The thing that is needed is how to create a relationship that upholds equality based on respect and affection. Well, the opinion of these scholars is also almost in line with Law Number 23 of 2004 Article 5 which states that “Everyone is prohibited from committing domestic violence against people within the scope of his household in four ways. The first is physical violence in the form of beatings, pinching, grabbing, collisions and so on. The second is psychological violence, such as body shaming, insults, reproaches, harsh words. The third is sexual violence. Fourth is home abandonment, such as leaving home without information on the causes and reasons.”

In this study, sources were taken from research that had previously been conducted with the title “Sexual Deviations in Husband and Wife Relationships Perspective of Islamic Law and Law Number 23 of 2004 Concerning Domestic Violence (KDRT)”by Mawardi. In the previous journal, it also discussed sexual deviations in husband and wife relations from the perspective of Islamic law and Law no. 23 of 2004, here only explains that the form of sexual deviation in a husband and wife relationship is in the form of sexual sadism and sexual intercourse in the wife’s rectum which is usually carried out by homosexual couples. This is in Article 8 Letter A of Law no. 23 of 2004 including acts of domestic violence (KDRT) and in Islam it is not allowed because this causes harm, persecution, and is not in accordance with Islamic religious teachings and is contrary to the goals of Islam, namely Rahmatan lil alamin which means to bring mercy to the universe .

Yep, the existence of this sadism and masochist is a form of sexual fantasy that involves torture in sexual intercourse. For sufferers of this masochist, they will be satisfied with their partner’s torture, from being whipped to dripping with hot wax. Therefore, the couple of a sadistic and masochist must in practice give and receive pain to each other to stimulate their sexual libido. In fact, not infrequently, this couple will exchange roles between sadistic and masochist when having sex.

The masochist action that deserves attention from HAM is hypoxophilia. Hypoxyphilia is sexual arousal by experiencing limited oxygen with the media of ropes, plastic bags, chest compressions which can reduce oxygen levels for some time (Noermala Sari, 2006: 625). Masochism traits have the same form as sadistic traits.

Factors that cause masochist behavior are parental behavior, guilt and a deep sense of love for their partners. Parental behavior arises during childhood when their parents hit them in the erogenous area and get satisfaction because of that treatment. Thus causing the incident to occur repeatedly. A person’s guilt towards his partner will make him try hard to get his partner’s forgiveness even though he gets a sense of suffering. A deep sense of love is the beginning of masochist behavior to get pleasure in sexual activity.

This act of sadomasochism becomes a form of violence in a relationship between two people in their relationship. It was recorded that there had been a lot of violence in the household until 2018, namely around 1046 cases of complaints. This number increases every year and around 22 cases are sexual violence, with the following description:

• The victim was forced to carry out sexual activities using an intermediary tool. Threats are made by the partner if they don’t follow their wishes.
• The victim experienced bleeding from her genitals because her partner used objects or accessories on her genitals.
• The victim was forced to have sexual intercourse with a partner who had a venereal disease.
• The victim was forced to have an unusual relationship. The unusual relationship meant that one of the partners had a tendency to sexual deviation before having intercourse, such as being beaten first.
• The victim experienced torture in sexual intercourse.

The cases of violence described above are of concern from the aspect of protection which is still lacking because almost every day cases of domestic violence still occur. Even though Article 28 G paragraph (1) of the second amendment of the 1945 Constitution states that: “Everyone has the right to protection of himself/herself, family, honor, dignity and property under his control, and has the right to feel safe and protected from threats of fear to do or not doing something that is a human right”

The Criminal Code outlines that abuse and violence perpetrated by men against women in a relationship has an element of greater sanction when compared to the usual criminal acts of abuse that have no legal relationship, as described in articles 351 to 355 of the Criminal Code. The forms of violence referred to in the law are:

1. Physical violence, directly in the form of beatings, scrapes to destruction, sexual violence and direct physical violence.
2. Psychological violence, acts that result in fear, a feeling of helplessness and self-doubt.
3. Sexual violence, acts in the form of coercion of sexual intercourse, coercion of unnatural relations.

The form above becomes part of the character of sadomasochism. Violence committed or received by one of the spouses can basically be criminalized if the act is unwanted or disliked by society. The benchmark is an act committed to bring victims or aggrieved parties. Physical violence becomes more problematic if the victim of violence cannot show physical evidence of the violence committed by their partner.

Masochist Is – Today, the term masochist is often used in various discussions both orally and in writing. Not infrequently, this term is heralded as something great, but in fact it is not like that. There are also many people who don’t understand the definition of the term masochist, so they often use it to make it look cool. But the truth is that this masochist is a form of sexual deviance, you know… and can even risk the death of his partner. So what is a masochist then? What are the symptoms and causes of masochism in a person? How do you overcome a masochist in someone? So, so that You understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

What is a Masochist?

The term “masochist” originally came from the name of an Austrian writer in the 19th century, namely Leopold von Sacher-Masoch. In the novels he wrote, it is quite common to mention characters who have an obsession with the combination of sex and pain. That is what underlies the definition of a masochist, namely a person’s disorder where a person will feel passionate if he is hurt or even humiliated (verbally) by his partner. In a broader sense, this masochist refers to an experience of receiving pleasure or satisfaction from painful suffering.

Not many people know that this masochist belongs to the paraphilia section, which is a disorder related to impulses, behavior, and the desire to generate strong sexual arousal through deviant sexual behavior. Often, this sexual disorder is associated with sadistic behavior, because the perpetrator will indeed do sadistic things during sexual intercourse to get sexual satisfaction, on a reciprocal basis. In a sense, the perpetrators of sadism will get sexual arousal satisfaction through efforts to hurt their partners, while their partners will also feel satisfied after they have been hurt or humiliated (verbally).

It should be noted that this masochistic activity can lead to death. Of all the activities of masochism, the most dangerous is hypoxyphilia. In this hypoxophilic activity, the patient will be sexually aroused by the lack of oxygen consumption. Starting with using plastic bags, rope snares, to chemicals that can suppress the chest so that breathing will be disturbed and cause death.

Since this masochistic actor likes painful things to gain sexual satisfaction, he will also do things that most people rarely do. For example by tying or hurting himself when he was having sex fantasies or masturbating. Meanwhile, if the masochist is going to have sex, he will ask his partner to tie him up, close his eyes, and whip him to make him more aroused. This masochist is referred to as a sexual disorder that turns out to occur from childhood to adolescence and is usually experienced by women.

The hallmark of a masochist is to hurt himself. Related to this, masochism is divided into 2 things, namely moral masochists and eros masochists. This moral masochist refers to someone who has an unconscious pleasure when someone hurts his feelings. When her feelings are hurt, of course she will cry and look sad, but that sadness actually makes her feel “happy”. Meanwhile, masochist eros deals with things that are physical in nature and not only in sexual activity.

Symptoms of a Masochist

Reporting from Doktersehat.com , someone who has this masochist causes symptoms in the form of:

• Having intense and recurring sexual fantasies, usually 6 months old. Starting from the act of being beaten, tied up, humiliated (orally), or made to suffer as much as possible.
• Having significant sexual disorders can actually cause problems in various areas of life, both social and work.

Things That Lead to Masochists

Actually, there is no underlying theory about what causes a masochist in a person. However, there are several theories that “try” to explain that masochistic activity is included in sexual paraphilia in general.

1. Trauma

Trauma that is felt by someone, especially during childhood, will really make an impression until he becomes an adult. Based on psychoanalysis, trauma experienced in childhood, especially due to sexual abuse, will greatly trigger this masochist when he grows up later. Now, over time, this painful experience tends to make it a sexual deviation, so that he will really enjoy the pain from the trauma he experienced.

2. Environmental Factors

Sexual disorders are also strongly influenced by environmental factors, you know! Yep, how the condition of the surrounding environment will greatly affect how one’s mindset, behavior, lifestyle, to sexual tendencies from within a person. The closest environmental factor is the family, especially those who often commit violence, which can make them a masochist.

3. Sexual Violence

Previously, it has been explained at a glance that an environment that often commits violence against it, can make it a masochistic sufferer. This violence does not only have to be about sexual violence, but also physical violence. Although in fact, this cannot be confirmed clearly, bad experiences or trauma caused by sexual violence can make him a masochistic person.

4. Runaway

Reporting fromdoksehat.com , there is a theory that suggests that sadomasochistic behavior, aka sexual activity that enjoys torturing their partner, is a form of escape. Through his sexual fantasies, the masochist will experience new things that are different from before.

5. Sexual Fantasy

This masochistic behavior initially occurred because he had forbidden sexual fantasies, so his passion would be stronger when “suppressed”. Therefore, when he is having sex, he will become more aroused in a state of stress.

Treatment for Masochist Actors

Unfortunately, someone who has masochistic behavior in him, rarely seeks professional help. In fact, this sexual disorder can be treated with psychotherapy and drugs, especially to reduce sexual arousal.

Psychotherapy

The first way to treat people with masochism is with psychotherapy, which can aim to reveal and overcome what are the causes of this behavior. Usually, the form is in the form of cognitive therapy which includes correcting disturbed thought patterns to practicing empathy.

In cognitive therapy, which is in the form of correcting this disturbed mindset, it is intended to improve the beliefs of the masochist about anything that can trigger these actions. While in cognitive therapy in the form of empathy training, it is intended to help masochistic actors take the point of view of their victims. This is so that he can also understand the potential dangers that can occur later.

Drugs

Usually, the drugs used are testosterone-lowering drugs which are very useful in terms of reducing the frequency of erections. Then there are also antidepressant drugs that are useful to reduce sexual desire. However, please note that these drugs can only be obtained through a doctor’s prescription.

Masochist Becomes a Life-Threatening Sexual Disorder

For You , who is old enough and has seen the film Fifty Shades of Gray , he must be aware that the film shows a sexual disorder in the form of masochism. Since this sexual disorder is often used as a theme in a film, surely many will consider it understandable. When in fact, when viewed from a psychological perspective, this sexual disorder can be very dangerous and can even be life threatening, both for himself and his sexual partner.

This masochistic behavior often manifests his sexual fantasies by injuring himself. So that not infrequently, he will cut his skin or burn himself in order to get sexual satisfaction. Indeed, often perpetrators realize that their sexual fantasies only apply in an effort to “play a role” when they are having sexual intercourse. However, it is not uncommon for the hardness to level up to the stage of autocortic asphyxiation.

Just a little trivia, this autoorotic asphyxiation is a subtype of sexual masochism, in which the culprit deliberately suffocates or suffocates himself. Usually, masochists at this level of asphyxia will wrap their heads in plastic until they run out of oxygen. Then, there were also those who wrapped ropes around their necks so that they suffocated. This of course can cause a lack or depletion of the supply of oxygen from within the body so that it becomes difficult to breathe and dies.

So, that’s a review of what masochists are often talked about by adults today. This knowledge is included in sex education , but you have to be old enough to learn it…

Lately the term marketing mix is ​​increasingly being heard in everyday life. You may have heard about it in seminars, television, or on social media. Marketing mix is ​​one of the terms familiar to business people.

Marketing mix can be defined as a marketing strategy that combines several elements in an integrated manner to achieve a targeted market marketing objective. An expert named Buchari Alma interprets marketing mix as a form of strategy in combining various kinds of marketing activities to create a maximum combination, so that the most satisfying results will appear.

Marketing mix or what is known in Indonesian as the marketing mix is ​​the foundation of the basic model of a business. This term was first introduced by a Harvard marketing professor named Neil Borden in 1948 who was inspired by the journal of his colleague, Prof. James Culliton.

One of the most widely known developments in the marketing mix concept is the 7P marketing mix . This concept was introduced by Booms and Bitner which contains four 4P elements plus three new elements, namely physical evidence, people , and process . The marketing mix concept can not only be used to promote old businesses, but also to develop new businesses.

The following is a summary of the history, understanding, concepts, goals, functions, and benefits obtained from the marketing mix , quoted from the Maxmanroe and Bachelor of Economics pages , Tuesday (14/6/2022).

Definition of Marketing Mix

The term marketing mix was first used by Neil Borden (1964) who was inspired by the ideas of James Cullington (1948). The idea is that a business executive acts as a mixer of ingredients . Borden (1964) compiled a list of marketing mix elements consisting of 12 aspects. The list was then simplified and popularized by Jerome McCarthy (1968) into four main aspects, namely product, price, place and promotion, which became known as the 4Ps.

Criticism of the 4Ps has prompted a number of marketing experts to propose a new marketing mix model, including the 7P Service Marketing Mix model (Booms and Bitner, 1981) and the holistic marketing mix model (Kotler and Keller, 2006).

Until now, the 4P model is still the most popular and a key element in most of the marketing literature. The marketing manager will take an approach depending on the industry and target marketing plan.

Marketing mix or what is known in Indonesian as the marketing mix is ​​the foundation of the basic model of a business. Marketing mix can be defined as a marketing strategy that combines several elements in an integrated manner to achieve a targeted market marketing objective.

The Origins of the Marketing Mix

In 1948, Professor James Culliton of Harvard Business School wrote an article entitled The Management of Marketing Costs. Cullington asserts that a business executive is:

“ Decider,” an “artist”—a “mixer of ingredients,” who sometimes follows a recipe prepared by others, sometimes prepares his own recipe as he goes along, sometimes adapts a recipe to the ingredients immediately available, and sometimes experiments with or incest ingredients no one else has tried” (Cullington, 1948).

A business executive is said to be a mixer of ingredients , who sometimes follows other people’s recipes, sometimes prepares his own recipe, sometimes adapts the recipe to the ingredients available, and sometimes experiments with or finds ingredients that have never been tried.

Neil Borden was captivated by this idea and then adapted it in the context of a marketing executive as a mixer of ingredients who must always be creative in managing a mix of marketing procedures and policies in order to generate profits for the company.

In his article entitled The Concept of the Marketing Mix , published in 1964, Borden compiled a list of the elements of the marketing mix consisting of 12 aspects, namely:

• Product Planning.
• Pricing.
• Branding.
• Channels of Distribution.
• Personal Selling.
• Advertising.
• Promotions.
• Packaging.
• Displays.
• servicing.
• Physical Handling.
• Fact Finding and Analysis.

Marketing Mix concept

1. Marketing Mix 4P

The 4P model was popularized by Jerome McCarthy (1968) who put forward four elements of the marketing mix including product, price, promotion, and place ( distribution ).

a. Place

Place in the marketing mix is ​​basically a form of distribution channel that refers to the location of a product available and can be sold and purchased. Distribution channels in the marketing mix include product completeness, location, inventory, storage facilities, distribution and transportation.

This concept focuses on the place or location of your company. The more strategic your business location, the greater the profit the company will get. With a strategic location, consumers or potential customers can more easily find and reach your business, so that sales transactions occur more easily.

How to determine the exact location? What you can do is find and determine sales locations that suit your target market, whether it’s for the bottom, middle, or up .

b. Product

A product is something that has functional value and can be used by the customer to achieve something. Products in the marketing mix include variety, quality, design, features, brand name, packaging, size, service, warranty, and returns.

In theory, products are all forms of business results offered to the market for use or consumption, so that they can meet the needs and desires of society. If you want to be successful in carrying out a marketing mix strategy , you must be able to create and produce a product or service with its own quality and uniqueness.

That way, your product or service can automatically increase your competitiveness in the market. Products have two elements that need attention, namely quality and visuals. You have to ensure the quality of your product properly. Apart from that, consumers must also feel the need to buy your product or service, not just being interested.

An easy way that you can do is to determine your target market through a small, structured research. Research conducted on the marketing mix strategy can include information on market response, consumer desires, and so on. Through the information we get from research, we can compare your product/service with competitors, find out the advantages and disadvantages of your product.

After that, you can carry out evaluations to improve the quality of your products and services, match products with the wants and needs of consumers, and provide an overview of product prospects in the future.

c. Promotions

Promotion in the marketing mix is ​​a strategy implemented by marketers to make customers aware of the existence of their product or brand. Sales promotion includes advertising, personal selling, public relations, and direct marketing.

This marketing mix strategy focuses on business promotion issues, such as how to market products, what media to use, and so on. Promotion is a marketing strategy that has objectives, including:

• Identify and attract new consumers.
• Communicate new products.
• Increase the number of consumers for products that are widely known.
• Inform consumers about product quality improvement.
• Invite consumers to come to the place where the product is sold.
• Motivate consumers to choose or buy a product.

Basically, promotion is an information dissemination activity that is to persuade, influence and remind the market that your product is ready to be sold and bought by them. One of the things you can do is to advertise.

Advertising can be done through media such as newspapers, electronics, brochures, banners, and social media. In the digital age like now, marketing strategies with promotions are very easy because there are lots of social media that will really help you.

d. Price

Price is one of the most important elements in the marketing mix . Price is the value that will be obtained in exchange for the product. Prices in the marketing mix include catalogs, discounts, special discounts, payment periods and credit terms.

The price in question is the amount of money that must be paid by your user or client to get the product you are offering. In other words, someone will use the service or buy the product you offer, if the sacrifice incurred (ie money and time) is in accordance with the benefits he wants to get from the product or service offered by the company.

Regarding this point, your focus is on how to make potential customers or potential buyers feel that their expenses are in accordance with what they get. That way, the marketing mix strategy will be more optimal.

In determining the price of a product, you have to calculate it based on production costs, capital, and add a few percent profit. The selling price must be in accordance with market prices, not too high, and not too low.

This is to prevent bankruptcy of course. If you want to sell at a higher price, provide a striking difference compared to your competitors, such as quality and variants, so that consumers feel ” worth it ” at the price of the product.

2. Service Marketing Mix

In the context of service marketing, Booms and Bitner (1981) added three elements of the marketing mix besides the 4Ps, so they are also known as the 7Ps.

a. Participants (People Involved)

The aspect of people in question is not only consumers. However, all human resources (HR) are involved, including workers to the business team. Especially for this aspect is very important to note. HR is an important component in the marketing mix strategy . The HR factor really determines the progress or failure of a company.

We cannot deny that this factor plays an important role in making a progress or even a setback of a company. This is why various companies are competing to find the best job candidates, they are even willing to pay more to hire independent job seekers who are experts in finding job candidates for companies.

Related questions, whether the employee has high performance or vice versa, whether the employee is loyal or vice versa, whether the employee is able to serve consumers well or vice versa will help the success of a service company in the market.

Another important factor in HR is the attitude and motivation of employees in the service industry. Attitude can be applied in various forms, such as employee appearance, voice in speech, body language , facial expressions, and speech. The motivation will determine the extent to which employees want or like the work to be done.

b. Process

The process aspect is a combination of all activities. All of these activities are related to the products produced and delivered to consumers. The process here includes how the company serves the demands of each customer, starting from the customer ordering ( order ) until they finally get what they want.

Certain companies usually have a unique or special way of serving their customers. Just like in a restaurant, there are several restaurants that provide ” open kitchen ” facilities, where consumers can see each process of making the food they order. This service method is an example of implementing a marketing mix strategy in a culinary business.

c. Physical Evidence (Physical Appearance)

Physical appearance is all the devices used to support the running of a business. The physical appearance of the place of business will explain how the company’s building is arranged. Does the company use unique interiors, attractive lightning systems , eye-catching room designs, and so on.

Companies will certainly realize that the arrangement of buildings in a company will certainly affect the mood of visitors. An interior design that seems messy will certainly make consumers feel a little uncomfortable with the situation at the company.

Buildings must be able to create a pleasant atmosphere, so as to provide an experience to visitors and can provide added value. The visual component is very important in the marketing mix strategy .

3. Marketing Mix in Holistic Marketing

Phillip Kotler and Kevin Lane Keller (2006) modified the 4P marketing mix elements and called them the evolution of marketing management which includes:

• People .
• Processes .
• Programs (including Product, Price, Place and Promotion ).
• Performance .

Marketing Mix Goals

Some of the objectives of the marketing mix include the following:

1. Direct Marketing

Direct marketing is a form of interactive marketing system in which one or more advertising media can be used to generate a measurable response or transaction at a location.

2. Advertising (Advertising)

Advertising is one of the most important forms of activity in the marketing mix . The main purpose of this advertising is to provide information about goods and services to target consumers in order to be able to increase sales.

3. Sales Promotion

Sales promotion is a collection of various intensive tools designed to encourage the purchase of a good or service.

Marketing Mix function

Some of the functions that can be obtained from the marketing mix include the following:

1. Physical Distribution Function

The physical distribution of a product can be done by transporting and storing the product.

2. Exchange Function

Consumers can buy products from manufacturers, either by exchanging money for products or by exchanging products for products for their own use or for resale.

3. Intermediary Function

Marketing mix is ​​an intermediary medium for delivering products from producers to consumers that connects exchange activities with physical distribution.

Marketing Mix Benefits

Some of the benefits that can be obtained from the marketing mix include the following:

1. Able to Analyze Finance

Business people must know how the flow of costs and income according to the situation that occurs.

2. Wise Allocation of Resources

Resources are usually limited so they must be used as effectively as possible.

3. Facilitate the Communication Process

Able to allocate in the form of responsibility for each part of the division with the respective tasks that have been determined.

4. Simplify

This concept can simplify and unify various forms of marketing activities into one so that the marketing department is easier to carry out and manage.

5. Allocation of Responsibilities

Businesses need a solid team, but businesses need to allocate responsibilities to each person according to their duties and abilities.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

 

Reference

• Baker, M., Graham, D., and Harker, M. (1998). Marketing: Managerial Foundations . South Yarra: Macmillan Education Australia Pty Ltd.
• Cullington, JW (1948). The Management of Marketing Costs . Boston: Division of Research, Graduate School of Business Administration, Harvard University.
• Kotler, P. and Keller, KL (2006). Marketing Management. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall.
• McCarthy, JE (1968). Basic Marketing: A Managerial Approach . Homewood: Irwin.

 

Marketing management or what is often called marketing management is a type of management needed for all businesses. This marketing management concerns products or services to be better known by consumers. Therefore, the company must understand the complete discourse regarding marketing management.

Marketing management must be considered by an organization or company because it contributes many things to the smooth process of product marketing.

Marketing management is also tasked with measuring and analyzing the strategic marketing process of a company or organization. Marketing management has a very important role in a company or organization because with marketing management the company can reach the desired target market and get more consumers.

1. Definition of Marketing Management

Marketing management (marketing management) is the analysis of planning, implementation, and control of programs designed to create, build and maintain profitable exchanges with target buyers to achieve organizational goals or company goals.

According to Kottler and Keller (2012) states that marketing management as the art and science of choosing target markets and getting, keeping, and growing customers through creating, delivering, and communicating superior customer value.

Marketing management (marketing management) comes from two words, namely management and marketing. Marketing is the analysis, planning, implementation and control of programs designed to create, build and maintain profitable exchanges with target buyers to achieve company goals.

While management is the process of planning (planning) , organizing (organizing) , actuating (actuating) , directing (directing) , and monitoring (controlling).

Marketing management is an attempt to plan, implement which consists of organizing, directing and supervising or controlling marketing activities within a company in order to achieve company goals efficiently and effectively.

According to Sofyan Assauri (2013) marketing management is an activity of analyzing, planning, implementing, and controlling programs designed to establish, build, and maintain profits from exchanges through target markets in order to achieve company goals in the long term.

Philip (2005) also explains that marketing management is the process of planning and executing, thinking, pricing promotions, and distributing goods and services to create exchanges that meet individual goals within the organization.

Marketing management involves setting marketing goals and objectives, developing marketing plans, managing marketing functions, putting marketing plans into action, and controlling marketing programs.

The existence of marketing management itself is because marketing a brand is an important matter for the company. Therefore, all decisions taken must be planned. You can learn about this in the Marketing Management book below.

2. Marketing Management Function

The function of marketing management includes analyzing activities, namely analysis carried out to find out the market and its marketing environment so that it can be obtained how big the opportunities are to seize the market and how big the threats must be.

Explanation of integrated and mutually supporting marketing functions, among others:

a. Market analysis

Not all companies have a formal marketing and sales department, but every company must have and carry out various important elements contained in marketing and sales activities with the main aim of making new and old customers interested in returning to use the products and facilities offered continuously. continuously.

To find out opportunities and threats as well as consumer needs and desires, there are several things that must be considered in the process of market analysis activities, namely: analysis of opportunities and threats, as well as analysis of consumer behavior.

b. Market segmentation

Market segmentation is the activity of dividing a market into different groups, where each group has almost the same characteristics.

By conducting market segmentation, marketing activities can be carried out in a more targeted manner and resources in the field of marketing can be used more effectively and efficiently.

Market segmentation must meet the requirements including: measurable both the size and breadth as well as the purchasing power of the market segment, accessible so that it can be served effectively, substantial so that it can be profitable if served, and actionable and all programs that has been designed to attract and serve market segmentation can be effective and efficient.

c. Define target market

Setting a target market means assigning an active value to each section and then selecting one or more market segments to serve.

The activity of determining the target market includes: evaluation of market share (section size and growth such as data on customer age, income, gender of each segment), attractive structure in terms of profitability, and objectives and available resources.

d. Market placement

The new company must be able to identify the position of existing competitors before determining its own placement. Kotler (1992) explains there are two options, namely:

1) Put yourself next to one of the existing competitors and fight for market share. Leaders can do this if they feel the company can make superior products, has a large market, and has more resources.

2) Develop a product that has never been offered on the market today. Before making this decision management must be sure that technically a product can be made quickly, economically a superior product can be made at the planned price level, as well as an adequate number of consumers who like the product.

e. Marketing planning

Marketing activities carried out by a company are important to be coordinated and directed to achieve company goals in general and marketing objectives in particular.

The marketing coordination and direction tool is a marketing plan. Regardless of what type of management style is adopted by a company in planning it must carry out the following four stages:
1) Define the company’s mission
2) Identify the company’s strategic business units, analyze and evaluate existing business portfolios
3) Identify new business arenas that will be entered.

Thus it can be concluded that marketing planning aims to provide a systematic and neat approach for companies by:
1) Balancing and aligning marketing activities that ensure the achievement of goals and objectives.
2) Using ways of doing business in the field of marketing in an incentive and optimal manner.
3) Quick, precise, and regular control over records, ideas or thoughts as well as marketing efforts or activities within the company.

Philip Kotler as one of the figures in marketing management released the book Marketing Management Edition 13 Volume 1 which you can get only at sinaumedia.

3. Purpose of Marketing Management

a. Creating demand or requests

One of the goals of marketing management is to create demand in various ways. Making related ways to find out consumer tastes and consumer preferences for goods or services produced to meet consumer needs.

b. Increase profits

The marketing team is the only team that generates revenue for the company. Sufficient profit must be obtained as a result of the sale of goods or services wished to satisfy. If the company does not generate profits, then the company will not be able to survive. In addition, profit is also necessary for the growth and diversification of the company.

c. Create new customers

Companies are established to sell products or services to customers. Therefore, consumers are the basis of a company’s business. It is consumers who provide income to the company and determine what the company will sell.

Creating new consumers means exploring and identifying customer needs more broadly. If a company wants to advance and stay in business, creating new customers is crucial. So it is necessary to analyze and understand consumer desires.

d. Satisfying customers

Creating new consumers is not enough. Companies must develop and distribute products (goods or services) that meet customer expectations to provide satisfaction. If consumers are not satisfied, then the business will not be able to generate revenue to meet costs and to get a reasonable return on investment.

Satisfied consumers or customers do not mean only buying goods or services according to consumer needs. They will also make recommendations to those closest to them and can make the goods or services being marketed more widely known.

e. Image a good product in the eyes of the public

Building a good product image in society is another marketing management goal. If the marketing team provides quality goods and services to consumers at reasonable prices, it will certainly create a good image for consumers.

In its application, Sinaumed’s can read the book Application of Marketing Management Tools in the Product Development Process (BP) which can help you better understand the relationship between product image and marketing management.

4. Main Duties of Marketing Management

The main task of marketing management is to market the company’s products so as to achieve a long-term profit level for the company, to ensure the survival and development of the company. Marketing management tasks are also inseparable from demand. So, the task of marketing management (marketing management) is not only to seek and develop demand for the company’s products but also includes setting the amount, timing and nature of requests in accordance with company goals.

In general, the number of requests for goods or services can be greater or less or equal to the number of requests expected by a company. There are eight characteristics of demand that give rise to different marketing tasks. The eight requests include:

a. Negative demand

Negative demand is when all or part of an important segment of the potential market does not want the good or service and in fact it is conceivable that people will avoid paying the price.

b. No demand (no demand)

No demand means a condition in which all or some important segments of the potential market are not or are less interested in certain goods or services.

c. Latent demand (hidden demand)

Latent demand means where many people feel a great need for goods or services that have not been produced until now.

d. Faltering demand

Faltering demand is a situation in which the demand for certain goods or services tends to decrease if not followed by improvement efforts.

e. Irregular demand

Irregular demand is a condition where there is a time pattern of demand marked by seasonal fluctuations.

f. Full demand

Full demand is a situation where the amount and time of request is in accordance with the amount planned by the company. So, all requests can be fulfilled and there are no requests that cannot be fulfilled or there are no offers that are not solicited.

g. Overfull demand (excessive demand)

Overfull demand is a situation where the existing demand for certain goods or services exceeds the level of the company’s willingness to fulfill them.

h. Unwholesome demand

Unwholesome demand is an atmosphere in which a request is felt to be a violation or outside the limits of legislation and is not desirable to be offered or contains elements that are less desirable.

Private Basu also provides a view that the main tasks of marketing management include:

• Developing concepts aimed at satisfying and serving unfulfilled consumers.
• Study the needs and wants of consumers.
• Create a product design.
• Conduct testing of the validity of the product concept.
• Develop packaging and branding.
• Set a price to get a decent return on investment.
• Manage the course of distribution.
• Creating effective marketing communications with various media.
• Pay attention to consumer satisfaction.
• Evaluate and continuously develop a marketing plan based on results.

The concept of Marketing Management is also developing, where at first it was often used to monopolize the marketing department, now it has become an activity of all departments in a company. You can understand this better in the Marketing Management book by Prof. Dr. Thamrin Abdullah, Dr. Francis Tantri.

5. Marketing Management Concept

a. Production concept

The production concept is the concept that consumers or customers will favor products that are available and affordable and management must strive to improve production and distribution efficiency. This concept is the oldest philosophy used in sales.

This concept still applies to situations where the demand for the product is greater than the supply, and when the cost of the product is higher and productivity improvements are required to reduce it.

b. Product concept

The concept that consumers will favor the best quality products and the most innovative traits means that companies must devote energy to continuous product improvement.

c. Sales concept

The concept that consumers will not buy enough of a company’s products unless the company undertakes a large-scale sales and promotion effort.

This concept is usually applied to goods that consumers may not think of buying, for example: insurance. This industry must be adept at tracking potential customers and selling product benefits to consumers with the aim of selling the goods or services the company makes, not what products consumers need.

d. Marketing concept

This marketing concept believes that achieving organizational goals depends on determining the needs and wants of target markets and delivering the desired satisfactions more effectively and efficiently than competitors.
The marketing concept came into effect because sales began to fall, product growth slowed, purchasing patterns changed, competition increased, and selling costs increased.

e. Social marketing concept

The societal marketing concept means the concept that companies must determine market needs, wants and interests and deliver the desired satisfactions more effectively and efficiently than competitors in a way that maintains or improves the welfare of consumers and society.

This concept invites marketers to build social and ethical considerations in their marketing practices. This is to balance and harmonize the three main factors that are important, namely company profits, satisfying consumer desires and public interest.

To better understand the concepts contained in it, Sinaumed’s can study them through the book Basic Marketing Management Concepts of Strategy to develop their insights and knowledge.

6. Marketing Management books

Bibliography :

• Kotler and Keller. 2009. Marketing Management. Volume I. 13th Edition. Jakarta:
  Erlangga
• Kotler, Pllip. 2000. Marketing Management. Millennium Edition. Jakarta : PT.
  sinaumedia Group Index.
• Kotler, Philip. 2005. Marketing Principles Volume I. Jakarta: Erlangga.
• Kotler, Philip. 2005. Marketing Principles Volume I. Jakarta: Erlangga.

Definition of market share – The business world will always intersect with market competition, so for business people to dominate the market is one of the main goals. Usually, business people will calculate how many sales have been made in a certain period to find out their company’s dominance in the market.

In the business world, this achievement is often referred to as market share or market share. Market share itself is very important to know because it will be a benchmark for the company’s strength when compared to its competitors.

So, in this article we will discuss the meaning of market share, what are its functions and types, how to calculate it, and tips for increasing market share. If you plan to start a business in the near future, pay close attention.

Definition of Market Share

Kotler and Armstrong (2013) define market share as the total sales of a company compared to the total sales in the market. This sales figure can be calculated rationally and used for several purposes, such as:

• Determine the company’s position in the market
• Formulate and select a strategy to be used to maintain or expand market share

To make it easier, try to imagine that right now you are selling macaroni in a housing complex because this food is currently viral and much sought after. But you also have a lot of rivals.

Let’s say that within one month there are 1000 people who buy macaroni, 300 of them buy from your place, the remaining 700 buy from competitors. This means you have a 30% market share.

Usually, market share can change at any time depending on changes in consumer tastes or consumers moving their interests to other products. In addition, the more business actors in these commodities, the fiercer the market share competition will be.

Marketshare function

Market share has various functions for a company, including:

1. Improve reputation

In the eyes of consumers, market share is often used as an indicator of evaluating a company’s reputation. If the product you have manages to dominate the market and can maintain it for several periods, consumers will automatically have more confidence in the business you are running.

In fact, there may be consumers who promote your products and business to other people without you asking at all. That way your business reputation will increase.

2. Signs of potential new consumers

Market share can also help you to know that there are potential new consumers in the industrial sector you choose. When the market share is still low, it means you have a great opportunity to reach these new consumers.

3. Measuring business competitiveness

The percentage of market share of the business you run can be an indicator to measure your company’s competitiveness. For example, if your market share is below that of your competitors, it means you have to find out what your competitors are doing to be in their position. The rest is all you have to do is develop an ATM strategy (Observe, Imitate, Modify) to increase market share.

4. Measuring the amount of sales

You can also use market share to measure sales volume. If the market share is high, it means that your product sales are good. Vice versa, if the market share is low, it means that your product sales are not good and you need to do an evaluation.

The purpose of this evaluation is so that you can find out what are the factors that affect the decrease in the number of sales and then find a solution. For example, from the evaluation results you know that sales on social media such as Whatsapp and Facebook are not optimal, meaning you must immediately prepare a new digital sales strategy.

Types of Market Share

1. Value market share

In value market share, the percentage calculation is based on the total sales segment. This means that the company calculates the percentage based on the achieved price.

You need to know, the value market share figures are not always directly proportional to the volume market share. So, even though the value market share of your business is high, the volume market share is not necessarily high.

2. Volume market share

Volume market share refers to calculating the total number of products sold in the market. Interestingly, often the volume market share is lower than the value market share.

3. Revenue market share

Revenue market share is a type of market share whose calculation is based on revenue compared to competitors. In other words, revenue market share is more focused on the total money generated from product sales. This revenue market share figure can be a percentage of your product’s individual market share.

4. Customer market share

Customer market share is the ratio of the number of customers compared to the total number of customers in your business sector. This type is more widely used in the work sector where the number of consumers and subscribers is really concerned.

Advantages And Disadvantages Of Market Share

When you run a business or business and get a sizable market share, you will get the opportunity to attract potential investors to provide additional funds or capital.

The reason is, businesses or businesses that have a fairly large market share and manage to maintain it tend to experience an increase in turnover. From this increase in turnover, the business expansion process becomes easier to do.

But of course, a businessman cannot be satisfied quickly and must always try to increase his market share. There are lots of ways you can do this to make it happen, from lowering prices, taking advantage of digital advertising, product innovation, and many more. More details will be discussed in the next section.

Apart from these advantages, market share also has its own drawbacks. This is because market share is basically a tool that can provide an initial picture that can be used by business people or companies.

For example, if a company has a larger market share than its competitors but produces less profit, then the company’s market share is less effective as a measure of the company’s success.

In addition, when there is one or several groups of companies that control the majority of market share, it will make it difficult for other companies to compete. Monopolies that are already very strong will certainly be difficult to tear down, especially for small companies. This situation seems to emphasize that small companies can only get a small profit.

How to Calculate Market Share

Calculating market share is important to do to find out a company’s competitiveness or how much “power” a company’s product has in the market. To calculate it, you can use the formula:

Market share = (company revenue/total industry revenue) x 100%

For example like this:

During 2021 yesterday, the macaroni business that you ran managed to collect revenue of IDR 30 million while the total revenue for the macaroni industry in 2021 was IDR 130 million, so the market share for your macaroni business will be:

Market share: (Rp 30,000,000/Rp 130,000,000) x 100% = 23.07%

So, the macaroni business that you are running has managed to control 23.07% market share in the macaroni sales industry.

You need to know, before calculating market share you must determine the target consumers of the business you are running. This target consumer must be specific. For example, you set your target consumers to be school students and university students. So, school and college students need to be even more specific.

For example students and college students whose allowance is more than 30 thousand per day or 900 thousand per month. From here you can know that the target consumers of your business are students who come from lower middle class families.

Factors That Can Hamper Companies To Reach Market Share

In practice, there are external and internal factors that can hinder or become obstacles for companies to reach their market share. These factors must be evaluated in depth so that the company can determine how to overcome them. These factors are:

1. The target market does not match the product

Sometimes there are business people who are mistaken in determining the target market so that it does not match the product offered. For example, you sell premium macaroni at a price of IDR 50,000 per kilo, but you offer it to students or students whose allowance is IDR 30,000 per day. This strategy is clearly not going to work because the price of the product being offered is too expensive.

There are also some business people who directly target the middle to upper market when they are just starting operations or are still in the pioneering phase and the brand is not very well known. Indeed there is nothing wrong with this strategy, it’s just that the chance of loss is quite large.

2. More and more competitors

The next factor is the number of competitors in the same industry is increasing. With so many product providers, consumers can choose goods that really suit their needs. If you play in an industry like this, you must be smart in finding the Unique Selling Point (USP) of your product so that it has more value in the eyes of consumers.

3. The company’s competitiveness is declining

Decreasing company competitiveness can also be a factor that makes it difficult for a business to reach the targeted market share. For example, the product that you have has no appeal or advantages that differentiate it from products from other competitors.

4. Misdirected marketing

Currently, all businesses can use technology to create advertisements on all channels, from social media, websites, to digital media. This method is effective for targeting customers who have specific interests or are relevant to the business.

However, this method also requires the right marketing strategy and cannot be done haphazardly. At the very least, you have to make the right targeting so that the ads actually reach the right people.

Ways To Increase Market Share

1. Do the Observe, Imitate, Modify (ATM) method

In the business world, there is a method called Observe, Imitate, Modify or often abbreviated as ATM. With this method, business people can seek inspiration from competitors and then modify it to suit the conditions they face.

Often times, novice business people consider this method to be 100% plagiarism. In fact, ATM and plagiarism are different. Because ATM only takes inspiration, not using the same idea or strategy 100%.

Therefore, to implement this ATM method there are several things that must be considered from competitors, including:

• What are the advantages and disadvantages of competitors’ products?
• How do they serve their customers?
• What are the marketing strategies used by competitors?

After getting all the answers, you can think of a strategy that suits your business conditions.

2. Set your product’s Unique Selling Point

To win the competition, the products you offer must be superior to competitors. How to? Yes, by setting the Unique Selling Point (USP) of your product.

USP itself is something that differentiates your product from competitors’ products so that consumers are interested in buying your product rather than competitors’. Some ways that can be done to determine the USP are:

• First understand what consumers want. The method is to conduct a survey directly to consumers using a digital form. Here you can ask what consumers like and don’t like about your product.
• After that, you can ask for feedback about service, prices, and other things related to your business
• Then evaluate the product marketing strategy so that it can match the wishes of consumers
• You can also find out the shortcomings of competitors’ products and make it the USP of your product. Here there are lots of aspects that you can see, starting from product quality, price, how to serve consumers, language style, even to social media feeds.

3. Create a business-specific website

In this digital era, businesses can create special websites for various purposes. For example increasing customer trust or selling products directly. In addition, the website can also be used to develop a business by:

• Implement a digital marketing strategy
• Implementing SEO so that the website is on the first page of search engines
• Search Engine Marketing (SEM)
• And others

4. Take advantage of effective marketing strategies

Utilizing an effective strategy can make it easier for businesses to reach consumers, therefore a businessman must be good at developing marketing strategies. For example using artists to become brand ambassadors, or using celebrity services to promote products on Instagram, and others.

5. Maintain relationships with consumers

Reaching new consumers is important, but ensuring that consumers become customers must also be considered. To make it happen you have to maintain relationships with consumers.

Remember, loyal customers can be an opportunity to increase market share because they will promote your products to friends, family, neighbors, co-workers, even on social media.

After that, make sure you keep loyal customers from running away to competitors. You can do this by:

• Always presenting innovative products that can meet consumer needs
• Continue to maintain product quality
• Using Cross Selling or Up Selling
• Provide the best service to every customer
• Organizing customer loyalty programs

6. Lower product prices

In any part of the world, consumers always prefer lower prices and you can make this habit a strategy to increase market share. With a note, you have to do the calculations carefully and think about all the possibilities well.

7. Lyrics of new demographic groups

The more your business audience, the greater the sales opportunities. Therefore, if you feel you can and need it, you should try new demographic group lyrics.

This demographic can be age, economic status, income, interests, or something else. In other words, you create new target markets and marketing strategies based on different demographics.

8. Routinely evaluate

The last way to increase market share is to routinely evaluate. You can make evaluations to assess business development every week, month, semester, to yearly. If needed, you can adapt the strategy to the conditions at hand.

Although the last method is important, not a few business people forget it. Usually after the business is running, the businessman only focuses on income, marketing, and expenses. Though evaluation is also important in business development.

Thus the discussion about the meaning of market share and how to increase it. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful as well as add to your insight.

If you want to find various kinds of books about consumers, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Gilang Oktaviana Putra

Manufacturing agents – In marketing a product, a manufacturer may use agents and intermediaries who do not have the rights to the goods. Typically, these agencies will only do a small amount of marketing flow. Meanwhile, its main function is to facilitate buying and selling: that is, bringing sellers and buyers together and negotiating between the two.

Agents that are commonly found in the real estate industry, insurance, to food, can represent sellers or buyers and then are paid by the party that employs them. Often times, an agent may represent several non-competitive product manufacturers on a commission basis.

One of the agents that cannot be dismissed from the industry is a manufacturing agent . Then, what exactly is meant by a manufacturing agent? Check out the full explanation in this article, Sinaumed’s

Plastic And Composite Manufacturing Processes – Revised Edition

 

 

Definition of Manufacturing Agent

Manufacturing agents are agents who work directly with factories, to carry out marketing to some or all of the goods produced by these factories. There can be more than one factory whose products are sold by a manufacturing agent, and usually the products sold are products that do not compete in the same industry.

Among companies that don’t have enough capital to independently recruit a sales team, the existence of this one agent is very popular, Sinaumed’s.

In the United States, most manufacturing companies, both small and medium-sized, rely on independent agents to sell their products. The independent agency form of representation is also transitioning for a number of large companies as it has proven to be a cost-effective selling tool.

Wholesalers, retailers, government agencies, equipment manufacturers, hospitals, and schools are places where agents can sell products. As mentioned, a manufacturing agent may also represent several manufacturers who produce compatible, but non-competitive, lines.

For example, one agent could represent a company that produces shoes and bags.

Manufacturing Agent Duties

Today, manufacturing agents are considered to be highly skilled marketing professionals, which is also where companies introduce these agents to the products they will represent. With these companies, agents are in regular contact, demonstrating special product features, giving demonstrations, and advising on technical features that will be useful.

Extensive knowledge about the company represented and the product to be marketed must be owned by a manufacturing agent. In fact, agents must also quote credit terms, prices, delivery dates and methods, to costs.

In addition, these agents may also handle one-off sales, introduce new products, keep track of orders for certain items coming into the factory, and ensure their customers receive excellent service.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Manufacturing Agents

As we have seen, having a manufacturing agency is very popular among certain companies that are short on capital. So, what are the advantages and disadvantages of using the services of a manufacturing agent? Here’s the review.

Excess

• More efficient marketing and sales budgets for newly established pilot factories.
• Manufacturers gain insight into market trends, customer demographics, and industries from other regions.
• Manufacturing agents can help sales by selling compatible products into a single market, for industries where the market is narrow.

Lack

• Because they feel they have good sales performance, manufacturing agents have the potential to act autonomously even though they are not employees of the company.
• Often times, manufacturing agents fail to handle sales because they don’t focus on just one product.

Types of Manufacturing Agents

Sinaumed’s, next, we will describe the types of manufacturing agents that you need to know. Let’s see together!

1. Technical Product Selling

Usually, a manufacturing agent whose type is technical product selling sells merchandise that is used by the industry in its own business. Perhaps, this process involves the raw materials and parts that the company needs to produce the finished product that it sells. It can also be machinery or electronic equipment designed to make a company operate more efficiently.

Companies that produce transportation equipment, fabricated metal products, electronics, and heavy machinery are the largest employers who can use manufacturing agents. Often, a single sale represents hundreds of thousands of dollars worth of machines. However, it may take that one sale months to years to complete.

2. Non-Technical Product Selling

Generally, manufacturing agents representing non-technical products sell their wares to wholesalers or large retail stores for resale to the general public. The type of goods sold also determines how they approach customers.

A lot of time that this type of manufacturing agent spends taking orders from customers through existing channels. However, efforts are made to increase the size of these orders by helping wholesalers to sell their existing stock properly.

3. Sales Promotion Activities

Another place for manufacturing agents to profit is in sales promotion jobs. This type of agency promotes sales by providing merchandising services and advice instead of selling physical products.

They also help retailers and build intent, both to increase sales. The reason is, they provide advice on store design, publicity opportunities, exhibitions, special events, to other advertising media.

Solidworks For Manufacturing Design

 

 

Manufacturing and Small Business Agents

Approximately, how are manufacturing agents and small businesses related? What are the advantages and disadvantages like? Come on, see below!

1. Profit

Manufacturing agents also provide information to relocation companies or new companies regarding demographics and market trends directly, aka being at the forefront, in addition to providing financial benefits. Companies can gain instant access to industry knowledge or expertise in a given region or country by contracting with a manufacturing agency.

In addition, there are other advantages such as offering one of the best ways of market access for manufacturers with narrow product lines. Manufacturing agency companies generally have good relations with the manufacturer’s main target market because they usually sell compatible products to a single market.

This allows manufacturers to enter markets that may be difficult to reach with a direct sales force. Not only that, new businesses can get ideas from manufacturing agents regarding where to advertise, estimates of the potential for certain areas, to comments on competitor strategies!

2. Lack

The drawback is that, despite using manufacturing bros, business owners and consultants note that it makes perfect sense for small companies that have to allocate their financial resources very vigilantly and learn quickly about the market, running into certain drawbacks.

For example, the most frequent complaint of business owners when discussing manufacturing agency companies is the lack of control over agents. This is because company ownership cannot determine how to run a business because manufacturing agents are not company employees.

Indeed, small business owners can negotiate certain matters with agents, just as clients do with vendors. However, some critics in the final analysis also claimed that manufacturing agents were not always able to devote the necessary time to a single product line because they were doing business on behalf of more than one manufacturer.

Often, the initial assistance and follow-up services that are included in the basic elements of customer service must be supplied by the manufacturer even if the goods are sold out of the hands of a manufacturing agent.

Another concern with manufacturing agents is that they increase sales costs by acting as intermediaries in the process.

However, as Bob Trinkle mentions at Agency Sales Magazine , while manufacturing agencies are an alternative or substitute for direct selling so they should be viewed as a form of outsourcing of the sales function, the need to maintain an internal sales staff for a specific region or product line should be eliminated when hiring agents. manufacture.

Actually, agents in this way can help small businesses in reducing administrative costs.

Choosing a Manufacturing Agent

Manufacturers have many factors to consider when they go through the process of selecting a manufacturing agent. Small business owners should look for someone who demonstrates the ability and willingness to be knowledgeable about their product and application, as well as someone who will respond quickly and present the product in terms of meeting customer needs.

A good agent will also represent the various product lines he or she markets in a fair way, giving each line the attention it deserves, regardless of how much revenue is factored in (this last concern is especially important for small and new businesses).

The best rule of thumb for manufacturers is to be patient and do lots of preliminary research. After all, the choice will be the main link between the company and its target audience. Bad choices can ruin a company; conversely, good choices can help launch new producers toward long-term financial stability.

Given the stakes involved in this choice, MANA recommends in its Directory of Manufacturer Sales Agencies that business owners consider doing the following when weighing their options:

1. Create an Ideal Agency Profile

Make the profile clear, but also flexible and realistic. The perfect agency doesn’t exist, but there are many who would do a great job given the chance.

2. Create a Manufacturing Company Profile

Manufacturers are encouraged to compile profiles of their target customers, an overview of business needs, and a summary of the philosophy that governs the business. Many agencies can be selective about who to add to their client list, so it makes sense to let them know about the business and its goals and prospects.

The profile should also be honest and touch on growth plans, the real advantages of the products it manufactures, and past history.

3. Securing Referrals from Other Agencies

In the United States, manufacturing agents are closely related and many can name several suitable agencies for the line.

4. Get References from Other Manufacturers

Companies in the same area that sell similar products but are not competitive can be a good source of information in finding potential agents. Some may even recommend their own agent, although others may be reluctant to have their agent take on additional product lines and responsibilities.

5. Be patient

While manufacturers don’t have the luxury of waiting forever when filling agent vacancies, doing an early re-search is usually a good idea. Many manufacturers later admit that they did not spend enough time exploring their options and learning about their chosen agent. It’s better to take the time it takes to pick the right prospects than to rush into a bad situation and have to fix it later.

6. Be Flexible in Setting Up Territories

Agents should have exclusive rights within a territory, but rather than assigning an arbitrary region based on geography, it’s often better to choose the agent best suited to our line and let their scope define the region.

“Manufacturers should always recognize that independent agents choose independence because they want to do what they want to do, not what any producer wants them to do,” writes Harold J. Novick in Agency Sales Magazine .

“Therefore, the key to success with an independent agency is finding that one high-performing agency that comes closest to doing what you want it to do in the market today. Hiring an agent with even one key characteristic missing can substantially reduce your possible market share in that regard. Finding the right representatives creates a high probability for a true win-win situation, as both ‘partners’ have the same goal,” he continued.

7. Liaising with Agents

Manufacturers should remember that their manufacturing agents are independent sales agents who are not employees of any of their principals, but are business partners with each principal. Thus, manufacturers cannot have the same type of direct control that they exercise over their own personnel.

From a legal standpoint, it’s important to remember that the manufacturer pays nothing to the agent until the sale is made. They also don’t pay withholding taxes or Social Security.

Using a manufacturing agent also means that some of the manufacturer’s bookkeeping needs will be taken care of by non-employees. This is an important distinction for the Internal Revenue Service (IRS), which strongly dislikes arrangements in which companies disguise employees under the guise of an independent agent or contractor.

When assessing this, the IRS usually uses it as one of its tests of the amount of direct control it exercises over the sales force. If regular reports are requested from an independent agent, the IRS can declare the agent an employee and request various applicable withholding taxes.

Communication remains an integral part of the relationship between agents and their clients. Both sides need to continue to judge the other about their operations. Agents must tell their principals what they are doing for them in the field, regardless of sales levels at the time, while agents need up-to-date information on things like product specifications and prices.

In the end, both parties just need to recognize that a cohesive working relationship is in their mutual best interest. In dealing with representatives, manufacturers expect: loyalty; knowledge of the region and/or industry; knowledge of the product line after reasonable exposure; quick response to suggestions; regular follow-up; and their fair share of time agents. Agent.

Meanwhile, both parties have the right to expect a number of things, including:

• Fair contracts that recognize performance and reward success and longevity.
• Access to customer service, training and technical support.
• Quality product.
• Timely delivery.
• A true commitment to building a business in their area.

Manufacturing Product Design & Development

 

 

Closing

Sinaumed’s, that’s an explanation regarding manufacturing agents and their relationship with various products and even producers. It is also important to know the practice abroad as a reference. That way, our insights about manufacturing agents are increasing. After knowing various things about manufacturing agents, are you interested in getting into the world of manufacturing?

If Sinaumed’s is interested in reading books related to manufacturing, then you can get them on the sinaumedia.com website. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information .

Author: Sevilla Nouval Evanda

In Islam, chastity and self-cleanliness is an important concern. Every time you want to pray, every Muslim must be pure and clean. Both from themselves and places of worship.

When a woman finishes her menstrual period, after sexual intercourse, after childbirth and other major hadas, it is obligatory to take a large bath. Likewise with men, when they finish doing something related to a major hadas it is obligatory to take a large bath.

The obligatory bath or big bath is a way of purifying by washing the water all over the body with the intention of removing the big hadas or janabat. Mandatory bathing procedures have been explained in the Koran, namely in the letter An-Nisa verse 43. The following reads the verse.

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ​​ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ لَا تَقْرَبُوا۟ ٱلصَّلَوٰةَ وَأَنتُمْ سُكَٰرَىٰ حَتَّىٰ تَعْلَمُوا۟ مَا تَقُولُونَ وَلَا جُنُبًا إِلَّا عَابِرِى سَبِيلٍ حَتَّىٰ تَغْتَسسِلُوا۟ ۚ وَإِن كُنتُم مَّرْضَىٰٓ أَوْ عَلَىٰ سَفَرٍ أَوْ جَآءَ أَحَدٌ مِّنكُم مِّنَ ٱلْغَآئِطِ أَوْ لَٰمَسْتُمُ ٱلنِّسَآءَ فَلَمْ تَجِدُوا۟ مَآءً فَتَيَمَّمُوا۟ صَعِيدًا طَيِّبًا فَٱمْسَحُوا۟ بِوُجُوهِكُمْ وَأَيْدِيكُمْ ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَفُوًّا غَفُورًا

It means: “O you who believe! Do not approach the prayer when you are drunk, until you realize what you are saying, and do not (you approach the mosque when you are) in a junub state, except just passing by the road, before you take a bath (bathe junub). As for if you are sick or are on a journey or after defecating or you have touched a woman, while you do not get water, then do your tayammum with good (holy) dust; wipe your face and your hands with it. Indeed, Allah is Most Forgiving, Most Forgiving.”

Nawaitul Ghusla Liraf’il Hadatsil Akbari Fardhan Lillahi Ta’ala.

Meaning: “By mentioning the name of Allah, I intend to take a bath to remove large hadas, obligatory for Allah ta’ala.”

وَيْتُ الغُسْلَ لِرَفْعِ الجِنَابَ

Nawaitul ghusla lirafil janabati.

Meaning: “I intend to take a bath to get rid of junub.”

Causes of Compulsory Bathing for Men

Summarizing from the Suara.com page, a man must take a mandatory bath or take a big bath when doing the following things.

• Releasing semen or sperm with desire.
• Having sexual intercourse, even if no semen is released, Sinaumed’s is obliged to take a big bath
• Not sure about the presence of semen that comes out unconsciously. If Sinaumed’s feels this way, he is advised to prioritize caution (ihtiyath), namely by taking a mandatory bath.

Requirements and Mandatory Bathing Procedures for Men

Mandatory bathing or junub is important and must be done in order to perform worship and be considered valid in the eyes of Allah. As stated in QS. Al-Maidah verse 6. The following is the sound of the verse.

يٰٓاَيُّهَا ​​الَّذِيْنَ اٰمَنُوْٓا اِذَا قُمْتُمْ اِلَى الصَّلٰوةِ فَاغْسِلُوْا وُجُوْهَكُمْ وَاَيْدِيَكُمْ اِلَى الْمَرَافِقِ وَامْسَحُوْا بِرُءُوْسِكُمْ وَاَرْجُلَكُمْ اِلَى الْكَعْبَيْنِۗ وَاِنْ كُنْتُمْ جُنُبًا فَاطَّهَّرُوْاۗ وَاِنْ كُنْتُمْ مَّرْضٰٓى اَوْ عَلٰى سَفَرٍ اَوْ جَاۤءَ اَحَدٌ مِّنْكُمْ مِّنَ الْغَاۤىِٕطِ اَوْ لٰمَسْتُمُ النِّسَاۤءَ فَلَمْ تَجِدُوْا مَاۤءً فَتَيَمَّمُوْا صَعِيْدًا طَيِّبًا فَامْسَحُوْا بِوُجُوْهِكُمْ وَاَيْدِيْكُمْ مِّنْهُ ۗمَا يُرِيْدُ اللّٰهُ لِيَجْعَلَ عَلَيْكُمْ مِّنْ حَرَجٍ وَّلٰكِنْ يُّرِيْدُ لِيُطَهِّرَكُمove

Meaning: “O you who believe! When you are about to pray, then wash your face and your hands up to the elbows, and wipe your head and (wash) your feet up to the ankles. If you are junub, then take a bath. And if you are sick or on a journey or returning from a place to relieve oneself (latrine) or touch women, then if you do not get water, then do tayammum with good (holy) dust; wipe your face and your hands with it. Allah does not want to make things difficult for you, but He wants to cleanse you and perfect His favors for you, so that you will be grateful.”

Before performing the obligatory bath, one must understand the conditions for the obligatory bath for men. These conditions consist of an intention in the heart, being Muslim, having common sense, the water used is pure and permissible, there are no things that prevent water from reaching the skin, and the things that require obligatory bathing have stopped.

Meanwhile, in several hadiths, the procedures and recommendations for obligatory bathing are different. According to HR. Tirmidhi, interrupting the roots of the hair is only reserved for men, women are not required to do this.

Meanwhile, in HR. Muslim said so, “From Aisha she said, “When the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wasallam bathed because of junub, then he started by washing both hands. He poured water with his right hand over his left hand, then washed his genitals and performed ablution with ablution for prayer. Then he rinsed his hair while inserting his fingers into the roots of the hair until they were even. When finished, he washed his head three times, then he washed his whole body and finally washed his feet.”

Launching from the Suara.com page, in general, the procedure for taking a big bath for men is as follows.

1. Reading the intention of bathing is mandatory
2. A total of three times, hands are cleaned. Then, proceed with cleaning the rectum and genitals. Do this with your left hand.
3. Then, clean your hands by washing them with soap until they are perfectly clean.
4. Next, Sinaumed’s performs ablution in the same order as the prayer, namely from washing his face to his feet.
5. Use your hands to clean between the roots of the hair. Sinaumed’s can use his fingers to touch the scalp like he is combing his hair.
6. After that, splash water on the head three times. Make sure the water soaks up to the base of the hair.
7. Next, splash all parts of the body with clean water. First, wash the right side of the body. Then, to the left side of the body.
8. When washing the whole body. Sinaumed’s must ensure that every part of the body folds has been splashed with water and has been cleaned.

Other Mandatory Bathing Intentions

Mandatory bathing is not only aimed at men. Women also have to do the obligatory bath if they have a large hadas or are in a state of junub. This is the intention of taking a mandatory shower.

1. General Intentions

The following obligatory bathing intentions can be carried out by men or women who are in a state of junub or large hadas. The following is the intention of obligatory bathing and its meaning.

نَوَيْتُ الْغُسْلَ لِرَفْعِ الْحَدَثِ اْلاَكْبَرِ فَرْضًا ِللهِ تَعَالَى

Nawaitul Ghusla liraf ‘il hadatsil Akbari fardhal lillaahi ta’aala.

Meaning: I intend to take a big bath to get rid of the big fardu hadas because of Allah ta’ala.

2. Mandatory bathing intention after menstruation

Menstruation in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) is interpreted as a physiological event and cycle in women in the reproductive period with blood coming out of the uterus as a result of the release of the uterine mucous membrane; menstruation.

When a woman finishes her menstrual period, she has to do a mandatory bath or a big bath. The following is the intention of taking a mandatory bath after menstruation.

نَوَيْتُ الْغُسْلَ لِرَفْعِ حَدَثِ الْحَيْضِ ِللهِ تَعَالَى

Nawaitul ghusla liraf’i hadatsil haidil lillahi Ta’aala.

Meaning: I intend to take a mandatory bath to purify large hadas from menstruation because of Allah Ta’ala.

3. Mandatory Bathing Intentions After Postpartum

Puerperal in KBBI is interpreted as blood that comes out of a woman’s uterus after giving birth; the period from giving birth to the recovery of the production organs and limbs (40-60 days).

After childbirth, you have to do a mandatory bath or big bath so that it is legal to perform prayers, fasting and other worship. The following is the intention of taking a mandatory bath after childbirth.

نَوَيْتُ الْغُسْلَ لِرَفْعِ حَدَثِ النِّفَاسِ ِللهِ تَعَالَى

Nawaitul ghusla liraf’i hadatsin nifaasi lillahi Ta’aala.

Meaning: I intend to take a mandatory bath to purify the large hadas from the puerperium because of Allah Ta’ala.

 

The Story of Compulsory Bathing

Mandatory bathing is important for every Muslim when he finishes doing things that require mandatory bathing. Such as sexual relations, menstruation, junub, and so forth. This obligation has existed since the time of the Prophet. In the Handbook  of Shalah An-Nisaa by Abdul Qadir Muhammad Mansur, published by Republika Publisher, it is stated that a descendant of Taimillah bin Tha’labah recounts his visit to Aisyah which is published on the  Islamdigest.republika.co.id page. 

He said: “I visited Aisha with my mother and aunt. Then one of the two asked Aisha: what did you do while taking a bath (junub)? Hearing this, Aisha replied: “Rasulullah SAW performed ablution as he did for prayer. Then he watered his head three times. While we splashed our heads five times because of the plaits of our hair.” This hadith was narrated by Imam Tirmidhi and is valid.

عن السّيدة عائشة رضي الله عنها في ذكر غُسل رسول الله – عليه الصّلاة والسّلام – من الجنابة قولها: (كانَ رَسولُ اللهِ صَلَّى اللَّهُ عليه وسلَّمَ إذَا اغْتَسَلَ مِنَ الجَنَابَةِ يَبْدَأُ فَيَغْسِلُ يَدَيْهِ. ثُمَّ يُفْرِغُ بيَمِينِهِ علَى شِمَالِهِ فَيَغْسِلُ فَرْجَهُ. ثُمَّ يَتَوَضَّأُ وُضُوءَهُ لِلصَّلَاةِ. ثُمَّ يَأْخُذُ المَاءَ فيُدْخِلُ أصَابِعَهُ في أُصُولِ الشَّعْرِ، حتَّى إذَا رَأَى أنْ قَدِ اسْتَبْرَأَ حَفَنَ علَى رَأْسِهِ ثَلَاثَ حَفَنَاتٍ. ثُمَّ أفَاضَ علَى سَائِرِ جَسَدِهِ. ثُمَّ غَسَلَ رِجْلَيْهِ

In another history it is also stated that when Rasulullah SAW took a junub bath, he started by washing his hands. Next, use the right hand to pour water when washing the genitals. Then the Messenger of Allah performed ablution as ablution for prayer,”.

“Then Rasulullah SAW put his hands into the vessel and combed his hair. Until when he saw that the water had touched the skin or cleaned the skin, he watered his head three times. If there is still water left, he throws it again on his head.”

Then, when there is no water, can the obligatory bathing still be done? Or when in a state where the body cannot be exposed to water? As published on the Akurat.co page, the story of Amr bin Ash who replaced the obligatory bath with tayammum.

One night, Amr bin Ash’s friend experienced junub. However, he didn’t dare to touch the water for fear that the cold biting his skin would adversely affect his health.

The other companions knew about Amr bin Ash’s condition. Then, he took the initiative to ask the Prophet Muhammad SAW. Then, the Prophet asked directly to Amr bin Ash’s friend, “Yes Amr, did you lead the prayers for your friends in a junub state?”

Amr bin Ash also answered the question by mentioning one of Allah’s words,

Wa laa taqtuluu anfusakum innallaha kaana bikum rahiimaa.

Meaning: And do not kill yourself. Verily Allah is Most Merciful to you. (QS. An-Nisa: 29)

The answer said by Amr bin Ash shows that Allah SWT commands us to always take care of ourselves. As for Amr bin Ash, in this case it was protecting himself from the piercing cold so he did tayammum.

The Messenger of Allah, who heard Amr bin Ash’s explanation, just laughed and didn’t say anything. (Narrated by Abu Dawud)

Fiqh Book Recommendations

As Muslims, we should understand the laws in it, including procedures for worship. The following are book recommendations and their summaries as a reference for studying Islamic jurisprudence.

1. Sexual Jurisprudence

Prophet Saw. said, “Indeed a husband who looks at his wife and his wife looks at him (with lust), then Allah will look at these two people with a view of mercy. And if the husband holds his wife’s palm with the intention of kissing her or having sex with her, then the sins of the two people will fall from between his fingers.” (Reported by Maisarah bin Ali and Imam Rafi’i from Abu Said al-Khudri). Apart from continuing the lineage (procreation), sexual intercourse is also a source of pleasure (recreation).

* More than that, religion views sexual activity for husband and wife as worship. Even in other hadiths when a husband looks at his wife or vice versa with passion to make out or have intercourse, Allah looks at them with a look of mercy. Of course, this hadith is only meaningful if the sexual act goes beyond mere physical contact. So, a good Muslim needs to understand Islamic guidance regarding sex so that his sexual behavior and needs lead to pleasure, pleasure, health, and inner and outer beauty have value before Allah.

2. Law of Wealth

3. Women’s Jurisprudence Book

In full, this book reviews how islam gives sublime rules for women in order to raise their noble dignity in this life. The author examines the themes of women’s fiqh one by one: from the nakedness to the prayer priest; from abortion to polygamy; from worship to family; from education to career, from the headscarf to the role of women in the political, social and cultural spheres. In addition to being complete, the discussion method is accurate, thorough, and rigorous in proposing arguments and concluding laws.

In easy-to-understand language, various views of prominent fiqh and hadith scholars are presented in order to enrich the readers’ insights, then their relevance to the realities of today’s life is extracted. By combining the completeness of the material and the breadth of the discussion, this book is very worthy of being used as a reference for anyone, especially Muslim women. This book guides us to live life according to the guidance of Allah’s law in all aspects of life.

4. Moral Jurisprudence

“Very complete and detailed. That’s the added value of this book. The author does not only present problems, but also examines them intelligently, argumentatively, and mentions many new things that have not crossed our minds and minds when carrying out our obligations as parents in educating children.

“The only guide is Allah!” the author insists. Therefore, according to him, the task of parents in educating their children is to take them to get these instructions. And of course, efforts to do so require attention, serious determination, and special knowledge about how parents should educate their children as exemplified in the Qur’an, the Sunnah of the Prophet Muhammad, and the experiences of the Prophet’s prominent companions. In Saudi Arabia, Mustafa al-Adawy, the author of this book, is a respected scholar. He not only gives fatwa, but has also written many books which are quite inspirational and important for the progress of this ummah.”

What are management trainees? – When the Management Trainee program takes place, each member is in a variety of division choices. In the program studying and observing ongoing business. It is from this program that knowledge and experience increase and expand. The skills possessed are also honed to become proficient and professional according to the division.

Employees who enter through the Management Trainee have the opportunity to get a faster career path than other employees. Those who enter the Management Trainee work while studying. In addition, the salary and benefits received by Management Trainees are usually higher.

Definition of Management Trainee

Management Trainee or abbreviated MT is a management training program that is useful for getting the right candidate who has good quality, and also has the potential to occupy a managerial position. Management Trainees can also be referred to as one of the recruitment of new employees in a company.

Management Trainee positions are usually for those who are still fresh graduates. This is because fresh graduates have qualified experience in the world of work. The aim of the company is to hold a Management Trainee program, because a manager’s position cannot be filled by just anyone. Management Trainee is a system for recruiting new employees who will work under the supervision of managers or other company executives.

With this Management Trainee is expected to become a leader or managerial in the future. Because Management Trainees are required to understand fields such as production, marketing, sales and other operations.

If Sinaumed’s is a fresh graduate , Sinaumed’s can study and get these books which are available at www.sinaumedia.com .

Management Trainee Recruitment Process

In the case of Management Trainees, recruitment is needed. Recruiting management trainees requires a long process. This is so that the company does not choose the wrong one. The following is the process that goes through:

1. The recruitment process itself takes quite a long time, around two to seven months. In addition, this program also goes through the selection stage up to seven times.
2. The Management Trainee program aims to train selected people so they can become future leaders in a company. You should be able to maintain above average performance.
3. While participating in the Management Trainee process, employment status cannot be said to be permanent employees. In addition, Management Trainee participants are also not allowed to take time off. In this program, if you do a bad evaluation or are not satisfactory enough, you can be expelled at any time without looking at anything.
4. If you are accepted into the Management Trainee, it means that you must be ready to be placed anywhere.
5. Maintaining an attitude is certainly very important when you join the Management Trainee program. This is because by maintaining your attitude you can show the company that you are a professional and the right person to get a management trainee position.
6. Try to be active at every opportunity. With this you can promote if yourself worthy. But don’t be too hasty, give satisfactory work results.

To understand more, Sinaumed’s can read a book for knowledge about ” Smart Tactics for Passing Psychological Tests for Big Companies” and can get the book which is available at www.sinaumedia.com .

Requirements to Become a Management Trainee

A Management Trainee must have specific knowledge and expertise. This is what underlies being a management trainee should not be filled by just anyone. Following are the requirements:

1. Ability to lead individuals or companies. A prospective management trainee must be able to lead, be it a meeting or individually. This is what underlies the ability to become a leader to get a plus value.
2. Problem solving ability is the ability to analyze problems and find solutions to solve these problems. This skill is very important to become a management trainee, because you can be in the unpredictable position of a problem at any time.
3. Good communication skills. Good communication is communication that can run effectively. Of course, communication is very important, especially if you want to become a Management Trainee. Here you must be able to communicate quickly, precisely, straightforwardly, decisively and not to beat around the bush.
   There are six factors according to theory that support an effective communication, such as: information that is quite complete, concise delivery, not convoluted, choice of words is full of consideration, conveyed clearly and precisely, the information is not fake, communicates using good manners, respect each other and convey information that has been verified.
   Apart from that, here are tips on good and correct communication that Sinaumed’s can try, such as:
   ● Speak well. Pronounce words clearly, speak in a relaxed manner neither too fast nor too slow. The right intonation in representing communication, but not too exaggerated. Choose words that are appropriate and standard enough. Trying to speak well is not easy, but keep practicing your speaking skills, and apply these techniques. ● Listen to the other person while talking. With this you can digest various kinds of information conveyed by your interlocutor. Don’t interrupt the conversation, because this is impolite and you receive minimal information. ● Adjust to the context being discussed. Do not deviate or even you talk things that are not necessary. Avoid sarcasm or gossip. Make sure the communication you establish remains in context.

   ● In addition you need to pay attention to body gestures. Gestures describe the feelings and thoughts of the other person. Look into the eyes of your interlocutor, this shows that you are interested in the communication you are having.

   ● Don’t be too tense, occasionally insert humor that invites laughter. This aims to break the ice and can also make you more relaxed to continue to the next discussion.

   ● Don’t be too self-centered . Don’t be dominant in the conversation, stop when you feel it’s enough and start to listen to your opponent talking.

   ● Control your emotions, don’t get carried away by your emotions. Ansa should be able to stay calm and control your emotions. By staying calm, you can respond appropriately to the conversation.

   ● Accept that no one agrees with you. Don’t be selfish, always want to be heard and feel that your opinion is the most correct.

   ● Ethics remains the main. Maintain your etiquette when in public. Likewise when establishing communication, respect the person you are talking to.

4. A management trainee must have foreign language skills. Foreign languages ​​have also become a development in the era of globalization. We must have more language skills to support communication to make it more fluent. Management trainees must have foreign language skills because they will later lead or become leaders of a company. He must be able to lead anywhere, whether in the country or abroad. And later management trainees will meet with clients of various languages ​​and even countries.
5. Flexibility and adaptation. A management trainee must be able to blend in with a new environment. Must not have a shy nature and do not want to mingle. Besides that, management trainees must also be able to adjust to what they are doing.
6. The ability to control emotions is very important for a leader. If you are an angry person, you have to start to train that emotion. Emotions will only cloud the atmosphere and lead to a lack of clear thinking. If every problem you face is emotional, then you will have difficulty finding a solution to every problem. Silence your emotions, because if we are emotional then we can easily issue harsh words that can hurt anyone including your subordinates in the office.
7. Maturity in attitude. A management trainee must be mature in thought and professional in action. Not taking sides with anyone, even if it’s a friend or relative. What’s wrong should still be rewarded accordingly. In addition, don’t be easily influenced by anyone and be firm in taking action.
8. Relevant or related experience. Make sure the company you choose is your passion, and you have sufficient experience and skills.
9. Have a management or business degree. However, if you are not from management or business education there is nothing wrong with trying. Because being a management trainee also requires readiness from within.

Skills Problem Solving Management Trainee

A management trainee is required to have problem solving skills , there are four basic stages in problem solving, namely:

• Define a problem and also analyze the problem that occurs.
• Develop alternative solutions. This requires creativity and the ability to think critically and logically.
• Define a good solution.
• Implement solutions and evaluate them.

There are several problem solving techniques too! You can use this technique in the world of work, such as:

• Linear Thinking
  Linear Thinking is a simple problem solving technique also known as the Five Whys. This technique emphasizes asking “why” to find the root of the problem

• Design Thinking
  Design Thinking is a problem solving technique which is a problem solving by emphasizing the approach from the user side.

• Creative Problem Solving
  This technique in problem solving uses a balance of logic and creativity to find the causes of problems, and develop innovative solutions.
  Creative problem solving is not just brainstorming or out of the box ideas. But there are also several things that must be emphasized in this process, such as:

1. 1. Don’t judge or take sides until the brainstorming process is over and you’ve evaluated it
   2. Focus on getting lots of ideas, from the brainstorming process and make a list.
   3. Don’t focus on just one idea
   4. In the forum, make the problem a question. Open-ended questions are easier to engage in creative thinking forum content.

• Solution-based thinking
  This technique is solution-based thinking helps to solve problems that focus on what actually works.

Problem solving is very important in work. With problem solving we can be helped to solve a problem. Therefore we must improve problem solving skills. There are several ways that are believed to be able to increase it. Here are ways to improve problem solving, such as:

• Expand knowledge. You have to add extra knowledge about the work you are doing. Not only that, you can also add to your skills by taking some courses or knowledge that adds to your field of work.
• Change mindset. If you see problems as burdens, change that mindset. Make problems a challenge for you to grow better and wiser in making decisions.
• Practice solving problems. Try to practice solving problems from the easiest to the most complicated.
• Use the mind mapping method. This method helps you to map the information obtained, so you can easily understand a problem.
• Learn from others. We can learn how other people make decisions about a problem, or deal with that problem. Good leaders learn anything from anyone.
• Get yourself involved in a variety of projects. This keeps you in a new position, you can walk and get out of your comfort zone. With this you can train problem solving to develop, because you will be faced with various kinds of problems later.
• Focus on a solution obtained, not on the problem. Train your mind if problems keep you down. This is what causes your mind to become negative. Face the problems that occur and focus on the solution.
• Continue to practice communication skills. Communication is very important in problem solving. For this reason, always practice communication both individually and to the team.
• Play games that are useful for sharpening the brain. Sometimes we need entertainment for our brains. But use this opportunity for learning as well.

Benefits of Joining the Management Trainee Program

When you join an MT or Management Trainee, you get lots of benefits, you know! The following are the benefits you get when you take part in the Management Trainee program:

1. Improve the ability to cooperate both individually and in teams. By following this program the ability to work together will continue to be trained.
2. Teaches you to be a leader. You will be trained on how to become a good leader or manager later.
3. Work according to your interests and talents. In the management trainee program you can take part in or try various jobs ranging from finance, marketing, communications to supply chain. With this the supervisor can assess where your best abilities are
4. Great career path
5. Improve the skills you have. Because we get quite a lot of learning, we can practice the skills we have better.

Management Trainee Duties

Managers are mentors. In addition, the manager is the person who gives an assessment to the Management Trainee. So it’s no wonder managers and management trainees have a very close working relationship.

Management trainees have quite heavy duties and responsibilities. Following are the duties and responsibilities of the Management Trainee as follows:

• Supports managers with various tasks. The task includes setting goals and making a policy in the company
• Understand how the company operates and the applicable SOPs
• Assist managers in making work evaluations, including writing reports or analyzing data
• Helping the administrative section
• Participate in corporate strategic planning
• Familiarize yourself with personnel tasks
• Conducting research related to how to increase company profitability and reduce risk
• Prepare and create presentations
• Help with other work
• Participate in meetings, workshops and more
• Observe and learn from the experiences of other colleagues
• Listen to input from managers, supervisors and other seniors.
• Monitor company revenue

Sinaumed’s can read and get his books which are available at www.sinaumedia.com. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, we always try to provide the best and latest information for you.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

What are Mammals? – Mammals are animals that suckle and are animals with the most diverse species on earth. Mammals come in all shapes and sizes. The way of life in the environment and its habitat also varies. All mammals interact with one another.

We, as humans are also mammals, therefore, humans tame other mammal species. Mammals, including humans, are warm-blooded vertebrates. Vertebrates are creatures with backbones and hair.

Mammals feed their young by suckling, in contrast to birds. The mammalian brain is considered more developed than other species. See the article below to find out more about mammals.

 

Definition of mammals

The word mammal is a creation of Carl Linnaeus. Mammalia comes from the Latin word ‘mamma’ which means nipple. This word was first put forward in 1758. Mammals are known and referred to as mammals because mammals suckle their young.

Mammals have mammary glands as a food source. Most mammals reproduce by giving birth to their young, but there are some mammals that do not give birth, or lay eggs. Mammals of this type, called monotremes, have mammary glands, but no nipples. Therefore, these monotremes are still classified as mammals.

Sinaumed’s can do various interesting facts and fun mammal adventures through the Encyclopedia of the World of Mammals which is below.

Characteristics of Mammals

The following are the characteristics of mammals that distinguish them from other species.

• have mammary glands.
• have a backbone (vertebrates).
• have limbs to move such as swimming, running and holding things.
• has hair to cover the whole body.
• have nails or claws on the fingers. these nails or claws are useful for climbing or holding food.
• They have different types of teeth, canines, incisors and molars.
• have lungs for breathing.
• has a heart organ divided into two vestibules and two chambers.
• most reproduce by giving birth (viviparous) some reproduce by laying eggs (ovoviviparous)
• has a place to develop the embryo, namely the uterus

Mammals that can live in dry or wet places make them unique and spread all over the earth. Get to know all mammals through the book Encyclopedia Exploring the World of Mammals.

Mammal Animal Anatomy

Mammals can be identified by having sweat glands as well as mammary glands. But there are several other features that are not visible if only examined through fossils. For the most part, the characteristics below were not shared by the mammalian ancestors of the Triassic. The following is the anatomy shared by all mammals:

• Jaw joint : Most mammals have a mandibular bone that attaches to the bones of the skullcap and forms a joint.
• Middle ear: Mammals can hear by means of sound which is carried from the eardrum by a chain of three bones, the incus and stapes.
• Teeth: Mammals have a layer of enamel which is present on the surface of the teeth. The enamel layer is composed of prisms, solid elongated rod-shaped structures.
• Occipital : Mammals have two knobs at the base of the skull that enter into the uppermost neck. Most other tetrapods have only one.
• Sexual dimorphism: in most mammals, the males are larger than the females. All mammal males fight over females. Females of larger mammals have lower reproductive rates than smaller ones. This suggests that fecundity selection prefers females that are smaller in most mammals.
• Biological systems: The majority of mammals have seven vertebrae. All mammalian brains have a neocortex, this area is unique to mammals. Mammalian lungs are shaped like a sponge or honeycomb. The mammalian heart is divided into four chambers, two upper and two lower atria. The heart with four chambers separates and ensures blood can flow in the right direction. The skin of mammals consists of three layers, the epidermis, dermis and hypodermis. The epidermis of the mammalian skin serves as a water-resistant layer.
• Fur: ​​Mammals have fur, of different shapes and types. Each type of mammalian hair has its own function. Generally, the function of mammalian fur is sensory, camouflage, protection and also waterproofing. Some mammals that live in the tropics have fur the same length as arctic mammals.
• Reproductive system: Mammals are gonocoric. Gonokoris is giving birth with male or female genitals, in contrast to hermaphrodites. Male mammals have a penis which is used for urination and fertilization. Female mammals have a clitoris, labia majora and labia minora on the outside of their genitals. The mammary glands in female mammals are the main source for newborns. Unlike other species, although some have nipples, unlike mammals they have mammary glands.

Mammal behavior

1. Communication

Mammals communicate by making sounds. Making this sound also has many meanings such as wanting to mate, warning of danger signs, telling there is a food source and for socialization purposes. For example, male lions who always make noise during mating rituals to drive away other males.

This of course also serves to attract females. The sound of whale songs is also a signal to the females, whales have different dialects depending on the area of ​​the ocean.

Sinaumed’s can learn other interesting facts about whales, such as how whales can spit water from their heads in the book Animal Anatomy Series: Whales and Other Mammals.

These vocalizations also include territorial calls, or distinguish between groups. For example elephants, they communicate socially with various forms of sound such as grunting, sounding a trumpet-like sound, roaring and rumbling. This thunderous call is below the range of human hearing. This sound can only be heard by other elephants, even if they are within a radius of 10 km.

2. Feeding

Mammals need a lot of energy to maintain a constant body temperature, therefore mammals also need nutritious food. Some mammals are meat eaters but some are plant eaters. Plant-eating mammals consume complex carbohydrates such as seeds, leaves, fruit, nectar and also mushrooms.

Apart from carnivores and herbivores, there are also those who eat everything, namely omnivores, they consume both meat and plants. Carnivorous mammals have a simple digestive system. The size of the animal also determines the type of food consumed. Mammals with a small body size require more high energy and have a high metabolism. Meanwhile, larger animals have a slower digestive system.

Some mammals are omnivores, but generally lean towards carnivores or herbivores. Because meat and plants are digested in different ways, there is a preference for one over the other. For example, bears, there are 70% meat eaters, 50% meat eaters and some are less than 50%.

3. Mammal Animal Intelligence

In intelligent mammals, the cerebrum tends to be larger than the rest of the brain. This intelligence is actually not easy to define, but indications of intelligence can include the ability to learn. For example, primates and mice, they can learn and do a new task. This is an important ability when they are first going to a new habitat.

Types of Mammals and Examples of Mammals

Mammals are further divided into several orders which are grouped based on similarities in their characteristics. The following is the order of mammals along with examples.

1. Monotreme

Monotremes are the only mammals that reproduce by laying eggs. The monotremata order in Indonesia is only spread in Papua. The genitals are in the form of a single hole, which is also the digestive tract and the urinary tract.

For male monotremes, the tip of the penis is boneless. Female monotremes do not have nipples, but they do have mammary glands. Milk will be channeled through the hairs on the female stomach. Examples of short-snouted nokdiak monotremes, nokdiak baliem and nokdiak sentani.

2. Dasyuromorphia

Dasyuromorphia is a marsupial that has many incisors. These carnivorous marsupials are more active at night. This four-legged mammal has a hairy tail and a pointed muzzle.

Marsupials have large skulls and tails shorter than body length. They had soft leather pads all the way to the heel on the soles of their feet. These pads are useful for supporting their bodies when standing and walking. An example of Dasyuromorphia is the extinct sarcophilus laniarius or the Tasmanian devil.

3. Peramelemorphia

Peramelemorphia is an animal that has a pouch. They have a long, pointed nose, a short neck, and a long canal-like pouch that connects the uterus and embryo. They have four legs and are stocky.

Some species of Peramelemorphia have ears that resemble those of a rabbit. These nocturnal animals have good eyesight and sense of smell. Peramelemorphia is an all-eating or omnivorous mammal. They usually eat insects, leaves or tubers. Examples of Peramelemorphia are Bandikut rats and Kalubu esut.

4. Diprothodontia

Diprotodontia are the most diverse group of marsupials with a very large number. Nearly 125 species in the world are included in the Diprotodontia group. This group is arboreal, they walk on two legs and have special behaviors such as being able to jump far or dig holes for their homes.

Another distinctive feature of them is that their hind toes are fully fused. Most of them are herbivores, but there are also some of them that are omnivores. Examples of Diprotodontia are artifact hook-tailed possums, bubutu talaud and kangaroos.

5. Eulipotyphla

Eulipotyphla is a mammal that eats insects. Although they are insectivorous, their bodies weigh less than 20g. Eulipotyphla lived on land, had a rat-like body with a long, pointed snout.

Their snouts and the hair around them become sensory tools as navigation for their movements in hunting for their prey. They have sharp and pointy teeth. These sharp teeth serve to chew and stab their prey. They also have incisors which are very well suited for grasping. Examples of Eulipotyphla are curut thick tail, curut cibodas, and house munggis.

6. Scaling

Scandentia is a mammal that eats insects, fruit and seeds. Their body is similar to that of a squirrel, but they have a long, pointed snout. Scandentia tend to have a small body, flat and elongated body, also a tail with thick hair.

This four-legged animal has fine body hair and sharp claws. Scandentia is a group of animals that have good hearing. There are animals that are more active during the day that live in groups, pairs or colonies. They live in trees and move from branch to branch. Examples of Scandentia animals are root squirrels and ground squirrels.

7. Dermoptera

Dermaptera are mammals that have mucous membranes that run all over their bodies. This kite membrane in the form of thin skin is found on the neck to the tip of the tail. This kite membrane is covered with thin hairs with a grayish brown color.

The front and hind legs have sharp claws. These claws are useful for holding and gripping tree branches. They have very small teeth, incisors that are similar to a comb used for feeding their children and grooming to keep their bodies clean. Dermoptera have sharp fangs and wide molars. These nocturnal animals consume fruits, young leaves and flowers. Examples of dermoptera animals are G. variegatus and G. volans.

8. Chiroptera

Chiroptera are mammals that can fly. Its fingers can expand to become wings. Chiroptera wings have a thin, elastic skin-like covering. These nocturnal animals are divided into two, namely fruit-eating bats and insect-eating bats.

Generally, fruit-eating bats have a larger body size than insect-eating bats. The eyes are also large and some of them have claws on their fingers. Fruit-eating bats have a very keen sense of smell and sight. This is useful to help them aim at the fruits.

Meanwhile, insect-eating bats search for food using ultrasonic waves that cannot be heard by humans. Examples of chiroptera, black trubus bats and bats.

Various other examples of mammals that exist in the world today are also mentioned in the book Mammalia 1 – Exploring the Animal World.

9. Primates

Primates are mammals that have a placenta. Indonesia has 62 species of primates, most of which live in tropical forests. The sizes of primates vary greatly. There are very small ones weighing 30 g and the largest 175 kg, namely gorillas.

Primates have hair that covers their entire body. They have a straight posture and the ability to learn. Hands and feet have fingers that can grip objects. The braincase of primates is relatively large. Many call primates monkeys and apes, but there are differences between them. Examples of primates are macaque monkeys, langurs, slow lorises, and budeng langurs.

10. Carnivores

Carnivores are a group of mammals that eat meat, but a small number of them eat everything and plants. For example the panda, a bamboo-eating animal. Carnivores have canine teeth and claws, walk on all four legs and have whiskers. Examples of carnivores are tigers, dogs, sun bears and starfish.

11. Cetacea

Cetacea are a group of marine mammals. There are whales, dolphins and dolphins. 34 species of cetaceans are in Indonesian waters. Cetaceans have a body shaped like a torpedo. They have strong horizontal fins for locomotion, in contrast to the vertical fins of fish.

They also have nostrils which act as blowers. This hole has a function for their breathing apparatus when they are in the water. Examples of cetaceans are toothed whales, baleen whales, blue whales and long-beaked dolphins.

12. Mermaid

Sirenia is a group of mammals that live in water, similar to cetaceans. Sirenia is a plant eater that spreads in tropical waters. These aquatic animals have nipples on their chests, they breastfeed their children by turning their bodies so that their chests are up.

Sirenia has a rounded tail tip and some are straight or curved inward. One example of Sirenia is the dugong.

 

Maklon Services are  – Did you know that starting a business as a brand owner is currently quite easy and does not require large capital. This is because the existence of a tolling company can be an easy and trusted solution for novice business people.

There are various factors that sometimes prevent someone from starting a business, starting from being confused about the initial capital to build a factory or buying production equipment to paying wages for workers, even though you (maybe you) could be a shoe, bag, food, drink entrepreneur. and cosmetics that are currently popular in society.

However, you don’t need to worry and you don’t need to bother thinking about the things above. You can still start to realize your business smoothly. How to? Of course, by using the toll service.

Are you curious about tolling services? Come on, find out the explanation in this article!

Definition of Maklon Services

Have you ever heard of a company that offers tolling services, or do you not even know the meaning of tolling services?

The term maklon comes from the Dutch language, namely maakloon which means “production costs”. The word maakloon was then absorbed into Indonesian and changed to “maklon”. The term tolling is actually familiar in the business world, especially in the field of clothing and cosmetics. In other words, tolling is defined as product processing services carried out by other parties or tolling companies.

As an example, you use the services offered by a maklok company when you want to run a skincare business with your own brand or brand , but are constrained by capital. A tolling company does have a mission to produce products according to the ideas you want to make happen.

Legal Basis of Maklon Service Companies

Provisions related to tolling services include the Value Added Tax (VAT) Law (UU), Income Tax Law (PPh), Minister of Finance Regulation (PMK) Number 32/PMK.010/2019, and PMK Number 141/PMK. 03/2015.

Just like other service businesses, tolling is also subject to tax in its implementation, which means that the delivery is subject to VAT. In addition, the service provider for this product is also not exempt from the obligation to pay Income Tax Article 23.

1. Aspects of VAT

Referring to the new tax regulations, namely the Law on Harmonization of Tax Regulations, the applicable VAT rate is 11%. However, the government provides special treatment for tolling services whose products are used for export purposes.

The VAT facility provided by the government is 0%, provided that the service company must fulfill various conditions including:

• Details and raw or semi-finished materials are provided by the consignee or service user.
• Raw or semi-finished materials are processed to produce taxable goods (BKP).
• Ownership of BKP lies with the service user.
• Delivery of BKP produced by tolling service entrepreneurs is carried out outside the customs area (supervising agency).
• Specifically for recipients of export products or those subject to foreign tax.

2. Aspects of PPh

Payment for tolling services by the service user to the service provider will be deducted by PPh by 2% of the gross amount, excluding VAT. The gross amount referred to in this case is the total of all production goods with whatever name and form that are paid for, and provided for payment or when payment is due.

Furthermore, service provider companies also require contracts or agreements between service users and service company owners. With this paid contract, both parties will carry out their respective duties properly and optimally. Self-financing usually depends on the type of product to be produced, including taking into account the composition of the materials needed and the amount of product.

Important Terms Related to Maklon Factory

After knowing the basic definitions and concepts, the next thing you need to know about tolling is various important terms in the cooperation process.

1. Tolls vs. Contracts vs. Fully Fledged Manufacturing

When doing research and looking for the best tolling service providers, you might come across the terms toll manufacturing, contract manufacturing, and fully fledged manufacturing .

Toll manufacturing is a toll manufacturing company with product manufacturing facilities only, without providing product raw materials. When choosing this type of company, you must choose and provide the raw materials for the product, as well as determine the specifications and the number of products to be made later.

Furthermore, there is a manufacturing contract that provides a more complete service. Not only facilitating the production process, but also providing the necessary raw materials. That way, you don’t need to worry about the risk of quality and availability of raw materials at this company.

Finally, just as the name suggests, fully fledged manufacturing is a tolling service provider company with the most complete services, especially if you compare it to the two previous types. The services provided by this company include the provision of raw materials, the process of mass production of products, as well as responsibility for risks related to product legality and marketing. Fully fledged manufacturing is also very popular with the name one stop makloon.

2. Job (by) Maklon Order

The next important term related to tolling is makloon job order. The use of this term refers to the production work that the provider will carry out when he receives an order (order) from a service user.

3. CMT (Cut, Make, Trim)

This one term is closely related to the convection industry, which describes the activities of cutting (Cut), making (Make), and Trim. Because of this, you will be familiar with these three terms if you are going to toll clothes at garment companies.

4. Formulation and Sampling

If CMT is related to the convection industry, then you will easily find this next term in tolling companies in the food, medicine, and cosmetic industries.

Yep! Before actually mass-producing, generally the toll service providers will mix the product formula according to the agreement and wishes of the brand owner. After that, they created the sampling and discussed it directly with the brand owner.

If this sampling is in accordance with the wishes and expectations of the brand owner, they will immediately carry out the product manufacturing process.

5. ODM Vs. OEMs

Next, fill in the Original Design Manufacturer (ODM) and Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM). These two terms appear very often and are widely mentioned in various promotional activities from tolling service providers.

ODM itself is a form of tolling process in which brand owners are free to determine the design and specifications of the products they sell. Including what materials will be used in the product, what are the benefits, what is the texture, color, and other specifications.

In contrast, OEM is a form of tolling process in which the brand owner cannot freely determine the product design and specifications. Here the tolling factory will produce finished products, but without a brand, so that the client can claim the product or register it officially at BPOM. This OEM system is also often equated with white label.

How the Maklon Factory Works

After understanding various important terms related to the tolling factory, the next thing you have to learn is the tolling system and how it works.

Although in practice each tolling company certainly has its own policies and SOPs. However, in general the way the tolling factory works is related to several things, namely the tolling company, the brand owner, and the products that are topped.

Maklon Factory Company/Provider

Is the party that provides product manufacturing, starting from the formulator team, design, legality administrators, material providers, to the mass production team.

However, not all companies have the same facilities or provide the same services. There are several tolling companies that only offer OEM or ODM systems only.

So, before choosing to work with these companies, it’s a good idea for you to find out how the services the company offers to their clients.

Brand Owner

Is a party that will use the services of a tolling company, both individually and in certain corporate organizations (CV/PT). Generally, brand owners choose to use tolling services because they do not have sufficient resources to create their own products.

As you know, in the manufacture of cosmetic products, for example, there are many things that you must prepare and fulfill in the process. Such as selecting the right ingredients, having a reliable formulation team, legality, plus sophisticated factories and production machines.

This is difficult to fulfill when the brand owner is still a new entrepreneur. In addition, the costs that brand owners incur will be greater than producing their products through tolling services.

Product (Result)

Well, the next aspect of the tolling factory system is related to products or results. Yep! this product will be adjusted by mutual agreement between the tolling factory provider and the brand owner. Both from dosage forms, product specifications, to the amount that the brand owner wants.

Maclon Process

Each company certainly has its own procedures and policies, even between tolling companies with the same commodity. This is because each company certainly has a different and unique work culture.

However, the tolling process in general can be summarized into the following steps:

• Discussion between the brand owner and the tolling service provider to create a cooperation agreement. Includes the amount of costs that the brand owner will incur, product specifications, processing time, and many others.
• Making samples, after an agreement is formed, the service provider will make product samples and discuss them actively with the brand owner.
• Legality and certification management, after that if the product requires certain certification, the company can provide legality management or according to the client’s needs.
• Mass production, after all preparations have been successfully completed. Then the service provider will carry out the process of mass production of the product desired by the brand owner.

Toll Fee

Basically the cost of tolling is very closely related to the type of product and specifications that the brand owner wants. In addition, each company also provides different costs and offers.

Therefore, in this section we will not discuss explicitly how much you have to pay for tolling costs. However, you can estimate by calculating the product unit price, for example starting from 30-50 thousand rupiah per product, then multiplying it by the number of products you want to make.

For those of you who are just getting into the cosmetics industry and are starting to become a brand owner, this number may be fairly large. Therefore, to outsmart the budget that you will spend later, you can choose a company with a small MOQ.

5 Types of Maklon Services You Need to Know

There are many types of tolling services offered in the business world. In general, tolling services are differentiated based on the goods or products to be produced.

According to various sources, there are 5 types of tolling services that have received more attention from business people. This is because these six products are in great demand by the market, are useful, and contribute well to the economy.

1. Cosmetic Maklon Services

You can use cosmetic tolling services when you want to create your own cosmetic brand but are confused about where to start. You only need to discuss the product specifications you want to produce, then the toll service provider will assemble the formula and carry out the mass production of the cosmetics you want.

Don’t worry, ownership of a cosmetic brand will still be yours. Because basically tolling service providers only help to realize a business that is hindered by you from creating for one reason or another.

2. Instant Food and Beverage Tolling Services

It cannot be denied that the food and beverage industry plays an important role for the national economy. Most of the much-loved foods and drinks are in instant form. Therefore, you can rely on instant food and beverage services to help produce the instant goods you want.

Not only that, this service provider can also be relied upon to take care of the packaging. You also need to pay attention to choosing instant food and beverage tolling services that already have a permit. So that you don’t have to bother taking care of permits to produce goods such as BPOM, product legality, or MUI halal certification.

3. Convection Tolling Services

Convection is a tolling service that produces products in the form of clothing. The production process usually uses the cut make trim (CMT) method. The process includes cutting or cutting raw materials according to the pattern of the clothes, making alias sewing process, and the last is trimming or the stage of tidying up the finished clothes.

In convection tolling services, clothing designs are usually made by the orderer, not the service provider. After the sample is approved, then the toll service owner executes it. Several companies or individuals who need convection services usually produce products such as garments, jackets, uniforms, and bed linen.

4. Herbal Maklon Services

Another product that is currently rampant in the market is made from herbs. More and more people are switching to using herbal products, so that more and more companies are providing this tolling service.

The flow that is passed is almost the same as cosmetic tolls or instant food and drinks. Namely doing product specifications first by the business owner, then continuing with the production process and finally you can market it privately.

Because this is an herbal product, of course these service providers are professionals who are experts in their respective fields. So, you don’t need to worry because the product that will be produced is definitely of quality in its class and affordable.

5. Shoe Tolling Services

This shoe topper is almost the same as convection, because both of them use the cut make trim (CMT) method. The shoe-making business is certainly not an easy thing that can be done by an individual. If you have this, then shoe tolling services are the solution.

Hand over the task of producing shoes to this tolling service. You also no longer need to bother thinking about the complexity of shoe production. But, you can still contribute by providing the design according to what you want. Apart from that, you can also get involved in choosing what kind of shoe material is suitable for your product.

Definition of Main Idea – An article must have a main idea or main idea in it. It is useful to determine which direction the sentence will take place.

The main idea is something that must be in an article. However, it turns out to know the main idea is not easy. This article will explain the main idea. Starting from the definition, characteristics, functions and how to find the main idea.

Definition of Main Idea

Ideas are designs that are arranged inside, thoughts, can also be referred to as ideas. The main idea is an idea conveyed by the author in a subject in the paragraph. The main idea also has another name. Among them are main ideas, main ideas or main thoughts.

The main idea is the most important thing in a paragraph. The main idea will provide important information for the reader. In addition, the main idea will also help the writer to develop a writing flow. Main ideas will be supported by explanatory ideas.

In a sentence, usually only found one main idea. The main idea is located at the beginning of the sentence. But there is something the reader needs to remember, namely the first sentence is not the same as the main sentence. The first sentence can be at the beginning of the paragraph, this is referred to as a deductive paragraph. If it is located at the end of the paragraph, it is called an inductive paragraph. When it is at the beginning or at the end of a paragraph it is called a mixed paragraph.

Main Idea Characteristics

A work by Marchella Praserda Katika, in the journal “The Ability to Determine Main Ideas by Using an Inquiry Learning Model for Class VIII Students of SMP Negeri 1 Bone-Bone North Luwu Regency” which was made in 2018, explains that the main idea has several characteristics. The following are the characteristics of the main idea:

1. The existence of the main idea is not complicated

The existence of the main idea in a paragraph should not be convoluted. That is, the meaning of the main idea should not be narrow. However, not too broad. This serves so that the reader can easily catch what the main idea is. In addition, this will also help readers to easily understand it.

2. The main idea is stated clearly

Apart from being simple, a main idea must also be clearly written or described by the author. This is related to the location. In addition, what will be conveyed or the essence of the idea must also be stated clearly.

3. Is general

A main idea must contain something that is general in nature. This will later be pursed again. This means that a main idea can then be explained and further elaborated. The description will be more specific in the following sentences.

4. Have supporting sentences

A main idea does not necessarily stand alone in a paragraph. The main idea must have a supporting sentence, or a clear idea. These supporting sentences are useful for providing further explanation regarding the previous main idea. So that the paragraph will be coherent and easy to understand.

5. Main Idea function

The main idea in a paragraph also has a function. Like to make it easier for the reader to know the essence or subject matter in a paragraph that is read. This is useful so that the essence of what is conveyed in the paragraph can be conveyed. Through identifying the main idea, the reader can find out the main idea of ​​a paragraph that is read.

How to Find Main Ideas

Even if you just read, finding the main idea is not as easy as it looks. The first easy thing to do to determine the main idea is to look at the type of paragraph you are reading. Determining a main idea in a paragraph is something that requires precision.

Here are some ways to find the main idea in a paragraph:

1. Read the entire paragraph

The first way you can do is to read the entire paragraph. You do this by concentrating carefully when reading. Read at the same time certi word for word in the paragraph. In addition, carefully read any available information. This step can help you determine the main idea. So you can distinguish which is the main idea or which is the explanatory sentence in the paragraph.

2. Read each sentence

The second way that can be done to determine the main idea is to read and understand the sentence. Every sentence in a writing or reading needs to be understood. This is done because each paragraph consists of several main ideas. In addition, each main idea can be located anywhere. It can be located at the beginning, the end or both. So it is important to read and understand each sentence.

3. Separate main sentences

The next way is to separate the main sentence from the explanatory sentence. Distinguish between main sentences and explanatory sentences in a paragraph. The main sentence in a paragraph will usually be followed or preceded by explanatory sentences.

In this case, you should be able to distinguish between the supporting sentence and the main sentence. The trick is to look at the characteristics between the two. An explanatory sentence is a sentence that contains evidence, an example or a special detail. If you can already distinguish between the two, you will get the main idea in the paragraph easily.

4. Mark important information

The fourth way that can be done is to give signs to important information. Such important information can be in every sentence or paragraph. You can mark a few words that you suspect are important and interesting information.

When important information is in two sentences or more, try to select it. Then reconsider the sentences. Through these four ways, you can find the main idea easily and correctly.

5. Explanatory sentences are supports

The next way is the fifth way. This method is done by recognizing explanatory sentences in a paragraph that are as supporters. In this stage, when you are still having difficulties, you can pay attention to the use of repeated words.

That’s because generally the use of repeated words has a function as an explanatory. Repeated words will explain the sentence before or after it. You can choose these explanatory sentences and try them out when they stand alone.

When the explanatory sentence stands alone, it cannot be used as the main idea. Therefore, you can use this method to distinguish explanatory sentences. So that will find the main idea of ​​the paragraph.

6. Conclude the contents of the paragraph

The sixth way that can be done is to draw conclusions. Summarize the contents of a paragraph. It will be useful to help find and determine a main idea. So this will give you convenience.

7. Mark the main idea

The way to determine the seventh main idea is to mark it. Mark the main idea in each paragraph of an essay as a whole. You can do this by combining the beginning and end of sentences in the paragraph. This main idea is generally called a mixed main idea.

You can determine the main idea of ​​the mixture seen from the initial sentence which could be the main sentence. while at the end of the sentence, try to conclude the paragraph. You can immediately give special signs. This will come in handy when reading the next paragraph.

Source: from various sources

Mad thabi’i – When someone reads the Koran, of course he is not allowed to read it carelessly or just read without studying the science of tajwid first. Because a Muslim is required to learn the science of tajwid when reading the Koran.

In fact, the law of learning tajwid is fardhu kifayah, so it means that learning tajwid is an obligation and this obligation will fall if there are several people who learn it.

By learning the science of recitation, the reading of the Al-Quran becomes clearer and the meaning of the verses in the Al-Quran is easier to understand. One of the tajwid sciences that Sinaumed’s must learn is mad reading and one type of mad reading is mad asli or mad thabi’i. What is mad thabi’i? What is the way to read it and how is it an example? Check out the explanation further in this article.

Definition of Mad and Mad Thabi’i

Theoretically, a qori or Al-Quran reader is required to study and know the guidelines outlined by the scholars of tajwid experts as well as things that have been recorded by the imam of the Qurra, namely regarding the law of nun mati, tanwin and mim mati, reading mad and the law, makhorijul letters and their characteristics, waqof and ibtida and other laws.

Books on the science of recitation, of course, have explained the laws of nun breadfruit, tanwin and mim mati and one of the most frequently encountered is the law of recitation, namely mad and qasr readings.

It should be noted that there are quite a lot of types of mad reading, namely there are 15 types of mad reading. Linguistically, mad can be interpreted as an addition or in terms of mad is lengthening the sound when pronouncing the letter mad.

In discussing the science of recitation, there are three letters that are categorized into mad letters, among which are alif with the previous letter having the vowel fathah, yes breadfruit with the previous letter having the vowel kasrah, and finally wawu breadfruit with the previous letter having the vowel in the form of dhommah.

However, in terms of details, the laws of mad reading may vary. There are various kinds of mad readings that Sinaumed’s need to know as a basis for reading the Al-Quran properly and well.

There is also an argument or origin for mad reading, namely from the hadith of Musa bin Yazid al Kindiy ra who said, when Ibn Mas’ud’s friend taught someone, that person also read:

???

Companions of Ibn Mas’ud denied those who read لِلْفُقَرَاۤءِ without extending it and did not give any relief for not extending it. Even though the long and short pronunciation does not affect the sentence and the meaning of the verse.

However, because the reading of the Al-Quran was a sunnah muttaba’ah reading from the last person who took it from the first person, the friend of Ibn Mas’ud also denied reading that was not the same as the reading of the Prophet SAW which was read to all the companions.

So in that way, it shows the obligation of studying the science of recitation and following its provisions when reading the Al-Quran.

According to the book Nihayatul Qoul Al Mufid written by Shaykh M. Makky Nashor, it is explained that mad according to language means lengthening and adding. Meanwhile according to the term mad are the following:

اِطَالَةُ الصَّوْتِ بِحَرْفٍ مِنْ حُرُوْفِ الْمَدِّ

Extend the sound with one of the letters from mad letters or original letters.

Meanwhile, according to KH. Maftuh Basthul Birri in his book entitled Standard Tajweed which is translated by Fathul Mannan, explains that mad according to the term qurra is lengthening the sound with the letter mad.

The mad letters referred to are three of them, namely alif, wawu and finally yes’ with the condition that they must die and fall after the munsabah vow. The size for reading the mad length can be counted on the fingers.

One movement is called one vowel, one letter is one vowel and one alif is defined as two vowels or two movements. Move your fingers normally, namely by holding them or by opening them, apart from counting the length, you can also do it with a tap, such as one tap, two taps and so on.

Mad thabi’i or original mad is the basic concept of mad in the Al-Quran. Mad thabi’i is a word in the Koran that has the vowel fathah and is followed by the hijaiyah letter alif (ا), the vowel kasrah is followed by yes (ي) breadfruit and then the vowel dhammah is also followed by waw breadfruit (و).

Original mad or mad thabi’i can also be interpreted as a branch of discussion of various kinds of mad. According to Arabic, mad means lengthening. More specifically, the reader of the Koran must extend the sound of the letter or the reading because in this verse there is one letter mad.

Mad thabi’i reading law must be recited with a length of 2 vowels or as long as 2 beats. Every reader of the Koran finds verses with the law of tajwid mad thabi’i. Then it is obligatory to read the verse in accordance with the rules of mad thabi’i.

Mad Reading Distribution

Before discussing further about mad thabi’i Sinaumed’s, it is necessary to know an explanation about the distribution of mad in general.

Described by Shaykh Sulaiman Al Jamzuri in his book entitled Tuhfatul Athfal, he said:

وﺃلمد اﺻﻠـﻰ ﻭ ﻓـﺮﻋــﻰ ﻟـﻪ * ﻭﺳــﻢ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻃﺒﻴـﻌـﻴﺎ ﻭﻫـــﻮ

???

بل أي حرف غير هنز اوسكون * ﺟﺎ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﻣـﺪ ﻓﺎﻟﻄﺒــﻴﻌﻰ ﻳﻜـﻮﻥ

It means:

There are two mad schools, namely original mad (mad thabi’i) and mad far’i. The original mad is also called mad thabi’i, namely mad which does not depend on causes and does not also depend on the absence of letters obtained. Every letter other than hamza and breadfruit that comes after mad letters (alif, wawu, yes) is mad thabi’i.

Meanwhile, according to the book Nihayatul Qoul Al Mufid written by Shaykh M. Makky Nashor, it is explained that the original mad is the basic or principal mad law. Given the name mad original or mad thobi’i because someone who has good character will not reduce or add to the length of the reading that has been set.

So, if in an aya there is a wawu mati that falls after the vowel dhommah, yes mati that falls after the vowel kasrah and an alif that falls after the vowel fathah, then the length is one alif or two vowels.

Another opinion says the reason it is called mad is because mad reading is in accordance with the basis or reaction. Meanwhile mad reading is called mad thabi’i because of the nature of mad or the length of the reading is certain, namely as long as one alif.

Actually there are 15 types of mad readings, but broadly speaking mad readings only have two types namely mad original or mad thabi’i and mad far’i.

Mad far’i reading can be interpreted as a branch. So, actually, mad far’i is a branch of the original mad and in general mad far’i occurs because there is another cause that comes from the letters breadfruit and hamzah.

Types of Mad Thabi’i Readings

Mad thabi’i does not depend on causes, for example when meeting with hamzah and breadfruit. The dependence of mad thabi’i is only on mad letters. Readings from mad thabi’i are generally divided into several types, namely mad thabi’i kalimi and mad thabi’i harfi. Here’s a further explanation.

 

• Mad Thabi’i Kalimi 

Mad thabi’i kalimi is mad thabi’i which is seen in the word or mad thabi’i which is seen in the form of the word. Mad thabi’i kalimi there are still several types that divide it, namely mad thabi’i kalimi dhahir and mad thabi’i kalimi muqaddar.

Mad thabi’i kalimi dhahir is the original mad which has mad letters and is clearly visible in rasm or writing. Examples are the following:

صِرَاطَ

The example above is before the alif there is the letter ro with the vowel fathah.

The second type is mad thabi’i muqaddar, namely mad letters which are not clearly visible racially or in writing because they are discarded. Examples are the following:

الرَّحْمَٰنِ

The example above is mad thabi’i because there is a letter mim with vowel fathah and it must be read at length because there is an alif mad which is not visible or not written.

 

• Mad Thabi’i Harfi

Mad thabi’i harfi is mad thabi’i which has the form of letters. Mad thabi’i literally only exists in fawatihus suwar or letter openers or muqatha’ah letters.

Mad thabi’i harfi is collected into five letters حَيٌّ طَهُرَ and then shortened into the following sentences:

كهيعص

The example above is mad thabi’i harfi which is only in the opening of the letter, such as the letter Maryam with mad thabi’i harif which is in the letter ha and the letter yes.

As an additional note, if there are the letters kho, yes, shot, hamzah and ro, then they are read by extending them to two vowels or one alif and it is called the law of reading mad thobi’i harfi, not referred to as the customary mad harfi mukhaffaf because two the following reasons:

• It does not have original breadfruit after the letter alif mad ( حا , يا , طا ,ها , را ) and is different from the letter kof ( ق ) which is read  قاف after mad there is breadfruit in the letter fa’ which is included in the common mad harfi mukhaffaf.
• The letters ( ح ي ط ه ر ) must be read extended to two vowels or one alif and not read to a length of 6 vowels like the usual mad reading. All fawatih letters as suwar are read using Asma Al letters and if they are read in the letters that are read with musamayatul letters, then according to the history of Imam Hafs from Imam Asim, the reading should not be idghomed.

The following examples:

سۤ ۚ – ١ وَالْقُرْاٰنِ الْحَكِيْمِۙ – نۤ ۚوَالْقَلَمِ وَمَا يَسْطُرُوْنَۙ –١

In addition to the two types of mad thabi’i above, there are also a number of additions that are related to mad thabi’i laws that need to be of concern to the reciter. Here’s the explanation.

 

• Mad Thabi’i Not Read

When reading the Koran or reciting recitations, there are several readings that should be read according to the mad thabi’i reading law, but the mad thabi’i are not read. An example is the fragment of Surah Al Baqarah verse 17, as follows:

مَثَلُهُمْ كَمَثَلِ الَّذِي اسْتَوْقَدَ

From the example above, there is mad thabi’i, that is, after the letter ya breadfruit, which previously had the letter dzal with the vowel kasrah. However, from beginning to end, his mad thabi’i readings were not legible.

If there is a mad thabi’i reading, then after meeting the letter breadfruit, then the mad thabi’i reading is not read, this is for the sake of preventing iltiqa sakinain or a meeting of the two sukun.

 

• Mad Thabi’i Tak Idgham

In the reading law of idgham mutamatsilain it is stated that if two letters are the same, then the first letter of breadfruit and the second of life will be included as the first idgham in the second letter.

The rule of idgham mutamatsilain does not apply if it coincides with the reading law of mad thabi’i. An example is the letter ya mad breadfruit meeting with yes or the letter wawu mad breadfruit meeting wawu. Examples are the following:

الَّذِي يُوَسْوِسُ

(letters ya mad meet with letters ya)

 آمَنُوْا وَعَمِلُوْا

(letters wawu mad meet with letters wawu)

From the example above, it can be concluded that the idgham mutamatsilain reading law does not apply if it is concurrent with the mad thabi’i law, because the mad thabi’i reading law will be superior or some opinions reveal that reading like this is mad tamkin.

 

• Mad Reading Like Mad Thabi’i

The last mad reading law is a reading that is similar to mad thabi’i, namely mad tamkin, mad iwadh, mad shilah washirah and mad badal. The four mad reading laws are derived from mad thabi;i, because they have the same reading length, which is 2 vowels long.

According to some opinions, similar mad readings such as mad thabi’i are included in the division of the types of mad thabi’i. Meanwhile, other opinions reveal that the derivatives of mad thabi’i and mad thabi’i must still be explained differently and separately.

Examples of Mad Thabi’i Readings

So that Sinaumed’s can understand the explanation regarding the law of mad thabi’i reading, here are some examples of mad thabi’ readings in the Al-Quran.

• QS. Al Humazah: 3

يَحْسَبُ أَنَّ مَالَهُۥٓ أَخْلَدَهُۥ 

Yaḥsabu anna mālahū akhladah

• QS. AlFiel: 1

أَلَمْ تَرَ كَيْفَ فَعَلَ رَبُّكَ بِأَصْحَٰبِ ٱلْفِيلِ

Alam tara kaifa fa’ala rabbuka bi`aṣ-ḥābil-fīil

• QS. AlFiel: 5

فَجَعَلَهُمْ كَعَصْفٍ مَّأْكُولٍۭ

Fa ja’alahum ka’aṣfim ma`kụl

• QS. Al Quraysh: 4

ٱلَّذِىٓ أَطْعَمَهُم مِّن جُوعٍ وَءَامَنَهُم مِّنْ خَوْفٍۭ

Allażī aṭ’amahum min jụ’iw wa āmanahum min khaụf

• QS. Al Maun: 3

وَلَا يَحُضُّ عَلَىٰ طَعَامِ ٱلْمِسْكِينِ 

Wa lā yaḥuḍḍu ‘alā ṭa’āmil-miskīn

• QS. An Nasr: 2

وَرَاَيۡتَ النَّاسَ يَدۡخُلُوۡنَ فِىۡ دِيۡنِ اللّٰهِ اَفۡوَاجًا

Wa ra-aitan naa syayadkhuluuna fii diinillaahi af waajaa

• QS. At Takasur: 5

كَلَّا لَوۡ تَعۡلَمُوۡنَ عِلۡمَ الۡيَقِيۡنِؕ

Kalla Lauta’lamuuna ilmal yaqiin

• QS.. Al Qariah: 7

فَهُوَ فِىۡ عِيۡشَةٍ رَّاضِيَةٍ

Fahuwa fii ii syatirroodiyah

• QS. An Nas: 4

مِنۡ شَرِّ الۡوَسۡوَاسِ ۙ الۡخَـنَّاسِ

Ming syarril was waasil khannas

Thus the explanation regarding the law of reading mad thabi’i. As a Muslim, of course, Sinaumed’s needs to learn the science of recitation so that he can read the Al-Quran properly and well.

If Sinaumed’s wants to start studying recitation or learning to read the Koran, then Sinaumed’s can learn it by reading books. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia.com provides various kinds of quality and original books for Sinaumed’s.

Author: Khansa

Source: 

• https://tafsiralquran.id/ilmu-tajwid-mengenal- Hukum-mad-asli-mad-thobii/
• https://wisatanabawi.com/ Hukum-bacaan-mad/#Mad_Thabii
• https://www.khudzilkitab.com/2019/09/penjuangan-mad-thabii-lengkap.html
• https://syarihub.id/mad-thabii-pengertian-dan-exemplary/
• https://berita.99.co/example-mad-thabi-i/

Mad Farqi – Muslims must understand that the holy book Al-Quran cannot be read carelessly. All the letters in the verses of the Al-Quran have actually been arranged in the Science of Tajwid, namely the science that teaches the skill of sounding or pronouncing the letters in the holy book of the Al-Quran properly and correctly. When studying Tajweed, you don’t just get smart right away, but it requires a process and a sincere intention.

This Tajwid science has regulated several reading laws in the Al-Quran. Starting from the law of mim dead, reading idzhar, to reading mad. All of that, of course, must be understood as well as possible by Muslims as taught by Rasulullah SAW. In the mad reading law, the characteristic that accompanies it is the long sound of the hijaiyah letters, especially those with the vowel hathah meeting the dead alif. In the mad reading law, it also divides several mad readings, one of which is mad farqi. So, what is mad farqi reading? How to read verses of the Koran that contain mad farqi readings? What is the explanation about the law of reading mad in the holy book of the Koran? So, so that You understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

What is Mad Farqi Reading?

According to the language, the word “Mad” means ‘to lengthen’, more precisely, to ‘lengthen the sound when pronouncing the mad letters’. Meanwhile, the word “farqi” means ‘differentiator’. Another name for mad farqi is mad istifham alias mad question, because in the reading there will be the letter hamzah (ء) which means “what” as a question expression. The existence of this mad farqi is included in the branch of the Mad Far’i derivative which has 14 branches.

That is, this mad farqi reading will be used to distinguish between which are interrogative sentences and which are not interrogative sentences. Readings that are read long (mad) are interrogative sentences, while those that are read short (not mad) are not interrogative sentences. Just a little trivia , this mad farqi reading occurs because it separates the Mad Badal law from the Mutsaqqal Kilmi Mad Typical law.

So, since the reading of mad farqi has been arranged in such a way, it is not permissible to read it arbitrarily, especially in terms of length. For the law of reciting mad farqi, it is obligatory to recite it for six vowels or three alifs. That is, by lengthening the istifham hamzah by six vowels, then idghaming it with the next letter.

How to Read Mad Farqi and Examples?

As previously explained, to read mad farqi readings it is enough for six vowels (beats) or three alifs.

For examples of mad farqi readings contained in the holy book of the Koran, there are actually only 3 surahs, namely Surah Al-An’am verses 143-144, Surah Yunus verse 59, and Surah An-Naml verse 59.

Surah Al-An’am verse 143

( Tsamāniyata azwāj, minaḍ-ḍa`niṡnaini wa minal-ma’ziṡnaīn, qul āż-żakaraini ḥarrama amil-unṡayaini ammasytamalat ‘alaihi ar-ḥāmul-unṡayaīn, nabbi`ụnī bi’ilmin ing kuntum ṣādiqīn.)

It means:

“…There were eight cattle in pairs (four pairs); a pair of sheep and a pair of goats. Say, “What has Allah forbidden two males or two females or what is in the wombs of the two females? Explain to me based on knowledge if you are truthful.”

Surah Al-An’am Verse 144

( a minal-abiliṡnaini wa minal-baqariṡnaīn, qul āż-żakaraini ḥarrama amil-unṡayaini ammasytamalat ‘alaihi ar-ḥāmul-unṡaya-uniṡaya, am Kuntum Syahadā`a ż waṣākumullāhu bihāżb , innallāha lā yahdil-qaumaẓ-ẓālimīn.)

It means:

“…And from a pair of camels and from a pair of cows. Say, “What is unlawful for two males or two females, or what is in the wombs of the two females?” Were you witnesses when Allah decreed this for you? Who is more unjust than those who invent lies against Allah to lead people astray without knowledge?” Surely Allah will not guide the unjust people.”

Surah Yunus Verse 59

( Qul a ra`aitum mā anzalallāhu lakum mir rizqin fa ja’altum min-hu ḥarāmaw wa halālā, qul āllāhu ażina LAkum am ‘alallāhi taftarụn.)

It means:

“…Say (Muhammad), “Tell me about the sustenance that Allah has sent down to you, then you make some of it unlawful and some of it lawful.” Say, “Has Allah given permission for you (about this) or are you making this up in the name of Allah?”

Surah Al-Naml Verse 59

( Qulil-ḥamdu lillāhi wa salāmun ‘alā ‘ibādihillażīnaṣṭafā, āllāhu khairun ammā yusyrikụn .)

It means:

“…Say (Muhammad), “Praise be to Allah and peace be upon His chosen servants. Is Allah better, or what do they associate (with Him)?”

Get to know Mad Reading Law

Basically, Mad reading is one of the rules for reciting the Al-Quran which has been regulated in the Science of Tajweed. This Mad reading occurs by lengthening the hijaiyah letters because there is a meeting between the hijaiyah letters which have the vowel fathah ( ﹷ ) with dead alif; hijaiyah letters with the vowel dhammah ( ُ- ) with wau dies; and hijaiyah with the vowel kasrah ( ِ- ) which meets ya’ die.

According to the language, the word “mad” means ‘additional’ or ‘long’. Meanwhile, according to the term, the tajwid scholars and qiraat experts have agreed that this Mad reading law will occur by lengthening the sound of the hijaiyah letters in the Al-Quran, but with the rules that apply. Therefore, there are 3 types of mad letters, namely:

1. Alif ( ا ), before the letters Alif line fathah
2. Wau (ﻭ), before wau march dhammah
3. Ya (ﻱ ), before the letters Ya line up in dash

Broadly speaking, this mad reading is divided into 2 namely Mad Thabi’i (original mad) and Mad Far’i (branch or derivative).

Mad Reading Distribution

1. Mad Thabi’i (Mad Original)

That is mad reading which can stand alone because of the mad letter itself. This reading from Mad Thabi’i occurs when the hijaiyah letters are usually extended by one alif or two vowels. Not all hijaiyah letters can be read Mad Thabi’i, yes, there must be the following things:

• If there is an Alif letter ( ا ) it is after the vowel fathah ( ﹷ ). Example: نا, ما, سا, وا, ح
• If there is a Wau letter (ﻭ) it is after the vowel dhammah (ُ-). Example: سو, مو, نو, وو, حو
• If there is a letter Yes (ﻱ ) it is after the vowel kasrah ( ِ- ). Example: مي, سي

2. Mad Far’i (Branch or Derivative)

The existence of Mad Far’i is a branch or derivative of Mad Thabi’i and has 14 branches. Mad Farqi is also included in this branch of Mad Far’i, right… Well, here’s an explanation.

a) Mad Obligatory Muttashil

Namely the mad reading that occurs when Mad Thabi’i meets the letter hamzah (ء) in one word or one sentence . The only way to read it is to extend it up to 4 or 5 vowels. Examples of Mad Obligatory Muttashil readings:

b) Mad Jaiz Munfasil

Namely the mad reading that occurs when Mad Thabi’i meets the letter hamza (ء) in two words . The way to read it is to extend it up to 4 or 5 vowels. Examples of reading Mad Jaiz Munfasil:

c) Mad Layyin

That is, the mad reading that occurs in the hijaiyah letters with the upper vowel (fathah and dhommah) meets the letters yes (ﻱ ) and wau (ﻭ) marked with breadfruit. Meanwhile, in front of it again there is one letter that is turned off because waqaf alias stops. In short, this Layyin reading occurs when there is an italic reading (lin) meets one letter which is turned off due to waqaf (stopping).

What is italics , aka lin? Now, what is included in the italic reading (lin) is reading that has sounds like “Ai” (fathah meets the letter ya) and “Au” (fathah meets the letter wau).

This Mad Layyin reading can be read by lengthening it by about 2, 4, up to 6 vowels. However, you have to be consistent in reading it until the end of the reading. Example reading:

d) Mad Badal

That is what happens when the letters hamza (ء) meet the letters mad. Usually, there will be 2 hamza letters (ء). The first hamzah (ء) letter will be a vowel, while the second hamza (ء) letter will be given death certificate, so that the second hamzah (ء) letter will be replaced with:

• Letter Alif ( ا ), if the first hamza has vowel fathah.
• Letter Wau (ﻭ), if the first hamzah has the vowel kasrah.
• Letter Yes (ﻱ ), if the first hamzah has the vowel dhommah.

If you have met, then it must be read in length as much as 2 vowels. Examples of reading Mad Badal:

e) Mad Tamkin

Namely, if there are 2 letters Ya (ﻱ), both those who have tasydid and those who have a blessing meet breadfruit. The reading must be 1 alif or 2 vowels long with the placement of the reading in the tasydid and Mad Thabi’i. Examples of reading Mad Tamkin:

f) Mad Iwad

That is, if there are hijaiyah letters with the vowel fathah tanwin, then it is read waqaf (stop) at the end of the sentence. The reading must be as long as 1 alif or 2 vowels. Examples of reading Mad Iwad:

g) Mad Arid Lissukun

That is what happens if there is a mad letter meeting with breadfruit which is caused by a waqaf (stopping) especially at the end of the verse. If it is not waqfed, it will become Mad Thabi’i. The length of the reading is around 2, 4, up to 6 vowels. There are three types of reading laws for Mad Arid Lissukun, namely:

• Tul (long), about 3 alif or 6 vowels.
• Tawassuth (medium), about 2 alif or 4 vowels.
• Qasar (short), about 1 alif or 2 vowels.

h) Mad Farqi

As previously explained, mad farqi is reading that occurs because of a meeting between Mad Badal and letters that have tasydid. How to read it must be about 6 vowels long.

i) Mad Silah Qasirah

That is what happens if ha dhamir (pronoun) is between two letters that are vowel but not consonants. How to read it must be about 2 vowels long. Example of reading Mad Silah Qasirah:

j) Mad Silah Tawilah

That is what happens if ha dhamir (pronoun) meets the letter hamzah (ء) which is lined up and the letter before ha dhamir is also lined up. How to read it must also be about 4 to 5 vowels long. Examples of reading Mad Silah Tawilah:

k) Mad Lazim Mutsaqqal Kalimi

That is what happens if the original mad or Mad Thabi’i meets a letter that has tasydid in one word . This reading must be read in length of about 6 vowels. Example of reading Mad Lazim Mutsaqqal Kalimi:

l) Mad Lazim Mukhaffaf Kalimi

That is what happens if the letter mad meets letters that line up breadfruit in one word. There are only 2 examples of this reading in the Al-Quran, namely in Surah Yunus verses 51 and 91.

m) Mad Lazim Mutsaqqal Harfi

Namely, it is a mad reading that is found in certain letters only. Certain letters are usually at the beginning of the sura marked by (~). This reading must be read in length as much as 3 to 6 vowels. Certain letters are usually: ن, ق, ص, ع, ل, ي, ك, م.

n) Mad Lazim Mukhaffaf Harfi

It is a long reading at the beginning of the sura. Unlike the previous one, this one Mad reading has a standing fathah mark so it has to be read lightly along 1 alif or 2 vowels only. The letters included in Mad Lazim Mukhaffaf Harfi are:

So, that’s a review of what the law of reading mad farqi is, along with how to read it and examples of reading it contained in the holy book of the Koran. Has You read Mad’s reading correctly?

Understanding Macroeconomics – Economics is a science that has developed since ancient civilizations. Starting from the simplest form, economics has developed to become more complex and structured as it is today.

Discussing economics will not be enough of our time. This is because this science has a very broad scope and its development is quite fast. One type of study in the world of economics that is popularly discussed is Macroeconomics . What’s that? Let ‘s get to know each other further!

A. Definition of Economics

Before discussing Macroeconomics, we need to first equate perceptions of what economics is. The Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) has two definitions in this regard. The first definition, economics is the science of the production, distribution, and consumption of goods, as well as various issues related to it, such as labor, financing, and finance.

While the second definition of economics in the KBBI is the science of human social activities in meeting the necessities of life obtained from their environment. Sinaumed’s can learn everything about economics in the Introduction to Economics book below.

 

B. Branch of Economics: Micro and Macro Economics

The two main branches of economics are Macroeconomics (Macroeconomics) and Microeconomics (Microeconomics). As reflected in their names, these two economic theories are contradictory in content. In short, Macroeconomics focuses its study on the economy as a whole and total. Meanwhile, microeconomics is a study that examines individual economic units.

The differentiation between the two economic theories is also based on how economists emphasize the theme of their discussion. The emphasis of adherents of Macroeconomic Theory is on the behavior of economic agents as a whole (aggregate). The book Macroeconomic Theory by Telisa Aulia Falianty will be the right choice for Sinaumed’s to learn more about macroeconomic theory.

Meanwhile those who adhere to Microeconomic Theory emphasize their analysis on individual or individual behavior. For example, how is the behavior of companies as producers, as well as consumers and workers in a limited context (industry) as described in the book Theory of Microeconomics Edition 3 by Muh Abdul Halim.

Another difference between the two economic theories is the assumptions used. Microeconomic Theory—which is often also referred to as Classical Economic Theory—assuming that the market structure is a form of perfect competition, the information is perfect and symmetrical, there are similarities (homogeneous) in input and output , and economic actors are rational and aim to maximize profit.

This theory also conveys the assumption that adjustments through market mechanisms can be achieved instantly, and money only has a function as a transaction tool. Thus, according to adherents of the Classical Economic Theory, economic problems are only on the supply side. Adam Smith is a popular economic figure as the motor of this Microeconomic Theory.

The momentum of the Great Depression that occurred in the period 1929-1933 became a milestone for the rise of Macroeconomic Theory. This theory was born as a criticism of Smith’s Classical Economic Theory. This Macroeconomic Theory was pioneered by John Maynard Keynes, because of that the followers of this theory are then called Keynesians.

Contrary to the assumptions of the proponents of Microeconomic Theory, the Keynesians assume that the market structure has a monopolistic tendency with asymmetrical and imperfect information. The inputs and outputs used as exchanges also vary (heterogeneous). Keynesian also assumes that money is not only seen as a transaction tool.

However, money can also be used as a store of value. Thus, money is very likely to be used to gain profit through speculative actions. From the series of assumptions above, those who agree on Macroeconomics are of the view that the government’s role is needed in managing the economy through monetary and fiscal policies.

C. Definition of Macroeconomics

For this reason, Macroeconomics is often used as an instrument for analyzing and designing a series of policy targets related to inflation, employment, economic growth, and a sustainable balance of payments.

This economic study can also be used to analyze producers as a whole. Consumers are also not left behind, Macroeconomics analyzes them in the context of how to allocate income to buy goods and use services. To study macroeconomics, Sinaumed’s can start through the book Macroeconomics: An Introduction by Karhi Nisjar which explains the important foundations of this science.

 

D. Macroeconomic Objectives

There are several types of macroeconomic goals and they affect a country’s economy. Each of these goals is aimed at solving problems that arise in a country. The following are some of the objectives of implementing Macroeconomic policies:

1. Creating Jobs

The policies produced in Macroeconomics aim to regulate job creation. Thus, the state is able to minimize unemployment. This is because high unemployment will have a negative impact on a country. The high unemployment rate will ultimately only be a burden to the country’s economy.

2. Making High Domestic Production

Much or little production capacity in a country depends on the high or low amount of investment coming into the country. While investment depends on the level of domestic savings.

Then, domestic saving depends on people’s income and interest rates. Therefore, in order to increase production capacity in a country, it can be done by increasing people’s income. The method? Community productivity is increased.

3. Creating Stable Economic Conditions

Economic stability in a country includes stability in prices of goods, employment, and people’s income levels. The implementation of Macroeconomic policies aims to stabilize prices of goods and employment. In the end, this condition will have a good impact on a country.

 4. Make Balance of Payments Balanced

It is a necessity that every country must conduct trade transactions with other countries. This practice can also ultimately have an impact on the country’s economic conditions, so the balance of payments must be balanced. Several components of the balance of payments that are important to know are monetary traffic, the current account, and the trade balance.

 5. Making Resident Income Equal

Equal distribution of population income can occur with equal distribution of processed natural and human resources. Equal distribution of income is expected to be able to increase the level of consumption or people’s purchasing power. Thus, a balanced and peaceful life without riots can be realized.

E. Scope of Macroeconomics

1. Determination of the Level of State Economic Activity

The ability of a country to produce goods and services is described in Macroeconomics. Thus this scope also has a number of expenditure items, namely:

1. Company expenses (investment)
2. government spending
3. Export and import
4. Household expenditure for consumption

 2. Government Policy

The problems of inflation and unemployment are inseparable from a country’s economy. The government has also made various efforts to overcome it, both through fiscal and monetary policy instruments. Fiscal policy is a set of steps taken by the government to change the amount and structure of taxes.

The goal is to influence the economic activities of the state and society. Meanwhile, monetary policy is a set of policies implemented by the government to influence how much money is circulating among the people in the economic corridor.

3. Aggregate Expenditures

Aggregate spending means overall spending. If this expenditure cannot reach the ideal level, the result is a problem in the economy. The realization of employment opportunities is able to monitor the rate of inflation. Therefore, ideally aggregate expenditure can be at the required level.

F. Policy in Macroeconomics

In studying policies in macroeconomics such as fiscal and monetary policies, Sinaumed’s can obtain information through the book Macroeconomics: An Introduction to Management by Detri Karya.

Macroeconomic Studies examine matters relating to inflation and deflation, the unemployment rate, and the availability of jobs. In practice, Macroeconomics has the following policies:

 1. Fiscal Policy

Income and expenditure of a country is regulated in this policy. State income or income can be obtained from taxes paid by every citizen. Apart from that, other state revenue coffers come from non-tax, such as auctions, fines, gifts from other countries, and gratuities.

 2. Monetary Policy

This policy is the difference between Macro and Micro Economics. Monetary policy serves to measure how much funds have been issued by the central bank in a country. The more money circulation that occurs, the more it will affect the inflation rate.

In the end it will increase the price of a product. Conversely, if the velocity of money is small, the price of a product is cheaper. This is what is called deflation. Monetary policy has an important role in people’s lives, namely to maintain the pace of economic growth in a country. Such are the benefits of studying economics, namely in order to understand its application in our daily activities.

 3. Supply Side Policy

The function of this policy is to balance the balance sheet in a company or country. It is natural that currently the average company needs an expert in economics. With this knowledge, it is hoped that all financial management processes, especially those related to production, can be reduced to a minimum.

In addition, product quality can also be balanced. Thus the resulting product will be of higher quality. In the Indonesian context, Macroeconomics is a system for analyzing economic changes in the country that have the potential to affect companies, society and markets.

From Macroeconomics we can also get an explanation of changes in economic conditions in Indonesia, in order to get the best analysis results.

G. Objectives of Macroeconomics

Indonesia also has its own goals in implementing macroeconomic policies in the country. According to the Ministry of Finance, the goals of Macroeconomics in Indonesia are as follows:

1. Increase national income

By knowing the amount of Indonesia’s national income, it can measure economic growth more clearly. Economic policies taken can also be more effective and efficient.

2. Increase production capacity

Increasing national production capacity will be able to increase Indonesia’s economic development. One way to increase production capacity is to improve the situation for investment. Thus, incoming investment can affect national productivity.

3. Create jobs

The existence of job opportunities due to increased national productivity will in turn be able to increase production capacity. This is where the role of macroeconomic policy in Indonesia is to attract investors to want to invest their capital. Thus, new jobs are created.

4. Control inflation

One of the causes of inflation is due to too much demand for a commodity. As a result, commodity prices soared. Through Macroeconomics, Indonesia is able to carry out cash ratio policies, open market politics , and discount politics. The goal is one, to stop the rate of inflation in the country.

5. Creating economic stability

Macroeconomic analysis in Indonesia can be used to maintain the country’s economic stability. This stable condition is important. Why? So that economic actors abroad can trust Indonesia so that later they want to invest in this country.

Indonesia’s economic stability can only be achieved if the two macroeconomic variables run in balance. The two variables are the balance of payments and the level of demand for inventory.

6. Make the foreign balance of payments in a balanced position

Analysis of Indonesia’s Macroeconomics needs to be carried out with the aim of seeking balance in the foreign balance of payments. The balance of payments itself contains a summary of various transactions, such as sales and purchases of goods and services, grants from abroad, as well as financial transactions between residents at home and abroad.

The foreign balance of payments must be in a balanced position to avoid a deficit. In learning more deeply about macroeconomic objectives, both from individual aspects to overall activities in the economy, the book Microeconomics An Introduction is the right choice.

 

Macroeconomic Problems in Indonesia

Macroeconomics also has an influence on Indonesia’s business climate. This has become a certainty, because the rule that applies is that the magnitude of economic changes can have an impact on society as well as companies and their markets.

Macroeconomics also has a close relationship with state financial issues. This is because this concept is capable of influencing price stability, achieving balance, employment, and economic growth. However, in the business context in Indonesia, there are several macroeconomic problems that often arise.

First, there are problems with banking and bad credit. Second, there is a domestic exchange rate crisis against Indonesia’s foreign debt. The third is the issue of unemployment and poverty. Finally, the macroeconomic problem that often arises in the business context is the question of economic growth itself.

In the span of the history of law enforcement in Indonesia, many questions arise about non-legal losses such as abandoned assets turning into old machines, thousands of employees being laid off and other things if a crime occurs. Therefore, the book Microeconomic Analysis of Indonesian Criminal Law is here to answer this question.

 

Conclusion

In closing this review we need to know how important it is to know and learn about Macroeconomics. Because the focus of the study of this branch of economics is the economy as a whole, so by studying it we can know the macroeconomic aspects both at the state level and the people around us.

For example, we can understand what are the elements used by the government to determine various policies in the Indonesian economy. In this way, we can participate in analyzing where the policy is headed and can be prepared to adapt.

Then, we can appreciate products that come from natural resources more. Knowing the strategic role of natural resources in a country’s economy—in the macroeconomic corridor—allows us to be frugal in using processed products.

Next, by understanding the study of Macroeconomics, we can know about the free market and how the government’s policy towards it. In this way, we can be more vigilant when participating in markets that cross continents and country boundaries.

Finally, by learning about Macroeconomics we can be more aware of the phenomena of marginalized communities and poverty. With that we can take an active role in alleviating their problems with strategic and systematic steps.

Thus a complete review of Macroeconomics and how it is applied in Indonesia. It should be remembered that the strength of the domestic economy is supported by various types of commodities, both originating from industry, natural resources, and so on. Well-managed domestic resources will play a significant role in our economic development.

Teacher’s Hymn – Talking about education certainly cannot be separated from the teacher’s name. The role of the teacher in education is very important because it can provide additional knowledge for students as well as shape the character of the students themselves. Teachers will also be happy when they see their students succeed in the future.

Teacher is an unsung job. The presence of a teacher is very important for students. Without a teacher, we will not know much about science. Teachers not only teach basic science, but also as educators for students to become better. Therefore, we should respect and value teachers.

Thanks to all the material provided by the teacher, students become smarter and their insights increase. In fact, thanks to the teacher, we also know which things are really good to do and which are not good things to do.

Definition of Teacher

The definition of a teacher is someone who has devoted himself to teaching a science, educating, directing, and training his students to understand the science he teaches. In this case, the teacher not only teaches formal education, but also other education and can become a role model for his students.

Meanwhile, in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), a teacher is a person whose job (livelihood, profession) is teaching.

From this explanation, we can understand that the role of the teacher is very important in the process of creating a quality next generation, both intellectually and morally.

Understanding Teachers According to Experts

In addition, some experts also express the meaning of the teacher. The following is the understanding of the teacher according to experts, namely:

1. Dri Atmaka (2004)

According to Dri Atmaka, educators or teachers are people who have the responsibility to provide assistance to students in developing both physical and spiritual.

2. Husnul Chotimah (2008)

According to Husnul Chotimah, the notion of a teacher is a person who facilitates the process of transferring knowledge from learning resources to students.

3. Ngalim Purwanto

According to Ngalim Purwanto, the notion of a teacher is a person who has given knowledge or intelligence to a person or to a group of people.

4. Mulyasa

According to Mulyasa, the notion of a teacher is someone who has academic qualifications and competence as a learning agent, is physically and mentally healthy, and is able to realize national education goals.

5. Drs. M.Uzer Usman (1996)

According to Drs. M. Uzer Usman, the notion of a teacher is every person who is authorized and served in the world of education and teaching in formal educational institutions.

6. Law no. 14 of 2005

According to Law no. 14 of 2005 concerning Teachers and Lecturers, the notion of teachers is professional educators who have the main task of educating, teaching, guiding, directing, training, assessing and evaluating students in early childhood education through formal basic education and secondary education.

Teacher Duties and Responsibilities

A teacher has a responsibility towards his students. A teacher or educator has the duty and responsibility to teach, educate, train students to become quality individuals, both in terms of intellectual and morals or behavior. Here are some of the main tasks of the teacher, including:

1. Teaching Students

A teacher certainly has the responsibility to teach a science to students. This is the main focus in teaching activities in intellectual matters, so that students know about material from a scientific discipline.

2. Educate the Disciples

Educating students is different from teaching a science. In this case, educational activities with the aim of changing student behavior for the better.

The process of educating students is a more difficult thing to do when compared to teaching a science. In addition, a teacher must be able to be a good role model for his students, so that students can have good character according to the norms and values ​​that apply in society.

3. Train Students

A teacher also has a duty to train his students to have basic skills and prowess. If in public schools the teachers train students on basic skills and abilities, then in vocational schools the teachers provide advanced skills and skills

4. Guiding and Directing

Learners may experience confusion or doubt in the teaching and learning process. A teacher has the responsibility to guide and direct their students to stay on the right track, and in accordance with educational goals.

5. Giving Encouragement to Students

The last point of a teacher’s job is to encourage his students to try hard to be more advanced. The form of encouragement given by a teacher to his students can be in various ways, for example by giving gifts.

The Role of Teachers in Education

Teachers have an important role in education. The following is the role of the teacher, including:

1. As a teacher

The teacher is a person who teaches a science to his students. With the role of this teacher, the knowledge of a student can increase.

2. As an educator

The teacher is a person who educates his students to have behavior that is in accordance with the norms that apply in society. Thanks to this role, students will know what can be done and what cannot be done.

3. As a guide

The teacher is the person who directs his students to stay on the right track according to educational goals.

4. As a motivator

The teacher is the person who motivates and encourages his students to learn. The motivation given by this teacher can make students more enthusiastic about learning and not easily bored when teaching and learning activities take place.

5. As a role model

The teacher is a person who sets a good example and example to his students. Therefore, as much as possible the teacher does not show bad behavior in front of students.

6. As an administrator

The teacher becomes the person who records the progress of his students, so he knows which students are developing significantly and which are difficult to develop.

7. As an evaluator

The teacher becomes the person who evaluates the learning process of their students.

8. As an inspiration

Teachers become people who inspire their students, so that they have a goal in the future.

Actually, there are many roles of a teacher in the world of education. Not only in teaching science, teachers are also often role models for their students.

Teacher History

Sinaumed’s, National Teacher’s Day which is celebrated every November 25 has a long history because it is closely related to the birthday of the Indonesian Teachers Association (PGRI) on November 25, 1945.

In 1912, native teachers during the Dutch era founded a fighting organization called the Dutch East Indies Teachers Association (PGHB). PGHB’s own members are assistant teachers, village teachers, school principals and school inspectors. In general, they served in the Village School and the Number Two People’s School.

The main goal of this organization is to fight for the fate of its members, who of course, have different social status and educational background. This struggle is certainly not easy. Over time, new teacher organizations were born, such as the Auxiliary Teachers’ Association (PGB), Village Teachers’ Association (PGD), Ambachtsschool Teachers’ Association (PGAS), Normalschool Association (PNS), Hogere Kweekschool Bond (HKSB).

In addition, there are teacher organizations with a religious, national or other pattern, such as Christelijk Onderwijs Vereniging (COV), Katholieke Onderwijs Bond (KOB), Vereniging Van Mulo Leerkrachten (VVM), and Nederlands Indische Onderwijs Genootschap (NIOG) whose members are all teachers without differentiate between religious groups.

At that time, teachers in the ranks of the natives were well aware that they had to fight for equal rights and positions with teachers from the Dutch side. This step was successful, the HIS head, which had always been given to the Dutch, was now allowed to be held by native teachers.

In 1932, native teachers were determined to change the name of the Dutch East Indies Teachers’ Association (PGHB) to Indonesian Teachers’ Association (PGI), which of course surprised the Dutch because they did not like the word “Indonesia”. Because, considered to reflect the spirit of nationalism.

In fact, the organization was at its lowest point during the Japanese occupation when it banned all organizations, closed schools which made the Indonesian Teachers’ Association (PGI) unable to carry out its activities anymore. However, on 24-25 November 1945, they held the Indonesian Teachers’ Congress in Surakarta. In that congress, they agreed to erase all differences in graduation, work environment, regional environment, politics, religion and ethnicity.

Apart from that, the congress also agreed to establish the Association of Indonesian Teachers (PGRI) on November 25, 1945. In fact, through Presidential Decree No. 78 of 1994, the Indonesian government implemented and commemorated National Teacher’s Day on November 25 every year.

Lyrics of the Teacher’s Hymn

Blessed be
O you, mother and father, teacher.
Your name will always live
in my soul

I will engrave all your devotion
in my heart
as an inscription of my gratitude
for your dedication

Praise be to you, ladies and gentlemen,
your name will always live in my heart,
I will engrave all your dedication in my heart
as an inscription of my gratitude

For your service
You are like a lamp in the darkness
You are like a cooling dew in thirst
You are an unsung national hero

History of the Teacher’s Hymn

In the 1980s, Sartono composed the song “Teacher Hymn: Unsung Heroes” as an effort to appreciate teachers because they were considered to have contributed greatly to education in Indonesia. As reported by the book  Collection of National Compulsory Songs, Traditional & Popular Children (2017) by Hani Widiatmoko, Dicky Maulana, Sartono is a former music teacher at a private foundation school in Madiun City, East Java.

The man who was born in Madiun, May 29, 1936, studied music on his own without having had any education in music. However, in 1978, he was the only music teacher in the Madiun area who could read musical notes. Due to the limitations of musical instruments at that time, the Hymn Guru song was created by whistling while writing the notes down on paper.

The Teacher Hymn song is generally played when commemorating National Teacher’s Day on November 25, which is also the birth of the Indonesian Teachers’ Association (PGRI) on November 25, 1945.

Before becoming PGRI, native teachers during the Dutch era founded a fighting organization called the Dutch East Indies Teachers Association (PGHB). The members of PGHB are assistant teachers, village teachers, school principals, and school owners. In general, they work in village schools and public schools. The main objective of this organization is to fight for the fate of its members who have different social status and educational background.

In 1932, native teachers changed the name PGHB to the Association of Indonesian Teachers (PGI), which shocked the Dutch. Not only that, PGI was also inactive because Japan banned the activities of various organizations in Indonesia and closed schools. In the end, on 24-25 November 1945 the teachers held the Indonesian Teachers’ Congress in Surakarta, which was marked by the formation of the Indonesian Teachers Association (PGRI).

In this congress, PGRI members agreed to erase all differences in graduation, work environment, regional environment, politics, religion and ethnicity. National Teacher’s Day was decided in 1994 with the writing of a presidential decree, namely Presidential Decree No. 78 of 1994 and also written in Law no. 14 of 2005 concerning teachers and lecturers which stipulates that November 25 is National Teacher’s Day which is celebrated at the same time as PGRI’s birthday.

This song was composed by Sartono in the 1980s. Sartono himself is a former music teacher at a private foundation in Madiun City, East Java. Actually, Sartono himself never studied music formally, but he was the only music teacher who could read musical notes in his area. Due to the limitations of musical instruments at that time, the song Hymn Guru Sartono was composed by whistling while writing the notes down on paper.

Even though his income from his job as a teacher was meager, his passion for music made Sartono create several songs. Coinciding with the momentum of National Education Day in 1980, Sartono took part in a competition to compose songs about education. Of the hundreds of participants, the song “Teacher’s Hymn, Unsung Hero” was the winner. Apart from getting some money as the winner, Sartono along with a number of other model teachers throughout Indonesia were sent to Japan for a comparative study.

The Meaning of the Teacher’s Hymn

The song “Teacher’s Hymn” describes the important role of the teacher in educating and educating the nation’s children. In this song there are lyrics such as “You are a lamp in the dark, you are like cooling dew in thirst, you are a patriot, a national hero, unsung”. The lyrics describe a teacher as a light for his students who are thirsty for knowledge and full of ignorance. It is the teacher who delivers, directs, and gives views until we know where we are going to continue our journey.

The lyrics “Praise be to you, ladies and gentlemen teachers” can be interpreted as a teacher not only as an introduction to knowledge, but as an educator for his students, so that they can anchor themselves as moral individuals. In addition, this song also remembers what our teachers have remembered in helping us take steps, as in the lyrics “Your name will always live in my heart.” The advice they have given is able to guide us in reaching the pieces of the dream we have.

Even though we have been far apart from our teachers, they will always live in our hearts. In the end, the teacher’s services cannot be measured, as in the lyrics “I will engrave all your dedication in my heart, as an inscription of my gratitude for your service.” This is because the teacher is a form of national hero who does not take up weapons or join wars, but imparts knowledge to his students. That way, teachers are also said to be “unsung heroes.”

Being a teacher is certainly not easy. We not only prepare knowledge, but we must also prepare mentally and sincerely to teach. If Sinaumed’s is interested in becoming a teacher. Make sure Sinaumed’s has read a lot of books in addition to the information available at sinaumedia.com .

Lyrics and Chords of the Farmer’s Song – The song entitled Farmer’s Labor is usually sung in mass rallies demanding justice for the government. The song as a whole is meaningful as a protest song.

The song entitled Buruh Tani was actually composed by Safi’i Kemamang and popularized again by the punk band Marginal. Meanwhile, this song has become a kind of “compulsory anthem” in the demonstration activities of the Indonesian people, especially students.

So, here are the lyrics and chords for the Buruh Tani song!

Lyrics of Farm Workers by Marginal

Laborers, farmers, students, urban poor people

Unite for democracy

United in one voice

For the sake of a noble holy task

Tomorrow is ours

The creation of a prosperous society

Formation of social order

New Indonesia without New Order

Come on guys, let’s talk

In our hands we hold the direction of the nation

Come on guys, let’s sing

A song about liberation

Under a tyrannical regime

I follow this line

Millions of times down action

For me one step is certain

Millions of times down action

For me one step is certain

fighting blood

Here is our country

The rice field is spread out

The ocean is rich

Our country is fertile God

In this beautiful land

Millions of people covered in wounds

Skinny kids don’t go to school

Village youth not working

They are deprived of their rights

Evicted and hungry

Mother let go of our fighting blood

To liberate the people

They are deprived of their rights

Evicted and hungry

Mother let go of our fighting blood

We promise you

To you we are devoted

 

Chord Farmer’s Song by Marginal

Intros:

Dm Am G

Am-G-Am

Am

student farm laborers of the urban poor

Dm Am

unite for democracy

Dm Am

roared in one voice

G Am

for the sake of a noble holy task

Am

tomorrow is ours

Dm Am

creating a prosperous society

Dm Am

formation of a social order

G Am

New Indonesia without New Order

[Chorus]

G Am

come on guys let’s let us know

G Am

in our hands we hold the direction of the nation

G Am

come on guys let’s sing

G Am

a song about liberation

Am

under tyranny

Dm Am

follow this line

Dm Am

millions of times down action

G Am

one step for sure…

Am

Millions of times down action

Dm Am

For me one step is certain

Dm Am G Am

For me one step is certain

Am

Student farm workers of the urban poor

Dm Am

Unite for democracy

Dm Am

Uproar in one sound

G Am

For the sake of a noble holy task

Am

Tomorrow is ours

Dm Am

The creation of a prosperous society

Dm Am

Formation of social order

G Am

New Indonesia without New Order

[Bridge]

Am

Come on guys, let’s talk

Dm Am

In our hands we hold the direction of the nation

Dm Am

Come on guys, let’s sing

G Am

A song about freedom

Am

Under tyrannical rule

Dm Am

Follow this line

Dm Am

For me one step is certain

Am

Millions of times down action

Dm Am

For me one step is certain

Dm Am G Am

For me one step is certain

About the Peasant Labor Song

The song, entitled Farmer Laborer, was composed in 1996 by Safi’i Kemamang, a figure from the People’s Democratic Party (PRD) in East Java, which moved underground. This song was created to encourage those who were struggling in the New Order regime.

According to Safi’i, the Farmer’s song can also become a song of unity between workers, farmers, students, and the urban poor in their efforts to fight against the New Order. This is because they are the people who feel the most bitterness from all the policies of the New Order.

This song is also often known as a song with the title “Liberation”. Later, the song Buruh Tani was popularized again by the punk group Marginal. Marginal is an indie band with a punk wing.

This song has even more fighting spirit when there was a large-scale demonstration on October 6, 2020. The agenda for the demonstration is to reject the Job Creation Law or the Omnibus Law . The Farmer’s Song was sung together by the masses present at the action and fired up the enthusiasm of the thousands of demonstrators.

The demonstration demanding the Job Creation Law or the Omnibus Law took place in an orderly manner, not as chaotic as usual demonstrations. Accompanied by loudspeakers from the command car, the demonstration participants sang the Peasant Workers ‘ song together.

Seeing from the lyrics of the song, it has an indirect meaning regarding the hopes of workers, farmers, students, to the urban poor who want a democratic system in Indonesia. For some students, this song actually became an encouragement in their efforts to fight against government policies that were detrimental to people’s rights.

Marginal Band Brief Biography

The Marginal band is a punk indie band that started its career in 1997. This band consists of Romi Jahat as vocalist , Mike as guitarist , Bob as bassist and Steven as drummer .

This music group is trying to convey a message of rejection and hope in everyday life, especially to government policies. The figure of Marsinah is an inspirational figure from the formation of this Marginal music group, as well as their 3rd album entitled “Marsinah” accompanied by a cover of Marsinah’s face in black and white format.

The songs sung by this band indirectly convey a message about how the people are suffering because of government policies.

Short Biography of Safi’i Kemamang

Safi’i Kemamang is a man who was born on June 5, 1976 in Lamongan, East Java. He is the creator of the song Buruh Tani which he actually titled Liberation .

The song, which is well known to the public under the title Buruh Tani, was composed when Safi’i joined the People’s Democratic Party (PRD) in the East Java region and was still moving underground.

During this period, during the New Order era, there were many large-scale democratic actions by the people. Safi’i thought about what to do to unite the people. Therefore, a song called Peasant Labor or Liberation was created to unite workers, farmers, students, and the poor in fighting the New Order regime.

So, those are the lyrics and chords of the Buruh Tani song along with important things related to the song. Has You ever sung the Buruh Tani song ?

The Lorentz force was discovered by Herdik Anton Lorentz in 1853-1928. He is a scientist from the Netherlands who greatly contributed in the field of physics. The Lorentz force is actually a combination of electric and magnetic forces in an electromagnetic field.

The Lorentz force can arise due to the presence of an electric charge in a magnetic field. The Lorentz force has magnitude and also has direction. The direction of the Lorentz force uses the right-hand rule and is always perpendicular to the direction of the existing electric current and magnetic induction.

Biographies Hendrik Antoon Lorentz

Henry Anthony Lorentz.

The Lorentz force was discovered by Hendrik Anton Lorentz (1853-1928). He was a Dutch physicist who won the Nobel Prize for Physics together with Pieter Zeeman in 1902. He was born in Arnhem, Netherlands on July 18, 1853. As an adult, he studied at Leiden University.

Subsequently, at the age of 19 he returned to Arnhem and taught at one of the secondary schools there. While teaching, he prepared a doctoral thesis which expanded on James Clerk Maxwell’s theory of the electromagnet, which included details of the reflection and refraction of light.

In 1878, he became professor of theoretical physics at Leyden which was his first place of work. He lived there for 34 years, then moved to Haarlem. Lorentz continued his work to simplify Maxwell’s theory and introduce the idea that electromagnetic fields are generated by electric charges at the atomic level. He proposed that the emission of light by atoms and various optical phenomena could be traced to the motion and energy interactions of atoms.

In 1896, one of his students named Pieter Zeeman found that the spectral lines of atoms in a magnetic field split into several components with slightly different frequencies. This justified Lorentz’s work, for which they were both awarded the Nobel Prize in 1902.

In 1895, Lorentz devised a set of equations which transformed the electromagnetic quantity from one reference frame to another, moving relative to the first, although the importance of these discoveries was realized only 10 years later when Albert Einstein proposed his special theory of relativity.

Lorentz (and the Irish physicist GF Fitzgerald independently) proposed that the negative result of the Michelson-Morley experiment could be understood if the length in the direction of motion relative to the observer contracts. Subsequent experiments showed that although there was shrinkage, it was not due to any apparent cause in the results of Michelson and Edward Morley. The reason for this is that there is no “ether” that acts as a universal frame of reference.

Definition of Lorentz force

What is the Lorentz force? The Lorentz force is a force that comes from a combination of two forces. The two forces are the magnetic force and the electric force present in an electromagnetic field. This force comes from an electric charge that can move if an electric current is present in a magnetic field B. The presence of an electric force cannot be separated from an inventor.

The person who is credited with discovering this force is Hendrik Antoon Lorentz from 1853 to 1928. He is a physicist from the Netherlands and has won the Nobel Prize in Physics together with a man named Pieter Zeeman in 1902.

The name Hendrik Antoon Lorentz was later immortalized as a style he discovered and people know this style as the Lorentz style until now. From this style, electric motors are also found which function to drive tools such as blenders, fans, machines, washing machines, and so on.

Lorentz force formula

When there is a wire that is energized by an electric current of I and the wire is placed in the middle of a magnetic field, then a magnetic force will arise on the wire. By combining the magnetic force with the electric current, we can calculate how much force is on the wire, so the following formula appears:

F _Lorentz  = BI l sin α

Information:
Florentz = Lorenz force B = strong magnetic field current (Tesla) I = strong current flowing in the wire (amperes) _I = length of wire (m) α = angle formed from B and I

Determining the Direction of the Lorentz Force

1. Lorentz force on a current-carrying wire

If the direction of the electric current is perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic field, the maximum magnetic force will occur (sin 90º = 1). In other words, so that the magnetic force can be maximally formed, the magnetic field must be conditioned perpendicular to the flowing electric current.

Meanwhile, determining the direction of the Lorentz force can be through the hand rule as shown below:

For the first Lorentz style right hand rule using three fingers, namely:

• Thumb = direction of electric current (I).
• Index finger = magnetic field direction (B).
• Middle finger = the direction of the Lorentz force (F).

For the second hand rule, use the open palm of the right hand and it is easier to use, especially if the angle is α≠90º, namely:

• Thumb = direction of electric current (I).
• The other four fingers = the direction of the magnetic field (B).
• Palm = direction of Lorentz force (F).

It should be noted that the magnitude of the angle α does not affect the direction of the magnetic force. This is because the direction of the force is perpendicular to the direction of the electric current and magnetic field.

2. Lorentz Forces in Parallel Wires Carrying Electric Current

When there are two wires that have a length of I and then carry an electric current of I and the two wires are placed in a magnetic field of magnitude B, a magnetic force will occur. The electric force that occurs is both attractive and repulsive depending on the direction of the electric current coming from each wire.

When the two wires have the same current direction or the same direction, there will be an attractive force. Conversely, when the two wires have opposite current directions, a repulsive or opposing force will arise.

Regarding the magnitude of the attractive and opposing or repulsive forces on the two wires, you can use the formula:

Description:
F ₁ = attractive or repulsive force on wire 1 (newtons).
F ₂ = force of attraction or repulsion in wire 2 (newtons).
I ₁ = strong current flowing at current 1 (amperes).
I ₂ = strong current flowing at current 2 (amperes).
µ ₀ = vacuum permeability.
I = wire length (meters).
α = distance between the two wires (meters).

3. Lorentz Force of Charge Moving in a Magnetic Field

When there is an electric charge q moving with speed v in a magnetic field B, a magnetic force will occur and it can be calculated by the formula:

F _Lorentz = qvB x sin α

Note:
q = electric charge (coloumb).
v = speed of movement (m/s).
B = magnetic field (tesla).
α = angle formed by B and v.

For the direction of the Lorentz force, this one is perpendicular to the direction in the magnetic field and the direction of the object’s velocity. The direction of this force will depend on the charge of the particle. Look at the picture below, according to the right-hand rule, if charge q has a positive value, then the direction of v will be parallel to I. Meanwhile, if charge q is negative, v will be opposite to I.

Then if the direction in the magnetic field is perpendicular to the direction of the velocity of the electrically charged particles, it causes a circular path, so that the particles will experience a centripetal force that is equal in magnitude to the magnetic force.

F_Lorentz = Fsentripetal

qvB = mv² / R

That way, we can find the radius of the particle’s circular path using the formula:

R = mv/qvB

Factors Affecting the Lorentz Force

You need to know that there are several factors that affect the electric force, including:

• Large electric current (I).
• Magnetic field strength (B).
• The length of the conveyor (I).

Application in Everyday Life

Information that is no less important is what are the benefits that we will get from applying the Lorentz force? One of the most pronounced benefits of applying this style is the electric motor. By flowing electricity into a coil in a magnetic field, a magnetic force can be generated in the form of the rotation of an electric motor used to drive the shaft, so that it can be used for various needs.

Apart from electric motors, we can also see the application of the Lorentz force in linear motors, railguns, electric generators, loudspeakers, linear alternatives, and many others.

Applications of the Lorentz force include the following:

• Lorentz force velocimetry (LFV) is a non-contact electromagnetic flow measurement technique. Lorentz force velocimetry is well suited for velocity measurements of molten metals (such as steel or aluminum) and is currently being developed for metallurgical applications.
• An electric motor is a device for converting electrical energy into mechanical energy. Electric motors are classified into two types, namely AC (alternating current) electric motors and DC (direct current) electric motors. Electric motors can be found in household appliances such as fans, washing machines, refrigerators, hair dryers and water pumps.
• Pendorong magnetoplasmadynamic.
• Electric generator.

Example Questions and Discussion

The Lorentz force is a force that arises due to the presence of an electric current (moving electric charge) in a magnetic field. For the direction of the Lorentz service, it is always perpendicular to the direction of the electric current (I) and the existing magnetic induction (B).

Before heading to the example of the Lorentz force problem, you must go back to studying the following formulas.

Lorentz Force Formula of a Wire Moving in a Magnetic Field :

 

Information:

• l = wire length (m).
• I = strong current flowing in the wire (amperes).
• B = magnetic field strength (tesla).
• α = angle formed by B and I.

The Lorentz Force Formula for Electric Charges Moving in a Magnetic Field:

Information:

• q = electric charge (coloumb).
• v = speed of movement of electric charge (m/s).
• B = magnetic field strength (tesla).
• α = angle formed by B and v.

Lorentz force formula for two parallel current-carrying wires:

Information:

• F ₁ = pull-attract or push-push force on wire 1 (newton).
• F ₂ = pull-attract or push-push force in wire 2 (newton).
• I ₁ = strong current flowing in wire 1 (amperes).
• I ₂ = strong current flowing in wire 2 (amperes).
• µ ₀  is the vacuum permeability 
• l = wire length (m).
• α = distance between the two wires (m).

Example Question 1

Look at the following picture!

If an electric current I flows through wire AB, the direction of the magnetic force experienced by wire AB is…
A. to the
left B. to the
left C. to the right
D. perpendicular to the plane of the paper
E. perpendicular to the outside of the paper

Discussion:
Using the right hand rule, the current strength is indicated as the thumb, so the forefinger (magnetic field) will go out of the plane and based on the nature of the Lorentz force it will be perpendicular.

Answer: E. perpendicular to the surface of the paper.

Example Problem 2

A straight, current-carrying wire pointing east is placed in a magnetic field pointing north. In the conductor there will be a Lorentz force whose direction is ….
A. Northeast
B. Below
C. Up
D. West
E. South

Discussion:
To determine the direction of the Lorentz force we can use the right hand rule as follows.

Answer: D. West (perpendicular to B and I).

Example Problem 3

A wire with a length of 1 m has an electric current of 10 A. If the wire is placed in a 0.01 T magnetic field whose direction forms an angle of 30° to the direction of the current, the magnetic force experienced by the wire is … A. 0.05 N B.
0.5
N
C. 2 N
D. 4 N
E. 8 N

Discussion:
It is known:
L = 1 m
I = 10 AB
= 0.01 T
α = 30°

Dimensions: F = ?
Answer:
F = B . HE . L sin α
F = 0.01 T 10 A 1 m without 30°
F = 0.05 N

So, the magnetic force experienced by the wire is 0.05 N.

Example Problem 4

A straight wire with a current of 4 A is in a 1 T magnetic field that is perpendicular to the current. If the Lorentz force acting on the wire is 4 N, then the length of the wire is…

Discussion:
It is known:
L = 2 m
I = 20 AB
= 0.02 T
α = 30

Asked: F?
Answer:
F = BILsin30
F = 0.02.20.2.sin30
F = 0.4 N

So, the Lorentz force on the wire is 0.4 newtons.

Example Problem 5

An electron moving with a speed of 6000 m/s enters a magnetic field of 2000 T. If the direction of the velocity and the magnetic field forms an angle of 30 degrees, then the Lorentz force experienced by the electron is….

Discussion:
Given:
q = -1.6×10 ^-19  C (electron charge)
v = 6000 m/s
B = 2000 T
α = 30 degrees

Asked: F?
Answer:
F = qvBsin30
F = 1.6×10 ^-19 .6000.2000.1/2
F = 9.6 x 10 ^-13  N

So, the Lorentz force experienced by the electron is 9.6 x 10 ^-13  Newton.

 

Example Problem 7

A wire that is 500 cm long is in a magnetic field of strength 20 T. If the electric current flowing in the wire is 2 A, then what is the Lorentz force acting on the wire?

Discussion:
Known:
L = 500 cm = 0.5 m
B = 20 T
I = 2 A

Asked: How much Lorentz force does work on the wire?

Jawab:
F = BIL
= 20 T(2 A)(5 m)
= 200 N

The Lorentz force acting on the wire is 200 N.

Example Problem 8

A wire carrying an electric current of 20 A with an upward direction is in a magnetic field of 0.5 T by forming an angle of 30 ^o to the wire. If the length of the wire is 20 meters, how much Lorentz force will the wire experience?

 

 

Closing

Lorentz force materials are notoriously complicated materials, but they are actually quite easy to solve. The main concept is that you have to understand the direction of the variables that work, such as the direction of the electric current, the direction of the magnetic field and the direction of the Lorentz force itself.

 

 

Lordosis is – The human body is a series of other parts that unite with each other in such a way. These parts have their own functions, such as the eyes to see, the heart to pump blood, the lungs to breathe, or the backbone to maintain body structure.

Yes, the human spine is deliberately designed with a slightly curved shape in the upper, lower back and neck so that it can function optimally. Namely to keep the head and pelvis aligned, support the head area, maintain body structure, and make it easier for us to move or bend.

If this shape changes for one reason or another, the function of the spine will be disrupted and we will feel certain symptoms depending on the change in the shape of the spine.

One of the spinal disorders is lordosis. This is a disorder that occurs when the spine in the lower back bends too much forward. In this article we will discuss further about lordosis. Listen carefully, okay!

Meaning of Lordosis

In short, lordosis is a spinal disorder that occurs when the lower part of the spine is too curved inward. This condition is also known as swayback. 

This excessive curvature can make the abdominal area protrude forward because it is pushed by the lower spine which is curved too inward. In addition, the hip area also protrudes slightly up and back.

The difference between Lordosis, Kyphosis and Scoliosis

Apart from lordosis, there are other spinal disorders that are often discussed, namely kyphosis and scoliosis. What’s the difference between the three? The main difference lies in the position of the bending of the bones.

If the spine bends forward, it is called lordosis. Meanwhile, if it bends backwards, it is called kyphosis. And if it bends to the left or right, it is called scoliosis.

Find other bone diseases that you shouldn’t underestimate in the book Bone Disease Not Only Osteoporosis: Recognize & Prevent 45 Bone Diseases from AZ compiled by Prieharti and Dr. Yekti Mumpuni.

There are 45 types of bone disease discussed in this 184-page book. The writing style and use of simple language make this book easy to understand, even for ordinary readers.

Causes of Lordosis

Generally, doctors cannot know exactly what causes a patient to have lordosis. However, in some cases, lordosis can occur due to:

1. Obesity

Obesity or being overweight has the potential to affect posture and put excessive pressure on the spine. Therefore, obese people are more at risk of experiencing lordosis.

2. Osteoporosis

Osteoporosis can cause the lower spine to become porous and bend more easily when you’re carrying your weight. Usually lordosis due to osteoporosis is experienced by people who are elderly.

3. Pregnancy

Like obesity, pregnancy can also affect body posture. Including making the lower spine too curved inward. Even so, lordosis caused by pregnancy will heal by itself after the baby is born.

4. Spondylolisthesis

Spondylolisthesis is a condition where the spine is misaligned because it shifts from its place. This condition has the potential to cause the lower spine to curve inward more easily.

5. Bad posture

Poor posture when sitting or lifting weights can also increase the risk of developing lordosis.

6. Injury, accident, or fall

Lordosis can also be caused by sports injuries, accidents or falls from high places. Usually lordosis occurs due to a broken spine.

7. Neuromuscular disorders

Neuromuscular disorders or impaired nerve and muscle function can also cause lordosis. For example, such as muscular dystrophy, cerebral palsy, or something else.

8. Achondroplasia

The last cause is Achondroplasia or impaired bone growth so that the sufferer looks stunted and his body is disproportionate.

Types of lordosis

Health experts divide lordosis into five types, namely postural lordosis, congenital lordosis, neuromuscular lordosis, and postoperative hyperlordosis laminectomy. Here’s a brief explanation for each type so you understand again:

1. Postural lordosis

Postural lordosis is a spinal deformity that often results from being overweight, especially if the abdominal and lumbar areas are more forward. In addition, it can also occur when the back muscles and abdominal muscles are weak so they are unable to properly support the spine.

2. Congenital lordosis or trauma

Congenital lordosis is a condition when the spine of the fetus in the womb develops imperfectly. In the end, his spine became deformed and weak enough to bend excessively.

Not only disabled since infancy, lordosis can also be triggered by injuries during sports, accidents, or falls from high places.

3. Neuromuscular lordosis

This is a type of bone disorder caused by impaired muscle function in the body. For example, such as cerebral palsy or muscular dystrophy.

4. Lordosis secondary to hip flexion contracture

This type of lordosis is generally caused by permanent shortening of the joints and muscles in the hip joint (contractures). This can happen due to injury, infection, or disturbed muscle balance.

5. Postoperative hyperlordosis laminectomy

This last type of lordosis often occurs after laminectomy surgery. Laminectomy is a surgical removal of the spine to gain access to the spinal cord or nerve roots.

This surgery can make the spine unstable and the lower back too curved (hyperlordotic).

Symptoms of Lordosis

One of the most common symptoms of lordosis is muscle pain that occurs when the spine curves abnormally. As a result, the muscles are pulled in different directions and become more tense. In addition, there are several other symptoms that may be felt by patients with lordosis, including:

• Movement around the neck or back becomes limited
• Buttocks appear more prominent
• Numb
• Body feels weak
• Difficulty controlling urination and bowel movements
• pins and needles
• The upper body to the stomach is more forward
• When viewed from the side, you can see an indentation in the abdominal area up to the waist
• It is difficult to lie on your back while sleeping because the back area cannot attach to the floor perfectly due to being blocked by the buttocks.

Keep in mind, the symptoms of lordosis between one patient and another are different. However, if Sinaumed’s starts to feel physical symptoms accompanied by changes in the appearance of the spine, it is highly recommended to immediately see a doctor. Because the sooner it is detected, the treatment will be easier.

Procedure for Diagnosis and Treatment of Lordosis

Sometimes we are lazy or afraid to go to the doctor because we don’t know what medical procedures the doctor will do. So, to make Sinaumed’s bolder, here is information about the procedure for the diagnosis and treatment of lordosis that will be carried out by the doctor:

1. Physical check

Usually the doctor will start by asking what symptoms you are feeling and also check your body’s medical history. In addition, the doctor may also ask Sinaumed’s to make several movements, such as sitting, standing, sleeping on his back, and bending to observe an abnormal back environment.

2. CT scan and CAT tests

To see an image of the spine in your body, the doctor will perform an imaging test procedure using a combination of X-rays and computer technology. The results of this procedure are quite detailed, so doctors can get an overview of the fat, muscles, and also the organs around the spine.

3.MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)

An MRI test is performed by combining high-powered magnets, radio frequency, and a computer to see detailed images of the spine in your body.

4. X-rays

An X-ray test is performed using a beam of electromagnetic energy to capture detailed images of the bones. Doctors usually use this test to determine the degree of curvature of the spine.

5. Bone scan test

A bone scan test is carried out to see what is causing the pain in your back, detect other bone diseases that may occur, and evaluate changes in the joints.

6. Blood test

Blood tests are not actually part of the standard diagnostic tests for lordosis. However, doctors sometimes do this test to identify certain metabolic problems that may be associated with abnormal body curvature.

How to Prevent Lordosis

Actually there is no single way that is proven to prevent lordosis disease. However, according to a study conducted in 2013 and published in the European Spine Journal, standing for too long can change the curvature of the spine. While sitting can reduce changes in the curve of the lumbar curve.

Still according to the study, you can actually prevent the possibility of abnormal curvature of the lumbar by resting while sitting as often as possible when standing for a long time.

How to Treat Lordosis

How to deal with lordosis varies greatly, depending on age, severity of spinal conditions, degree of curvature, stage of growth, and also the underlying cause.

If the lordosis that you have is not related to spondylolisthesis (the spine is misaligned because it shifts from its place), muscular dystrophy, or achondroplasia (impaired bone growth so that the sufferer looks stunted and his body is disproportionate), then treatment usually focuses on the symptoms of your lordosis. feel.

In this case, the treatment for lordosis that is often recommended by doctors is:

1. Take pain relievers

Tingling, pain, or numbness can generally be relieved by taking pain relievers such as ibuprofen or acetaminophen.

2. Specific physical therapy for lordosis

Specific physical therapy for lordosis sufferers is usually in the form of exercise. The goal is to reduce pain, increase physical function, and also develop the muscles in the back so they can better support the spine.

Several sports options that can be chosen for the healing process of lordosis include gymnastics, yoga, and stretching exercises. This exercise must be done regularly accompanied by supervision from a doctor or therapist.

3. Bracing therapy

Bracing is a device that is placed on the back of a lordosis sufferer. Later this tool will help stabilize the back and prevent the spine from curving excessively,

The use of this tool will be recommended if the spine is curved more than 30 degrees.

4. Spinal surgery

If the three previous ways of treating lordosis are considered ineffective, the doctor will usually propose surgery. This means, the operation will only be performed when the lordosis is considered very severe.

The goal of this spinal surgery is to restore a spine that is too curved forward.

However, if the lordosis is associated with other health conditions such as osteoporosis, treatment will also focus on treating this disease. So it is likely that the doctor will prescribe drugs that can reduce bone loss.

5. Home treatment for lordosis

Apart from doctor’s treatment, the lordosis healing process must also be supported by lifestyle changes. For example, you have to wear bracing regularly as recommended by your doctor or exercise must be according to the schedule given by your doctor.

In addition, as long as you are taking drugs, you must stop smoking and drinking alcohol. The problem is that cigarettes contain chemicals that can reduce overall health. Meanwhile, alcoholic beverages can interfere with the performance of the drugs you are already taking.

Lordosis is also closely related to the activities you do. Therefore, make sure to always stand, sit, and walk with good and correct posture.

Then, avoid activities that have the potential to put heavy pressure on the lower spine, such as standing too long or lifting heavy objects.

In addition, launching from tempo.co, the following exercises can help the healing process of lordosis:

 

• Hip Flexor Stretch

medicalnewstoday.com

The Hip Flexor Stretch is performed in a kneeling position on a soft surface in the following steps:

1. Place your right foot in front of your body so that your knee can bend at a 9 degree angle, the position of your right knee is right above your right leg.
2. After that, pull your shoulders down and back without arching your back. Then keep your pelvis and spine stable and neutral.
3. Next lean forward onto your right hip while keeping your left knee on the ground and with your pelvis facing forward
4. Hold this stretch for 30 seconds to 45 seconds, then repeat 2-5 times for each hip. When it starts to feel comfortable, you can lean further into your hips to deepen the stretch.

 

• Cat-Cow Pose

Cow cat pose can be started by placing your hands and knees on the floor or a soft surface, then do the steps below:

1. Place your knees under your hips the same width as your hips, then tuck your toes in.
2. Place your hands directly under your shoulders while facing forward and shoulder-width apart.
3. Use your abdominal muscles to move your spine into a neutral position.
4. As you exhale, slowly arch your spine toward the ceiling. Let your head fall down. Hold this position for 10 to 15 seconds.
5. Inhale and relax your spine. After that, pull the shoulder blades back. Hold this position for 10 to 15 seconds.
6. Finally, return the spine to a neutral position.

• Supine Curvature

Supine bends can be done by following the steps below:

1. Get into a lying position on your back with your knees bent and your feet flat on the floor, about 1 inch from your buttocks
2. Then extend your arms to your sides to shoulder height
3. Take a deep breath and then let your shoulders relax
4. Pull your shoulders down and back without arching your back. Hold this position throughout the exercise.
5. Do gentle Kegel exercises, contracting the pelvic floor as if you were trying to stop urinating
6. Draw your belly button toward your lower back without widening your ribs or hips
7. Do Kegels while pulling your stomach in, repeat this step while breathing normally.

Author: Gilang Oktaviana Putra

 

Source:

• https://www.siloamhospitals.com/formasi-siloam/artikel/apa-itu-lordosis
• https://www.halodoc.com/artikel/this-what-dimaksud-lordosis-dan-type-types
• https://hellosehat.com/muskuloskeletal/tulang-sendi-lainnya/lordosis/
• https://www.alodokter.com/memahami-Cause-symptoms-and-how-to-overcome-lordosis
• https://gaya.tempo.co/read/1630716/3-movement-peregran-yang-effect-for-penderita-lordosis

Technological developments cannot be separated from electronic systems, especially digital electronics. Digital electronics are composed of logic gates. Then the logic gate will perform digital operations. Want to know about what are logic gates to logic gate symbols? This article will discuss about logic gates, Sinaumed’s, read this article to the end, OK?

Definition of Logic Gates

It is common that every science will always develop. Likewise with the science of electronics which is always experiencing development. Electronics itself can be interpreted as an electronic system that can be connected with a digital signal. Digital electronics originates from Boolean algebra and is used in many devices, such as telephones, computers, and so on.

Basically a digital signal has disjointed properties. In addition, this digital signal is usually denoted by an algebraic notation of 1 and 0. Notation 1 symbolizes the occurrence of a digital signal on an object. While the notation 0 symbolizes no relationship to an object.

Digital electronics is also known as another designation, namely digital circuits. Compiler of digital circuits are called logic gates. As the name implies, logic gates carry out logical operations. Usually logic gates perform logic operations on one or more inputs and produce a single output.

A logic gate is a digital electronics constructor in which every circuit in a logic gate works using the principles of Boolean algebra. Basically in electronics, an input and an output are built by what is called a voltage or current. This voltage is usually associated with a switch.

Therefore, logic gates can be thought of as various switches that implement Boolean algebra in electronic systems. With a switch, certain electronic items can be used properly. This is because a logical operation on one or more logical inputs will produce a solitary logic output .

The logic gate has several parts, namely resistors, transistors, and diodes. The three parts will perform simple operations or complex operations by simply combining several logic gates.

In the logic gate there is a section called an integrated circuit (IC). This IC has a function to limit the maximum number of logic gates. Prior to the development of integrated circuits (ICs), the number of logic gates required in digital electronics was minimal.

Each logic gate operation will be represented using a truth table. In the truth table, the number “1” indicates that the value is true (true) and the number “0” is worth false (false).

As technology systems develop, electronic systems will also develop. For those of you who really want to study electronics, especially digital electronics, you can learn it through the Electronics and Embedded Systems books .

Electronic Books and Embedded Systems contain digital circuits and ICs and USB port-based computer Op-amp Interfacing, Embedded Systems, and many more. What’s more, this book is perfect for high school/vocational school students, students, experts, and researchers because the discussion on electronics is very easy to understand. So, don’t hesitate to buy this book, it’s very easy, just click the “buy book” button.

Types of Logic Gates

The types of logic gates can be said to be the workings of the logic gates themselves. Logic gates have seven types of ways of working, namely AND logic gates, OR logic gates, NAND logic gates, NOR logic gates, X-OR (Exclusive OR) logic gates, and X-Nor logic gates (executive NOR) and NOT logic gates.

1. Logic AND Gate

AND logic gate is a logic gate that has two or more inputs and has one output. In the AND logic gate, the logic input is high if all of the logic outputs are also high. Vice versa, if the logic input is low, then the logic output will be low. You can find this logic gate in one of the electrical components, namely IC 7208.

A	B	Y
0	0	0
0	1	0
1	0	0
1	1	1

As previously said that every logic gate must have a truth table. The truth table shows that the logic gate can be activated or not. Therefore, based on the truth table above, it can be said that every output in the form of a number 0 means the AND logic gate cannot be activated.

From the truth table it can also be concluded that logic gates can only occur if the inputs are both “1”. If the input is the numbers “0” and “0”, the AND logic gate cannot be activated and if the input is the numbers “1” and “0”, the logic gate cannot be activated either.

2. Logic OR gate

The OR logic gate is a very simple logic gate because it only uses resistors and transistors. The workings of the OR logic gate are two electrical power inputs. If one of the inputs is activated, the output will also be active. The OR logic gate can be found in the electrical components of the IC 7432.

A	B	Y
0	0	0
0	1	1
1	0	1
1	1	1

The logic OR truth table above explains that every two inputs that have the number “1” will produce the output number “1” as well. The number “1” indicates that the OR logic gate is correct and can be activated.

However, the OR gate becomes inactive when one of its inputs is the number “0”. In other words, the number “0” on the logic OR gate will produce an inactive or incorrect output.

3. NAND Logic Gates

The NAND logic gate is a combination of AND logic gates and NOT logic gates. From the two combinations of logic, it can be read as NOT AND or can be abbreviated as NAND. NAND logic gates can be found in the electronic components of the IC 7400.

A	B	Y
0	0	1
0	1	1
1	0	1
1	1	0

The truth table of the NAND logic gate explains that the input of the number “1” with the number “1” will produce an output of “0”. While entering the number “0” with the number “0” will produce the output number “1”.

From the truth table of the NAND logic gate above, it can be said that each output is the opposite of the output of the AND logic gate. Therefore, the NAND logic gate can be said to be the output of the logic gate of the AND logic gate which is inverted or negated.

4. Logic NOR Gate

The NOR logic gate is a combined logic gate of the OR logic gate and the NOT logic gate. You can find the NOR logic gate in an electrical component called IC 7436.

A	B	Y
0	0	1
0	1	0
1	0	0
1	1	0

Based on the truth table above, the NOR logic gate has two inputs and one output. Input in the form of the number “0” meets the number “0” will produce the number “1”. While the number “1” meets the number “1” will produce the output number “0”.

When viewed from the truth table, the output of the NOR logic gate is the opposite of the output from the OR logic gate. Therefore, the NOR logic gate can be said to be the output of an inverted OR logic gate.

5. XOR Logic Gate

The XOR gate is a combination of the NOT, AND, and OR gates. Apart from these three combinations, the XOR logic gate can also use a combination of other logic gates. Because it can be joined by many logic gates, the XOR logic gate is also called an exclusive gate. The XOR gate can be found in the electronic components of the IC 7486.

A	B	Y
0	0	0
0	1	1
1	0	1
1	1	0

The XOR logic gate has a truth table which produces two “1” outputs and two “0” outputs. If the input is the same number, it will produce “0”. Meanwhile, if the input is a different number, the output will be “1”.

Therefore, the XOR logic gate will issue a logic low if the two inputs have the same characteristics. Meanwhile, the XOR logic gate will output a logic high if the two inputs have different characteristics.

6. XNOR Logic Gate

The XNOR logic gate is a combination of the XOR logic gate and the NOT logic gate. From this combination of logic, it is abbreviated as XNOR or Exclusive NOR. XNOR logic gates can be found in the electronic components of IC 7266.

A	B	Y
0	0	1
0	1	0
1	0	0
1	1	1

The truth table of the XNOR logic gate explains that the same input will result in the number “1” output. Meanwhile, different inputs will produce an output in the form of the number “0”. So, it can be said that the XNOR truth table is the opposite of the XOR table.

The XNOR logic gate will produce a logic high output if the two characteristics are the same. Meanwhile, the logic output will be low if the input at the XNOR logic gate has different characteristics.

7. NOT Logic Gate

A logic NOT gate is a logic gate that can perform logic nullification or logic state inversion operations. Because of that, this logic gate is called the NOT logic gate. The NOT logic gate is also known as an inverter circuit. The NOT logic gate can be found in the electrical components of the IC 7404.

A	Y
0	1
1	0

The truth table of the NOT logic gate illustrates that the input of the number “0” will produce the output of the number “1” and if the input is the number “1” it will produce the output number “1”.

Based on the truth table above, it can be said that the NOT logic gate operates in reverse. Although the operation is reversed, the binary shape and level in the input signal operation can be maintained properly.

Logic Gate Functions

The main function of a logic gate is to form a digital path so that all components can be connected to each other properly, so that an electronic device works well too. In addition, logic gates can function as a system to command or translate a device.

In general, logic gates can be found in electronic devices in the form of chips . Inside the chip there are many components. Therefore, to connect each of the components on the chip , logic gates are present. In fact, inside the chip there are thousands of logic gates. Even though there are millions of logic gates, each gate has a different function.

However, in simple logic IC components only a few logic gates are found. For example on the TTL 7408 logic IC components.

In the TTL 7408 logic IC network above there are several networks, such as a flip flop network, a security network using a secret key, a counter network, a multiplexer network, a demultiplexer network, an encoder network, and a decoder network.

Logic Gate Symbol

Each logic gate has its own symbols. Below will be explained the symbols of each type of logic gate.

1. Logic AND Gate

In the symbol above, the AND logic gate has two inputs on the left. Meanwhile, there is only one output on the AND logic gate, namely the one on the right side. The AND logic gate will issue a logic high if the input characteristics are high, then the output will be high too.

2. Logic OR gate

In the symbol above, the OR logic gate has two inputs and one output. The OR logic gate will issue a logic high if there is an input with high characteristics, then the output of the OR logic gate will also be high. However, if all inputs have low characteristics, then the resulting logic will be low as well.

3. NAND Logic Gates

In the symbol above, the NAND logic gate has two inputs. Meanwhile, there is only one output on the NAND logic gate. The logic gate will output a logic high if one or all of the inputs have a logic low characteristic.

4. Logic NOR Gate

In the symbol above, the NOR logic gate has two inputs and produces one output. The logic NOR gate will be logic high if the inputs are both logic low. In other words, if there is a logic high input, the output will be a logic low.

5. NOT Logic Gate

In the symbol above, the NOT logic gate has an input of one. While the output of the NOT logic gate is only one. Each NOT logic gate will produce an output that is inversely proportional. For example, if the input is logic high, then the output will be low, and vice versa.

6. XOR Logic Gate

In the symbol above, the XOR logic gate has two inputs and only has one output. The XOR logic gate will issue a logic high if each input consists of a logic high and a logic low. In other words, any input that has the same logic will output a logic low.

7. XNOR Logic Gate

In the symbol above, the XNOR logic gate has two inputs with only one output. The XNOR logic gate will go high if the inputs have the same characteristic or logic amount. For example, two inputs with a low logic output a logic high and two inputs with a logic high output a logic high as well.

George Boole

Boolean algebra is a logical way to compare numbers to make a decision of right or wrong, or 1 or 0. This algebra was invented by a British mathematician named George Boole. He was born in 1815 and died in 1864. George Boole expressed his algebraic concepts in a book entitled An Investigation of the Laws of Thought, on Which Are Founded the Mathematical Theories of Logic and Probabilities in 1854.

George Boole made algebra in the book with the aim of showing how complex reasoning works in humans, so that it can be described through mathematical and logical forms.

Conclusion

Logic gates are the building blocks of digital electronic devices. Each logic gate can be represented by a truth table. Each truth table uses the algebraic system of Boolean. Therefore, the truth table consists of only the numbers “1” and the numbers “0”. Electronic components that use logic gates are usually chips .

Local Wisdom is – Every country in the world has its own uniqueness, including Indonesia. Our country is so unique, so unique that if there is a nomination for the most unique country, then Indonesia will definitely be included as one of the nominees, maybe even emerge as the winner.

The uniqueness of Indonesia itself comes from customs, traditions and local wisdom that exist in Indonesia. Not just one, each region even has its own local wisdom.

Unfortunately, as time goes by, like most customs, traditions and culture, the local wisdom that exists in various regions is increasingly being eroded by the times. Instead of maintaining local wisdom that has been passed down from their ancestors, many young people replace it with views from outside which are not necessarily true or will only damage existing local wisdom.

Discussing local wisdom, you may have often heard this term. Whether it’s in books, television, or other electronic media. However, even though we often hear this term, in the end, many of us fail to understand and even confuse ourselves with the meaning of local wisdom itself.

Maybe you are also one of them? If so, here’s an explanation of local wisdom that Sinaumed’s needs to understand!

Definition of Local Wisdom

For those of you who are confused about the meaning of local wisdom or the notion of local wisdom, basically, something that has existed in an area for a long time and has been passed on from generation to generation.

Local wisdom is the view of life of a community in a certain area regarding the natural environment in which they live. This view of life is usually a view of life that has been deeply rooted in the beliefs of the people in the region for tens or even hundreds of years.

To maintain this local wisdom, parents from the previous and older generations will pass it on to their children and so on. Considering that local wisdom is an old thought and is decades old, local wisdom in an area is so attached and difficult to separate from the people who live in that area.

It’s sad, even though many parents still try to pass down local wisdom and outlook on life that they got from their ancestors, many young people actually consider local wisdom and traditional views of life that have been passed down from their ancestors as old views and thoughts that are no longer present. relevant to today’s modern times.

In fact, if you think about it again, everything that includes a view of life that is still traditional is not always bad and is not always a wrong view. In fact, it could be the other way around, because it is local wisdom that is maintained that makes a community so unique and different from people who live in other areas.

With local wisdom, the social order and the surrounding environment are sustainable and maintained. In addition, local wisdom is also a form of cultural wealth that must be firmly adhered to, especially by the younger generation to fight against globalization. That way the characteristics of the local community will never fade.

Moreover, local wisdom comes from our ancestors, who clearly understand everything more, especially related to that area. Apart from that, there is wisdom as well as good things in this local wisdom, but sometimes it is difficult for young people of the current generation to understand.

On the other hand, views that are too modern have the potential to be more damaging, especially to damage existing local wisdom. In fact, it does not rule out the possibility of destroying the existing culture, as well as destroying the surrounding environment.

Characteristics of Local Wisdom

After discussing the definition of local wisdom and knowing that local wisdom is the way of life of a community in a particular area regarding the natural environment in which they live, we will now discuss the characteristics of local wisdom. Here’s the full explanation!

1. Survive the Onslaught of Foreign Cultures

Each country, region or region has its own cultural customs. In contrast to our country which still maintains its culture and customs, most people from foreign countries out there have forgotten the customs and traditions of their ancestors.

They prefer a free life that is considered modern without being bound by advice, let alone old customs that are considered out of date.

Not only that, over time, foreign cultures also began to penetrate into various regions in Indonesia. In contrast, Indonesia has a lot of local wisdom which also contains very strong cultural values. Given the age of these cultural values ​​that have reached tens or hundreds of years, cultural values ​​in this local wisdom are highly trusted by the local community.

It is this strong belief that makes foreign cultures unable to easily enter and influence society. That way, the characteristics of the people of an area will be maintained properly.

2. Have the Ability to Accommodate Foreign Cultures

Avoiding foreign cultures that enter Indonesia is not an easy thing to do. Moreover, in this era of globalization, where everything can be connected easily and quickly. Cultures or trends from outside usually spread quickly through YouTube, television and social media.

It is because of the existence of this technology that foreign cultures can easily enter Indonesia. However, on the other hand, different from foreign cultures, local wisdom has a high degree of flexibility, so that it can be accommodated easily without destroying the beliefs of pre-existing local wisdom.

As a result, even if a foreign culture enters, this foreign culture will only become a temporary trend and will not replace the existing ancestral culture. Moreover, to destroy the trust that is tens to hundreds of years old.

3. Able to Integrate Foreign Cultures into Indigenous Culture in Indonesia

Another feature of local wisdom is that local wisdom has the ability not only to accommodate, but also to integrate incoming foreign cultures and integrate them well with existing cultures.

One of the Wonderful Indonesia videos that went viral a few months ago, for example. The video basically contains various traditional Indonesian cultures.

However, it’s then mixed in with some modern and foreign nuances like the EDM season. The result? The video looks very beautiful and is liked by many people, both foreigners and locals.

Another example is the construction of a building in Indonesia. It is not uncommon for architects to combine local culture by copying traditional building designs in Indonesia, then combining them with modern architecture.

The Grand Mosque of West Sumatra, in the heart of Padang, for example, the building imitates Minangkabau architecture, while the roof of the mosque is made like a Gadang house which is a traditional house from West Sumatra Province. Even so, it still looks more modern.

4. Capable of Controlling Incoming Foreign Cultures

As previously discussed, foreign culture is not something that can be easily rejected. However, on the other hand, local wisdom which is customary and indigenous culture is also deeply rooted, so it will be difficult to remove it from society.

Instead of disappearing and being replaced by foreign cultures, the belief in local wisdom is stronger, so that it makes us able to control incoming foreign cultures.

Not only that, we can also easily filter incoming foreign cultures. In other words, we determine which foreign cultures can be accepted in Indonesia, and which foreign cultures have bad values.

5. Giving Direction to the Development of Culture in Society

Local wisdom that has been trusted by the community for a long time will inevitably also affect the community in their daily lives. How could it not be, local wisdom that is decades old will eventually become a belief or guideline adopted by the local community.

As a result, when something happens, the community will use local wisdom as a benchmark before taking certain attitudes or actions. This habit also allows people in certain areas to develop their existing culture to be more focused than before. In other words, local wisdom has the characteristic of being able to provide direction for the local community.

Functions of Local Wisdom for Society

Existing local wisdom may have a very traditional character, but the existence of local wisdom is very important for the local community.

This is because, local wisdom can not only be used as a guide in acting or behaving, but also has certain functions. Here’s the function of local wisdom for the community!

1. Conservation of Existing Natural Resources

Local wisdom has a fairly broad scope. Not only customs, local wisdom is also a way of life of the community regarding the natural resources in their area. Existing local wisdom makes people more aware of the importance of the natural resources around them.

Instead of destroying it, local wisdom actually helps to encourage people in certain areas to do conservation so that the nature in which they live is maintained and not damaged.

For example, Acehnese fishermen have abstinence from going to sea, such as Friday or Idul Fitri. Apart from these two days, there are several other days which are also designated as forbidden days to go to sea.

This is done so that the fish have the opportunity to reproduce optimally. In addition, people who work as fishermen are also prohibited from catching fish with trawlers or bombs which can damage coral reefs and disrupt the ecosystem in the ocean.

2. Become Advice, Trust, and Abstinence

Our parents in the past certainly wanted the best for the lives of their future children and grandchildren. Unfortunately, they can’t live forever to keep their children and grandchildren living a good life.

Instead, our ancestors passed down various local wisdoms. With local wisdom attached to the community, it is not only a way of life that can be better. More than that, local wisdom also includes advice or tips, taboos that cannot be violated, as well as beliefs that are well maintained.

This old advice and advice is passed down, of course, to keep the life of each generation in a certain area running well.

3. Become the Main Characteristic of a Society

Existing local wisdom also includes customs and traditions. Even though it is often considered old-fashioned, it is these customs and customs that actually make an area unique and different from other regions in Indonesia.

With local wisdom, people will consider a set of traditions as something that should be done, because they are used to these customs and culture. In addition, the local community has also assumed that local wisdom is something that must be done in the area.

However, the story is different with tourists, and travelers who visit an area synonymous with local wisdom. The local wisdom that is reflected in these customs and culture cannot be found in other regions, because that is what makes tourists feel impressed with the region.

Just look at Bali, not only has beautiful nature, Bali also maintains the customs and culture that were passed down to them by their ancestors. As a result, it is this cultural heritage that makes Bali feel different, feel more special, feel more memorable compared to other places in the world.

Types of Local Wisdom

Local wisdom not only has characteristics and functions, but local wisdom also consists of two types, namely local wisdom that is tangible or known as tangible, and also local wisdom that is intangible or commonly called intangible . What does it mean? Come on, see the full explanation below!

1. Real or Tangible Local Wisdom

As the name implies, tangible local wisdom is local wisdom that we can see and touch in its form. Local wisdom in real or tangible form can be seen in various forms, both in textual forms such as procedures, rules, or value systems.

The next form is architectural, such as the various types of traditional houses that exist in every region in Indonesia. For example, the Gadang house in West Sumatra, the Joglo house from Central Java, or the stilt house from Jambi.

Other tangible forms of local wisdom are cultural heritage such as statues, various traditional art tools, traditional weapons passed down from generation to generation, to traditional textiles such as batik cloth from Java Island, and woven cloth from Sumba Island.

2. Intangible or Intangible Local Wisdom

In contrast to tangible local wisdom that can be seen and felt, this intangible local wisdom cannot be seen in real terms. However, even though it is not visible, this type of local wisdom can be heard because it is passed on verbally from parents to children, and the next generation.

Forms of intangible local wisdom include advice, songs, rhymes, or stories that contain life lessons for the next generation with the aim that the younger generation in the area does not commit bad actions that can harm themselves, the community, and the environment that becomes their home. and their source of livelihood.

An example is the belief from Papua known as Te Aro Neweak Lako. This belief is a form of local wisdom that is intangible or intangible, where people believe that nature is part of themselves.

Because nature is part of oneself, it must be guarded carefully. This includes not cutting down trees at will, which can make forests bare and cause various adverse disasters.

Of course nature can be used, but not over-exploited. With this belief, it’s no wonder that nature on Earth in Papua is still very well preserved.

Conclusion

Local wisdom may sometimes sound so old-fashioned. But without realizing it, it is local wisdom in intangible forms such as advice, rhymes, and stories that has been keeping us on the right path. Whereas local wisdom in concrete forms such as batik, handicrafts, architecture makes us so different from other regions.

These various forms of local wisdom unwittingly not only become beliefs that must be upheld, but also become the identity of a region. Without this identity, a region cannot be recognized, and remembered by outsiders.

 

Loan to Deposit Ratio (LDR) is often used as an indication in assessing a company’s financial health in carrying out various business activities. Check out a more complete explanation of the Loan to Deposit Ratio starting from the definition, formulas, factors, to the calculation function:

Definition of Loan to Deposit Ratio

The loan to deposit ratio is the loan to deposit ratio (LDR) which is often used in assessing bank liquidity by comparing total bank deposits and total bank loans in the same period. If the calculation of the Loan to deposit ratio (LDR) then shows a higher number ratio, then it will then lend all of its funds, so that the bank is relatively illiquid. Conversely, if the Loan to deposit ratio (LDR) results are high, the bank will then become liquid with excess capacity of funds ready to lend.

In a loan-to-deposit ratio calculation, the total bank loans and total deposits will then be subdivided into the same period. This ratio can then ultimately be used as an indication of the level of ability of a conventional bank in channeling funds originating from the public.

This distribution can also be done through various other banking products ranging from savings, time deposits, current accounts, time deposit certificates, and many more. Loan to deposit ratio (LDR) is also often used as an indication in assessing a company’s financial health in carrying out its various business activities.

By calculating the number of loan to deposit ratio (LDR) ratios, a bank’s ability to retain and acquire customers will be known. If a bank’s receipt of funds continues to increase, then new sources of funds and new customers will then be successfully obtained.

For investors, the Loan to deposit ratio (LDR) itself is very important as an indication used to find out whether this bank will then be operated properly. If a bank’s receipt of funds does not increase, then it will show a decrease, then the bank will only have a small amount of funds to credit.

In addition, the Loan to deposit ratio (LDR) also helps show how well a bank is in retaining and attracting customers. If within a certain period of time deposits in the bank soar and increase, new clients and money will then join. So the bank will have more money to lend, which also increases revenue.

Even though it is opposite in nature to a loan, intuition as an asset for the bank will then make it earn interest income from the loan. On the other hand, deposits are a bank liability because they have to pay interest on these deposits, even if only at low interest rates. Meanwhile, the Loan to deposit ratio (LDR) also has a complicated balance for a bank.

If banks make loans with too many deposits it can result in a downturn in economic terms. However, if banks lend too little, they may have an opportunity cost because the deposits on the balance sheet will not generate income. Banks that have the lowest LTD ratio may have lower interest income resulting in lower income as well.

Various factors alone can drive changes in the loan to deposit ratio. Economic conditions also affect the demand for loans and the amount of investor deposits. If consumers don’t have a job, they are unlikely to add to their savings. The central bank also regulates monetary policy by raising and lowering interest rates. If interest rates are too low, demand for loans may increase depending on economic conditions at the time.

In short, there are many external factors that will affect the loan to deposit ratio (LDR) at a bank. Please note that the ideal loan to deposit ratio is 80% -90%. A loan-to-deposit ratio of 100% then means the bank lends one dollar to the customer for every dollar it takes in deposits it receives. It also means the bank then has no significant reserves available for expected and unforeseen contingencies. Central bank regulations also factor into how banks are managed and impact their loan to deposit ratio.

LDR Calculation Formulas

The formula for calculating the Loan to deposit ratio (LDR) itself refers to PBI No. 17/11/PBI/2015. Loan to deposit ratio (LDR) as a comparison between total loans disbursed and total receipts. The following is the loan to deposit ratio formula:

LDR = (Loans Provided / Total Funds Received) x 100%

The credit used in the self-calculation formula includes the volume of credit extended to third parties (where credit to other banks is not included) then divided again by funds from the bank’s capital, these third party funds themselves include savings, demand deposits, and deposits (excluding inter-bank ), and securities issued. Meanwhile, the soundness level of a bank based on the Loan to deposit ratio (LDR) is as follows:

• The minimum loan to deposit ratio (LDR) allowed by BI is 78%.
• The maximum loan to deposit ratio (LDR) allowed by BI is 92%

A healthy loan to deposit ratio in general ranges from 78% -92%. However, under certain requirements the maximum loan to deposit ratio (LDR) limit was then relaxed to 94%, that is, if the gross credit NPL (Non Performing Loan) is met and the MSME NPL is below 5%. Meanwhile, according to central bank regulations, the tolerance limit for the loan to deposit ratio is 85% -110%.

Factors Affecting LDR

The cause of the rise and fall of the Loan to deposit ratio (LDR) can then come from the internal and external conditions of a banking company. Although in general, several factors then have the potential to change the Loan to deposit ratio (LDR), including:

• The economic conditions of the people also influence the demand for credit and the amount of deposits. If Third Party Funds slow down, there will be a tightening of the Loan to deposit ratio (LDR). The trend of lending will also slow down, and the bank’s loan to deposit ratio (LDR) will also loosen. This was also influenced by the rapid growth of third party funds. If there are ups and downs in interest rates as a monetary policy set by the central bank. This will then affect the Loan to deposit ratio (LDR), that is, if interest rates are low, the demand for credit may also increase.
• Capital Adequacy Ratio (CAR) as a ratio that shows how far all bank assets contain risk (loans, securities, investments, claims on other banks) are also financed from the bank’s own capital funds in addition to obtaining funds from sources outside the bank, such as loans (debt), community funds, and others (Dendawijaya 2009:121).
• The Capital Adequacy Ratio (CAR) ratio is also used to measure the adequacy in terms of capital owned by a bank in supporting assets or generating risks, for example, in loans. The higher the Capital Adequacy Ratio (CAR), the stronger the bank’s ability to bear various risks of productive assets and any risky loans. Furthermore, the factors that influence the Loan to Deposit Ratio (LDR) are the quality of earning assets as investment in securities, credit and other investments that have the potential to provide benefits to the bank.
• Earning asset quality includes research on asset quality based on allowance for impairment losses on earning assets (based on PBI Number 14/15/PBI/2012). With the amount of reserves formed then it shows that the quality of the bank’s productive assets has decreased so that revenue until finally received by the bank has decreased. Revenue itself also decreased causing a decrease in capital which had an impact on reducing the ability of banks to finance risky assets (credit).
• Operating costs to operating income (BOPO) with a comparison between operating costs and operating income in measuring the level of efficiency and the ability of banks to carry out their operations (Rivai, et al. 2007: 722). Based on this explanation, operational costs also have a negative effect on the loan to deposit ratio (LDR) because the smaller the BOPO, the more efficient the costs borne by the bank are in generating high income from credit (loans).
• The net open position also limits the bank’s risk in foreign currency transactions, thus affecting the fluctuating exchange rates. The net open position of a bank is also used in limiting speculative transactions and maintaining the sources and use of foreign currency funds in the bank. Based on Bank Indonesia regulation number 17/5/PBI/2015 dated 29 May 2015, the maximum net open position promised by Bank Indonesia is 20% of the bank’s capital. So it can be concluded that if the PDN ratio increases, the Loan to Deposit Ratio (LDR) decreases.

Loan to Deposit Ratio Calculation Function

The Loan to Deposit Ratio (LDR) will assist investors in observing the condition of a bank, whether it is feasible to operate, and what its financial condition is, whether the receipt of funds has also increased or decreased. In some cases, the bank will then lend the funds at increased interest. However, if the funds are used to fund credit management, the bank will then have to bear the costs of paying interest on the debt. In addition, the Loan to Deposit Ratio (LDR) also shows the quality of the bank in serving and caring for customers.

If the deposit of funds increases, then the customer also increases. On the other hand, the bank will then lend a lot of funds to customers, thereby reducing the level of income. Banks that lend funds to their customers will also generate low profit margins.

However, a balanced Loan to Deposit Ratio (LDR) is the best way for banks. With the increasing number of deposits that are lent, it is possible that there will be a decline in the economic level. However, if too few deposits are lent then assets tend not to increase and are in a stable state.

Within the scope of the company, the Loan to Deposit Ratio (LDR) is also known as the debt to assets ratio. The function itself is similar to the loan to deposit ratio, except that the debt to assets ratio is used to measure the total assets that can be used to cover the company’s debts. With the aim of knowing the effectiveness of managing company assets and generating income, the activity ratio is used. Meanwhile, the current ratio is used to indicate a company’s ability to pay short-term debt. Both are then included in the indication of the debt to assets ratio.

Banking itself requires the Loan to Deposit Ratio (LDR) as an assessment tool that shows how healthy the business activities are being carried out by a banking company. Other functions of the Loan to Deposit Ratio (LDR) include serving as an indicator of bank health, as well as a standard indicator for evaluation of Anchor Banks or Anchor Banks (minimum LDR of 50%).

As a determinant of the size of the bank’s Minimum Statutory Reserves (GWM). As one of the conditions for tax relief given to banks for mergers. Meanwhile, customers and investors who plan to deposit funds with a bank, the Loan to Deposit Ratio (LDR) figure itself is an indication of how well the bank is then operated.

Book Recommendations Regarding Loan to Deposit Ratio

1. Smart Banking Series, Commercial Bank Credit According to Banking Theory and Practice

The book Smart Banking Series, Commercial Bank Credit According to Banking Theory and Practice is the third book published by author A. Wangsawidjaja. It is hoped that the book material for Commercial Bank Credit According to Indonesian Banking Theory and Practice will provide input as an introduction to understanding various conventional banking credit transactions and commercial bank credit law, including the general settlement of conventional commercial bank bad loans.

The material for this book is prepared based on the author’s practical experience, both as a banking practitioner in BNI branch offices, regional offices and BNI big offices from the period 1970 to 1999. In this book the author also adds the author’s practical experience as an Advocate, Partner in Law Offices of Remy & Darus and Law Offices Of Remy & Partners from 2000 to 2013, as well as founder and partner at WKI & Associates (www.kantor Hukum dki.com) from 2013 to present, which provides consultancy conventional banking law and Islamic banking to their clients.

The author completed his Bachelor’s degree at Sriwijaya State University Palembang (UNSRI), Master’s degree in Law at the University of Indonesia (UI) Jakarta, and Doctoral degree at Syarif Hidayatullah State Islamic University (UIN Syarif Hidayatullah) Jakarta. The material in this book was given as lecture material by the author in the Banking Law course at the Postgraduate Law Masters program at the University of Indonesia (UI), University of Surabaya (Ubaya), Jakarta Military Law College (STHM), and the Indonesian Banking Development Institute Jakarta ( LPPI), a writer at that time (2000-2011) as an assistant to Prof. Dr. Sutan Remy Sjahdeini, SH, as a professor of Banking Law.

The author also provides material for this book in the form of papers which the author presents in several banking seminars, workshops, as well as in-house training at several conventional banking institutions and Islamic banking, as well as non-banking institutions related to banking business activities.

2. Sovereign People’s Credit Union

The presence of this book is to contribute to a more complete literature on credit cooperatives. A cooperative that is characterized by a movement for freedom from poverty and community empowerment for people who are considered “weak”, marginalized, but are actually rich and empowered. The scarcity of literature on the cooperative movement, especially credit unions that adhere to the principles of Rochdale, and the many misunderstandings that credit cooperatives are just savings and loan cooperatives in the style of capital investment, led to the publication of this book.

Much of what is written in this book is not merely sourced from existing literature, but moreover is based on the author’s first experience who has been closely and deeply involved in establishing, managing, and spreading the People’s Sovereignty Movement Credit Unions to various regions of the country over the last 20 years.

3. Banking Credit Business

One area that plays a very important role in the banking business is the credit business. Therefore, it is necessary to have credit staff who are competent, able to contribute by adhering to the principle of prudence, and capable of producing sound productive assets as expected. This Banking Credit Business Book includes a Senior Credit Officer and Credit Policy Module which provides a minimum reference that must be owned by a prospective bank credit manager or manager.

This book is a continuation of the book Managing Credit in a Healthy Way (Module Credit Officer). The main source of this book is the various training modules and materials implemented by various banks as well as existing practices in the Indonesian banking industry. By mastering the contents of the book, the reader will have the minimum ability to become a bank credit manager.

The first part covers credit portfolio management, credit planning and strategy, credit management and monitoring, non-performing loan management, and credit monitoring. The second part includes establishing a credit strategy, factors that need to be considered in formulating credit policies, compiling credit products, planning, monitoring realization, and evaluation/performance measurement, as well as formulating general credit policies and guidelines.

In the world of research, especially scientific work, it cannot be separated from literature or literature in Indonesian. Literature is a source or reference or reference for researchers of scientific work, so it cannot be simply released. In other words, through literature, a person or researcher can obtain valid and accountable information and data which can then be used as a reference for writing scientific papers. One of the studies related to literature is a literature review.

Literature is often used as a reference or reference in making scientific writing, so literature is very difficult to separate from the world of education. Therefore, literature is often used by students to complete their final project or thesis. In fact, literature is also needed by lecturers who are conducting research or making journals.

This literature is very diverse in form or you could say not only books, but also in the form of scientific journals, dissertations, theses, and so on. The more literature that is used as a reference or reference for making scientific papers, the more scientific papers produced will be optimal. Scientific writing that is done optimally, usually the content will be more complex and still easy to understand.

Even though a lot of literature is used, it cannot guarantee that it will produce quality scientific work. Therefore, in making scientific work, you should choose quality data or choose data that is directly related to the topic of the scientific work being made.

To be able to get valid data from the literature, the creator of a scientific work should conduct a literature review first. This needs to be done so that the authors of scientific papers know the research data that has been done before and can be used as a reference. In addition, literature reviews can also be used to find out what approach has been chosen by previous researchers.

Literature review consists of two words, the first is literature and the second is review. Therefore, before discussing further about literature review, this article will discuss the meaning of literature and the meaning of review.

Definition of Literature

Literature is all written works that can be used as reference material or references in conducting various fields of research or scientific writing. In Indonesian, literature is better known as literature. In the Big Indonesian Dictionary, (KBBI), literature is reading material that is used in various activities, both intellectually and recreationally.

Literature is used as a reference because it is considered that there is a lot of valid data in the literature. In addition, literature is also considered to have many benefits that are eternal. In other words, literature will never die and will continue to exist and will continue to grow.

In this case, various kinds of papers are included in the literature section as long as they are related to the topic of discussion that will be used in making scientific papers. Although it can be used as reference material in making scientific work, the data in the literature must be checked first, whether the data is valid or not. Apart from that, it can also be checked through literature writers, editors, to who published the literature.

Definition of Reviews

As previously explained that literature review consists of two words, after discussing the meaning of literature, the meaning of review is a summary or review that comes from several sources, such as films, books, news, and journals. In addition, reviews can also come from several products that we usually do after shopping online .

Reviews that are done after completing online shopping are very useful for the store because they can find out what things need to be improved and what things need to be maintained. Therefore, online stores really expect reviews from their buyers. That way, shop owners can improve the quality of service or the quality of the product itself, so that it can increase sales turnover.

Basically, almost the same as a product review, the meaning of the word review in literature review means a person’s assessment of the quality of a written work. In this case, the written works in question are very diverse, such as journal writing, novels, books, and others.

With a literature review, someone will know whether the written work can be used as a reference for research (scientific work) or not. Literature review is also useful for creators of their writing because they know the things that need to be done to improve the quality of their writing.

Not only that, literature reviews can also be useful for others in helping to find papers that are of good quality and can be used as references in conducting research. Because the scope of the review is very broad, the review itself is divided into several types, such as journal reviews, reviews, books, reviews, articles, and many more.

What is Literature Review?

Even though literature review consists of two words, the actual meaning of a different literature review is not the same as the combined meaning of the two words. In the field of research, especially the creation of scientific papers, literature review is better known as a literature review. Therefore, it can be said that a literature review is an analytical activity which can be in the form of criticism of a research that is being carried out on a particular topic which is part of a scientific field.

The content in this literature review is in the form of an explanation or discussion of the theory of a finding or research topic. From the explanation of these theories can be used as a theoretical basis in making scientific work or in conducting research activities. In addition, research that is currently being carried out can be in the form of developing from previous research or it can also be research that is being carried out for the first time.

To make this literature review, one needs to do a number of things first, such as reading and understanding the papers to be analyzed, criticizing the papers, and providing reviews or responses to the papers or literature. Therefore, this literature review activity is very synonymous with students or lecturers. This is because students or lecturers will usually get a job to do a literature review.

In general, the activity of making literature reviews is often carried out by students or lecturers. There are several types of literature that are often reviewed when carrying out literature review activities, such as scientific articles from scientific journals, theses, dissertations, seminal papers, textbooks (novels, short stories, non-fiction books, and so on), and report from an organization that has a fairly high level of trust.

Literature Review Method

When you want to do or make a literature review, you can use several methods, namely the method of systematic mapping study , systematic literature review, and traditional review. 

Systematic Mapping Study

Systematic mapping study is a type of literature review method in which the writing is carried out systematically and uses predetermined steps. With this literature review method, choosing the paper to be studied cannot be done subjectively, so it must be done objectively.

Systematic mapping studies are more complex and there are more papers that can be used compared to traditional reviews . In addition, researchers who want to make a literature review with this method usually already have certain standards. In this case, the standard in question is the standard in choosing the title and type of paper to be used.

Therefore, researchers who use this method in making literature reviews will usually collect various kinds of writings. After collecting the papers, the researcher will read the papers one by one which will then be reviewed or analyzed and adapted to the topic of discussion to be studied.

Systematic Literature Review

Systematic literature review is usually abbreviated as SLR. Systematic literature review is a method that systematically aims to collect, then analyze critically by presenting data and findings from various other studies.

Making literature reviews with the systematic literature review method is usually done sequentially or systematically. In other words, a literature review is made starting from the most basic things and then working on complex things.

The stages that need to be passed with this method can indeed be said to be quite long. However, the literature review that will be produced will be more detailed, accurate, and more complex. Therefore, when conducting a literature review using this method, the author can obtain a sharper and better quality theoretical basis.

Traditional Reviews

The second method used in making a literature review is the traditional review. Traditional review is a method commonly used to make literature reviews by researchers. The results with the traditional review method which is commonly used to make this literature review are often found in survey papers. Therefore, the literature reviews produced through this method are more specifically focused on one topic only. In addition, the author of the selected paper is known in advance.

With this traditional review method, the papers used as references are still on the same topic of discussion as the research being carried out. This method can indeed make a literature review more specific, but papers that can be used as references are limited. Even though it is possible that data or sources that can be used can be obtained from different topics of discussion.

Not only limited in terms of data and sources, but the traditional review method is also limited to the insight and level of understanding of the researcher. In other words, the wider the researcher’s insight, the more written works or literature that have been read and researched or analyzed by researchers.

Benefits of Literature Reviews

The large number of researchers who use literature reviews is not without reason, because the literature review itself has several benefits including:

1. Knowing the Development of Science (Specific Fields)

The first benefit that can be obtained by making a literature review is knowing the development of science in a particular field. With this benefit, a researcher can continue to explore this knowledge, and can even contribute to the development of this science.

2. Knowing the Methods or Techniques in Making Scientific Work

The second benefit of making a literature review is knowing the methods or techniques in making scientific work. This benefit can occur because in making a literature review, the steps are almost the same as making a scientific paper. In addition, by making a literature review, researchers can also find out techniques for solving a problem, so that the solution to the problem can be used by other readers.

3. Increase Knowledge

In addition to knowing the development of science, making a literature review can also be useful to increase knowledge. With increasing knowledge, the insight will also increase. This can happen because when carrying out literature review activities, researchers will read and understand various kinds of written works, whether they are relevant to the topic of discussion or not.

4. Knowing Interrelated Research Results

When carrying out literature review activities, we will read and understand written works in the form of the results of previous research. Therefore, by conducting a literature review, researchers will find out the results of research that are interrelated with the topic of discussion to be studied.

5. Determine the Topics for Discussion and Problems to be Researched

The fifth benefit of making a literature review is that it can determine a topic of discussion and problems to be studied. This can happen because when making a literature review, researchers will easily find problems or topics of discussion that are close to everyday life. In addition, literature reviews can also be useful for researchers so that the research carried out does not go anywhere.

Every benefit of literature review is generally related to research activities or making scientific work because making a literature review itself is part of making scientific work.

How to Make a Literature Review

The following will explain several steps in making a literature review, including:

1. Finding, Reading, and Understanding Relevant Writing

In making a literature review, the researcher must look for written works that will be used in later research. Not only searched, but also must be read, and understood in order to get data sources that are relevant to the topic of discussion.

2. Choose Clear Data Sources

The second step in conducting a literature review is selecting clear data sources. This needs to be done so that the research process does not go astray and produce detailed and specific literature reviews.

3. Do In-Depth Identification

The next step is to carry out in-depth identification. In this case what is identified are all written works that will be used as a reference in making a literature review. The deeper the identification is carried out, the better the data sources obtained will be.

4. Create a Literature Review Framework

Before directly making a literature review, it is better to make a literature review framework first. By making a literature review framework, the researcher will find out things that need to be corrected and added in making a literature review. That way, it can reduce errors in making literature reviews and can produce quality literature reviews.

5. Make a Literature Review

The final step is to make a literature review using the previously obtained data sources.

After knowing how to make a literature review, are you interested in trying to make a literature review right away?

Conclusion

Literature review is often known as a literature review which is often found by students and lecturers who are completing their final assignments, such as theses, theses or dissertations. With a literature review, it will be easier for researchers to find papers of the same type as the topic of discussion to be studied.

There are three literature review methods, namely systematic mapping study , systematic literature review , and traditional review . Each method has its advantages and disadvantages. Therefore, it is better to use a method that is in accordance with the literature review that will be made, so that it can produce optimal and quality literature reviews.

Literature review – Have you ever conducted research or written a scientific paper? For students or lecturers conducting research and making scientific papers you can say they are already familiar. This is because in tertiary institutions, a research or scientific paper is one of the mandatory things that must be done and completed, such as the final task of making a thesis.

In conducting research or scientific writing, one must pay attention to scientific principles. Without scientific principles in conducting research, the data sources obtained are invalid, so that the research is invalid and cannot be accounted for. Not only can a research be accounted for, but with scientific principles, it becomes easier for researchers to complete research.

As for data sources that can be used in research or to make scientific papers, such as literature, interviews, surveys, and so on. However, in choosing a data source, it is better not only to be valid, but also to pay attention to its suitability for the topic of the problem.

This scientific principle also makes researchers not carelessly carry out research activities because they will know what things must be done in order to produce quality research. In fact, with scientific rules, a research or scientific paper can provide benefits to its readers, especially in obtaining a solution to a topic that has been researched.

One of the scientific rules that must exist in research or scientific writing is a literature review. With a literature review, researchers can find valid and relevant data sources with the topic of the problem to be studied. Then, what is meant by literature review? Come on, see this review until it’s finished, okay, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Literature Review

Literature review is a collection of theories obtained from various sources that will be used as reference material in carrying out research activities or making scientific papers. In this case, the theoretical basis can be taken from various media, such as journals, theses, articles, news, newspapers, and many more. However, in choosing a theory to use, it is better to choose one that is relevant to the topic of research problem or scientific paper.

Literature review is often also known as theoretical basis. This literature review aims to answer or find solutions to a topic of the problem to be studied. Therefore, the theory chosen must be valid so that the results of the research can be accounted for and can provide benefits and solutions for readers on the topic of the problem raised.

Because literature review is very important in the process of research and writing scientific papers, literature review must exist. Literature review needs to be written because it can support the sharpness of the research process. Not just written, but literature review must also be explained in scientific language, but easy to understand so that the reader understands the purpose of the answer or analysis of the research.

Therefore, it can be said that literature review is an important part of the research process or scientific writing. Without a literature review, the process of research or scientific writing carried out can be deviated from the topic of the problem, so that the results of the research are less than optimal.

In addition, without a literature review, writers or even readers will find it difficult to capture the outline of the research process that has been carried out. In other words, the research process carried out is not in accordance with the original purpose. Therefore, never forget to include a literature review when you want to carry out the research process or scientific writing.

Writing a literature review on scientific writing, literature review is usually in CHAPTER II. Scientific works that use literature review, such as journals, theses, dissertations, and research reports, and the like.

Literature Review According to Experts

The following is the definition of literature review according to experts.

1. Trees

According to Poha, literature review is an activity to collect scientific data, especially in the form of theories, methods, or research that has been done before, both in the form of books, document manuscripts, journals, and others that are already in the library.

2. Nyoman Kutha Ratna

Nyoman Kutha Ratna stated three meanings related to literature review, including:

• Literature review is a reading that has previously been read and analyzed in published form or as a private collection.
• Literature review is often associated with a theoretical basis or theoretical framework, namely theories that have been used to analyze research objects. Therefore, for some researchers will combine literature review with a theoretical framework or theoretical basis.
• Literature review is a variety of reading materials that are specifically relevant to the research object to be studied or analyzed.

3. Nazir

Nazir said that literature review is a literature study or literature study that has a function to support research acumen and support research. In addition, literature review is also used to determine the extent to which knowledge related to the research process develops and to what extent conclusions can be obtained, so that the required situation is successfully obtained.

4. Muh Fitrah, M, PS and Dr. Lutfhiyah, M.Ag

According to Muh Fitrah, M.Ps and Dr. Lutfhiyah, M.Ag, literature review is an action or activity in the form of observing, exploring, and studying knowledge.

Of the four definitions of literature review according to experts, it can be said that literature review is an activity that starts from observing, studying, and studying knowledge in order to obtain data sources that can be used for research, such as theories, methods, or scientific approaches.

Currently, the nursing profession continues to increase every year. Therefore, not a few people who want to have dreams of becoming a nurse because they can help patients who are sick. The book entitled Foundation of Nursing Theory for Adult Patients is very suitable to be used as a reference for nursing students who wish to deepen their knowledge of nursing. In this book, you will get various approaches, aspects of nursing, to case study examples.

Benefits of Literature Review

The benefits of literature review are as follows:

1. It’s easy to find solutions to the topics studied

Every time you carry out a research process or make a scientific paper, you cannot be separated from the topic of the problem to be researched. Then, the topic of the problem is sought for a solution, so that the problem has the answer. By conducting a literature review, solutions to the topic of research problems can be found because in the literature review there are theories that support the sharpness of the research.

All theories contained in the literature review must go through studies from various kinds of literature or data sources, so that a theory that is relevant to the topic of the problem can be obtained. In fact, it can produce useful research for its readers on current problems.

2. Providing Convenience in the Research Process

The second benefit of literature review is that it facilitates the research process or the creation of scientific papers. This benefit can be felt because literature review can be used as a basis for finding theories, so that it can produce solutive research.

However, before these theories are used in the literature review, researchers will develop these theories first. Then, then the theories are used as the basis for conducting research.

3. Easy to Determine Research Criteria

The third benefit of literature review is that it is easy to determine research criteria. In conducting research or making scientific work, researchers must first determine research criteria so that the research process can run properly or be more directed. In this case, the research criteria usually begins in the form of a statement.

The criteria for research must generally be in the form of success or failure, how to identify problem topics, suggestions for researchers, and making a conclusion. Therefore, it can be said that with this criterion, the research results will be easier to understand.

4. Verify the Research Results  

The fourth benefit of a literature review is that it can verify research results. Verification of the results of this research needs to be done because it serves as a comparison of the results of research that has been done before. With the verification of the results of this study, the research process that is being carried out can draw conclusions. The presence of conclusions on the results of the study, the reader knows the results of the research in outline.

Purpose of Literature Review

Besides having benefits, literature review also has several objectives, including:

1. To understand a problem that is relevant to the topic of research discussion, so that it can produce a solutive research.
2. To conduct a review of the topic of discussion that will be researched or analyzed through literature or written work.
3. To find out previous researchers who have conducted research with the topic of discussion or topic of the same problem.
4. To know and understand each theory that will be used as literature in the research process that is being carried out which will then be written down.
5. Aiming at determining attitudes when conducting research that has been carried out and completed, the results are not in accordance with what is expected or not in accordance with the main objectives of the research.

In the world of academics and research, a literature review is a must. The existence of a literature review proves that in this world there is nothing really new. Making or writing a literature review cannot be done just like that, but there are guidelines. The book on compiling a literature review is very suitable to be used as a reference in making a literature review and is very suitable to be used as a reference in research methodology courses.

Library Review Function 

In addition to the purpose of making a literature review, it turns out that there is also a function of literature review, especially in research.

• Facilitate researchers in providing an explanation of the methods and techniques used when conducting research.
• Explain the various types of research that has been done before with the topic of the same problem in the research that is being carried out.
• Provide an explanation as well as a description of all data that has been used as a reference in research or scientific writing.
• Prove the authenticity of the research being carried out and can be accounted for.
• Explain some of the ideas and approaches that have been done before.

Types of Library Studies

Literature review consists of 4 types, including:

1. Qualitative Literature Review

Qualitative literature review is a type of literature review that is generally used in research with a qualitative approach. Therefore, researchers who use this type of literature review usually use a theoretical basis to provide an explanation of certain research guidelines and behaviors.

2. Quantitative Literature Review

Quantitative literature review is a type of literature review used in research with a quantitative approach. This type of literature review contains variables that are directly related to the hypotheses that have been determined.

3. Normative Theory Literature Review

Normative theory literature review is a type of literature review that uses normative theory in its production. Therefore, this literature review is often used in social science research.

4. Mixed Literature Study

A mixed literature review is a literature review made by combining qualitative research methods with quantitative methods.

Books About Scientific Work

Ethics of Writing Scientific Papers

In writing scientific papers, you should not be careless, you must follow the ethics of writing scientific papers. Currently, there is already a lot of literature explaining the ethics of writing scientific papers, one of which is the book Ethics of Writing Scientific Papers . In this book, it will be explained in more detail about how to prepare scientific writing to how to make scientific writing that is not plagiarism.

Microsoft Word and Excel for Writing Scientific Papers (Thesis)

When carrying out scientific paper writing activities, you cannot be separated from Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel software. Both software can be used in qualitative (descriptive) research or quantitative (mathematical) research. Books with the titles Microsoft word and excel for Writing Scientific Papers (Thesis) are very suitable to be used as study references because they include ways to make a table of contents, make page numbers, add references and make a bibliography.

Writing Scientific Papers

When you are already studying in tertiary institutions (S1, S2, and S3) you usually cannot be separated from writing scientific papers. To write good scientific papers, special skills are needed. One of the skills needed is managing research results so that they are easy to understand. The book Writing Scientific Papers contains information on how to write scientific papers according to research principles, managing data sources properly, and how to write good and correct scientific papers.

How to Make a Literature Review

How to make a literature review as follows:

1. Identifying Research 

When wanting to make a literature review, the researcher needs to identify the research first. From this identification, researchers can determine research that is in accordance with the topic of the problem that has been determined as well.

2. Finding, Reading, and Understanding Relevant Reading Sources

Because literature review is always related to previous research, to make a literature review one must search, read, and understand research that has been done before. Not only that, but researchers must also look for literature that is relevant to the research being carried out.

3. Keeping records

The third step in making a literature review is to record. This step needs to be done so that researchers know important things that can be included in the literature review.

4. Summarizing from the Readings That Have Been Found

After taking notes, the next step is to make a summary of the reading that has been found before. With this summary, researchers can produce brief, clear, and concise literature reviews.

5. Make Literature Review

The fifth step is to make a literature review. In making a literature review, it should be done in a systematic way and use theory that is relevant to the research being carried out.

6. Write General Views

The last step in writing a literature review is to write a general view that is appropriate and related to the content of the research that has been done.

Example of Literature Study

Before I looked for literature reviews from other universities, I first looked at the level of the language and literature faculty at the National University (UNAS). Based on my search, there have been those who have conducted research using semiological theory like mine, but with a different object. Analysis of the novel “YABU NO NAKA” by Akutagawa Ryuunosuke to reveal the theme through a study of Roland Barthes’ codes, the research was conducted by Hendra Kusumawinata, the Japanese Literature study program in 2004.

Based on my search, I found the same theory as my analysis, but with a different object. The work belongs to Haerunissa from the University of Mataram with the title Analysis of the Poetry “I’m on the Moon” by Khanis Selasih: A Study of Roland Barthes’ Semiology and Its Relationship to Literature Learning in Middle School.

 

The word “literal” has the same meaning as the meaning “literal”. Based on the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), literal is a translation or meaning according to letters, word for word.

In linguistics, the word “literally” is known as a lexical term meaning that a word is defined by the basic word meaning. Where, the words match the dictionary.

After you know about the literal meaning of the word, you also need to know about discussions related to literal or translation types. Well, what are they? Come on, find out the full discussion below.

Types of Translation Usually Found in the Translation World

Literally or translation, it turns out that there are many types in the world of translation. Where, currently the translation industry is continuously developing. Now, there are certain terms used to define specific translations that do not fall into the general category.

Of course, the brief explanation below can provide an explanation regarding some of the common translation terms used. So, what are the types, let’s find out together the explanation below.

1. Administrative Translation

Text translation is administrative in nature. Although administrative has a fairly broad meaning in terms of translation, this administrative refers to general texts used in business and organizations that are used in day-to-day management. Administrative can also be expanded to include texts with the same function in government.

2. Commercial Translation

Commercial translation, also known as professional business translation, covers the types of documents used in the business world, such as correspondence, company reports, tender documents, and other reports. Commercial Translation requires expert translators with knowledge of the terminology used in the business world.

3. Computer Translation

Not to be confused with CAT, this type of computer translation refers to translations done with the help of software. Computer translation is the translation of everything related to computers, such as software, manuals, books, help files, applications, and so on.

4. Economic Translation 

As with commercial and business translations, economic translation is just a special term used for translators of documents related to the economic field. The text is generally more academic in nature.

5. Financial Translation 

Financial translation is a text translation that is financial in nature. Where, everything from banking, asset management, to stocks and bonds can be covered by this financial translation service.

6. General Translation

General translation is the simplest translation. General text means that the language used is not high and is to some extent understood by ordinary people. There is no specific terminology or technical practice included in this category.

7. Legal Translation

Legal translation is the most difficult translation to know. At the simplest level, legal translation means translation of legal documents, for example contract laws and agreements.

Legal translation will always require the attention of an expert. This happens because law is closely related to culture and requires translators with a very good understanding of source and target culture.

Most translation essences will only ever hire legal experts to do the job. It happens because there is no opportunity to make mistakes. Mistranslation of any part of the contract can be fatal.

When translating texts in the field of law, the translator must remember the following. Where, the legal system of the source text is structured in a way that is appropriate to the culture and this is reflected in the legal language. Likewise, the target text must be read by someone who is familiar with other legal systems and their languages.

8. Literary Translation

Literary translation is the translation of literary works, for example novels, plays, and poetry. Translation of literary works is considered by many to be one of the highest forms of translation because it involves quite a lot of things, more than just translating texts. Literary translators are required to be able to translate feelings, cultural nuances, humor and other subtle elements from a literary work.

9. Medical Translation

Medical translation will cover everything from the medical field, medicine packaging to manuals for medical equipment and medical books. Similar to legal translation, medical translation is a specialty where translation errors can have serious consequences.

10. Technical Translation

Technical translation has a fairly broad meaning. Technical translation generally refers to a specific field, for example manufacturing or related to texts, for example manuals and manuals. In addition, technical translations are generally more expensive than general translations because they contain a large amount of terminology that only expert translators can handle.

Those are some types of translation commonly used in the world of translation. In the following discussion, we will discuss translation techniques. So, keep reading this article, Sinaumed’s.

Translation Techniques

Translation techniques are methods used with the intention of diverting messages from SL to TL, applied at the level of word phrases, clauses or sentences. Based on the opinion of Molina and Albir 2002, translation techniques have 5 (five) characteristics, namely:

1. Translation techniques affect the translation results
2. Techniques are classified by comparison to Basu texts.
3. Techniques are at the micro level
4. Techniques are not related to each other but according to a certain context.
5. Technique is functional.

Each expert has his own terms in choosing a translation technique, so that it tends to overlap between techniques from one expert to another. The technique that is meant to be the same turns out to have a different term. In terms of diversity, of course it is positive but on the other hand related to research will result in difficulties in choosing the term for a particular technique.

Therefore, in this case the author uses 18 translation techniques proposed by Molina and Albir. Apart from uniformity, the technique proposed by Molina and Albir has gone through complex research by referring to and comparing with existing translation techniques from previous translation experts.

So, here are 18 translation techniques that you can try.

1. Adaptation (Adaptation)

This adaptation technique is also known as the cultural adaptation technique. This technique is carried out by replacing the cultural elements that exist in Basu with the same cultural elements that exist in SL. This can be done because the cultural elements in SL are not found in TL, nor are the cultural elements in TL which are more familiar to the target readers. The technique is the same as the cultural equivalent technique.

2. Amplification (Amplification)

Translation techniques by making it explicit or paraphrasing an information that is implicit in SL. The technique is similar to that of exclamative explanatory, addition, and paraphrasing. Where, the footnote is one part of the amplification. The reduction technique is the opposite of this one technique.

3. Borrowing

The translation technique is done by borrowing words and expressions from BSu. This loan can be pure (Pure Borrowing) without adjustments or naturalized borrowing (Naturalized Borrowing) with adjustments to spelling and pronunciation. The official dictionary in BSA is a benchmark for whether the word or expression is a loan or not.

4. Kalke (Layer)

The Kalke technique is a translation technique that is carried out by literally translating phrases and rich source language. The technique is the same as the technique of acceptance (Acceptance).

 5. Compensation

Compensation technique is a translation technique that is carried out by conveying messages to other parts of the translated text. This was done because it had an effect on the style or style of BSu and could not be applied to BSa. The technique is similar to the conception technique.

6. Description

Description technique is a translation technique that is applied by replacing a term or expression with a description of its form and function.

7. Discursive Creation

Discursive technique is a translation technique using equivalents that are out of context. This is done to attract the attention of potential readers. The technique is the same as the proposal technique.

8. Establish Equivalence

Common equivalent technique is a technique that is carried out by using terms or expressions that are common or according to dictionaries or everyday use. Where, this one technique is the same as the literal translation technique.

9. Generalization (Generalization)

The generalization technique is a technique by using a more general term in SL to be more specific in SL. This is done because BSa does not have a specific equivalent. This type of translation technique is the same as the acceptance technique.

10. Linguistic Amplification

This type of translation technique is done by adding linguistic elements in TL. Where, this technique is commonly applied to consecutive translations and voiceovers.

11. Linguistic Compression

This linguistic compression technique is carried out by synthesizing linguistic elements in BSa. This one technique is the reverse technique of the linguistic amplification technique. This technique is also commonly used in simultaneous translation and subtitle translation.

12. Literal Translation

The literal translation technique is done by translating word for word and the translator no longer relates it to the context.

13. Modulation (Modulation)

The modulation technique is a translation technique that is applied by changing the point of view, focus or cognitive categories related to SL. This change in point of view can be lexical or structural.

14. Partikularisasi (Particularization)

This one technique is a translation technique in which the translator uses more concrete, precise, or specific terms from the superordinate to the subordinate. The particularization technique is also the reverse technique of the generalization technique.

15. Reduction (Reduction)

Reduction techniques, namely techniques that are applied by doing partial omissions, because this omission is considered not to recognize the distortion of meaning. In other words, imply explicit information. This technique is the reverse technique of the amplification technique.

16. Substitution (Substitution)

This substitution technique is a technique that is done by changing linguistic and paralinguistic elements (intonation and gestures). For example, sign language in Arabic, that is by putting your hand on your chest is translated as thank you.

17. Transposition

The transposition technique is a translation technique in which the translator changes categories grammatically. This type of technique is the same as the technique of shifting categories, structures and units, for example words into phrases.

18.  Variasi (Variation)

Variation techniques are carried out by changing linguistic and paralinguistic elements (intonation or gestures) which affect linguistic variations.

Another Concept of the Literal

There are several other concepts that are considered very similar to literal. Well, here is another concept that is almost literally the same, that you need to know.

1. Interpretation

Interpretation has the intention of explaining or commenting on an object or case. This interpretation can also refer to something more specific, namely:

• Logical interpretation, is a representation of interpretation in formal logic language
• Aesthetic interpretation is a way of understanding a work of art.
• Hermeneutics is a theory of text interpretation.
• Hermeneutics is the interpretation of the law made by judges.

2. Transcription

In genetics, transcription is the making of RNA, especially mRNA, by copying a portion of the DNA by the enzyme RNA polymerase. This transcription process will produce mRNA from DNA in cells which is the first step in protein synthesis.

This transcription becomes part of the genetic expression sequence. The original understanding of transcription is transliteration and copying. This is meant by converting DNA text into RNA. Actually, the only thing that changes is the nitrogenous base thymine in the same DNA RNA is replaced by uracil.

3. Transliteration

Transliteration is the transfer of text from one script to another. Transliteration can be an important part of transcription that transfers texts from one writing system to another. Transliteration has nothing to do with the representative or phoneme of origin.

Literal Example

In order to know clearly about the literal, here is an example of a literal, namely:

1. House
2. Stay home

The first example (A) is a root word that hasn’t changed. According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) the meaning of the word house is a building for residence. Meanwhile, the second example (B) is a derivative word. The second example (B) has a different meaning from the first meaning even though the basic word is similar, namely house.

The addition of prefixes and prefixes to the word house makes the meaning of the house change from not just a building to live in but to have a building to live in. The second example is called the grammatical meaning.

Closing

From the discussion above it can be said that the literal is a translation. In addition, to translate several words or sentences, several techniques are needed. This really needs to be done in order to get the maximum translation results.

This is an explanation of what is literal and the various types and techniques of translation. Hopefully all the discussions about literal meanings and techniques can be useful for you, so that it becomes easier to do literalism in a text.

The Variety of Indonesian Ethnic Nations – Indonesia consists of around 1,340 ethnic groups spread across almost all parts of Indonesia. According to BPS data, half or 50% of ethnic groups in Indonesia are Javanese. The rest are ethnic groups living outside Java, such as the Makasarese, Bugis (3.68%), Batak 2.04%, Balinese 1.88%, Acehnese 1.4% and other tribes.

Each tribe has different customs and norms. However, this diversity does not make the nation divided, on the contrary, diversity then unites to achieve the goal of a just and prosperous society. Check out a more complete explanation about ethnic groups in Indonesia below:

Definition of Ethnicity

Ethnicity is a group of people who identify themselves with others based on lineage referring to characteristics such as culture, nation, language, religion and behavior. Ethnicity is also a social group that is distinguished from other social groups, because it has the most basic and general characteristics related to its origin, place of origin, and culture.

In another definition, ethnicity is also a special social tribe and is ascriptive or has existed since birth, and has the same style as age group and gender. Ethnic groups themselves can be grouped based on:

• Mixed ethnicity, in which there is a mixture of races that inhabit a certain area or region. For example, the Peranakans are a mixture of Chinese and Malay races
• Lineage, as the main factor for ethnicity. There are three lineages in Indonesia, namely the father’s lineage (patrilineal), usually in the Batak, Ambon, Timorese and others, the mother’s lineage (matrilineal), usually occurs in the Minangkabau tribe in South Sumatra and the lineage of the father and mother or parental mostly run by the Javanese.

You can learn about various tribes and unique traditions in Indonesia that will make you chuckle in awe, shudder with horror, curiosity, and stir your mind in the book 70 Unique Traditions of Ethnic Nations in Indonesia.

Tribes in Indonesia

1. The Javanese

The Javanese use Javanese in their daily speech, surveys show that only approximately 42% of Javanese use Indonesian as their everyday language, while another 28% use mixed Javanese and Indonesian, and the rest only use Javanese. .

The Javanese language itself has different rules in terms of vocabulary and intonation based on the relationship between the speaker and the interlocutor, which is known as upload-ungguh. This aspect of language has a strong social influence in Javanese culture, and makes them very aware of their social status in society.

In Javanese society, the kinship system is based on bilateral lineage (calculated from both sides, mother and father). With this bilateral or parental principle, a Javanese has the same extensive relationship with the family from the mother’s side as well as the father’s.

Relatively solid kinship is usually established in descendants of one ancestor up to the third generation. However, the quality of nuclear family and extended family relationships varies from one family circle to another, depending on the conditions of each family.

2. Sundanese

The Sundanese, known as the Tatar Pasundan, cover the western part of the island of Java where most of their territory is included in the provinces of West Java and Banten. Derived from the root word sunda or suddha in Sanskrit which means shining, bright and white.

The Sundanese themselves make up 5.5 percent of the total population of Indonesia as a whole. Even though they are scattered in various parts of Indonesia, most of the Sundanese people live in Banten, Jakarta and Java. The majority of this tribe is Muslim but there are also a small number of Christians, Hindus and even Sundanese Wiwitan.

3. Batak tribe

Tribes in Indonesia originate from North Sumatra and also tend to be scattered in various regions in Indonesia. Consisting of 3.58 of the total population of Indonesia as a whole. The Batak tribe is divided into several parts, namely the Toba Batak, Mandailing Batak, Pakpak Batak, and Karo Batak.

The Batak tribe is one of the tribes in Indonesia that maintains its culture. They adhere to traditions and customs. Until now, customs and culture are still carried out in the social life of the Batak people and in their daily activities. Some of the prevailing Batak customs and culture are:

• Partuturan : In the daily life of the Batak people, kinship (partuturan) is the key to their philosophy of life, namely by asking the surname of every Batak person they meet. This can be illustrated by carving 2 lizards facing each other attached to either side of the Batak house. This kinship is also a kind of great milestone to unite blood relations and determine attitudes towards others properly.
• Mangokal Holi : A ceremonial procession that is carried out to collect the bones of the parents’ bodies which are put into a new coffin to be moved to a place provided by the family. This tradition is a hereditary heritage that aims to pay homage to the spirits of parents who have passed away. The purpose of moving the location of the bones to a new place is to get a better place than the previous place.

4. Betawi tribe

The Betawi tribe as a tribe whose people are descended from residents who have lived in Batavia since the 17th century and are the result of mixed blood marriages from various ethnic groups brought by the Dutch to Batavia.

The Betawi tribe is also referred to as the original inhabitants of the Jakarta area. However, the Betawi people are scattered in other areas, such as Bogor and its surroundings. Betawi is a creole language based on Bazaar Malay plus elements of Sundanese, Balinese, languages ​​from South China (especially Hokkien), Arabic, and languages ​​from Europe, especially Dutch and Portuguese.

Because it develops naturally, there is no clear standard structure of this language that distinguishes it from Malay, although there are some distinguishing linguistic elements, for example from the decay of the prefix me-, the use of the ending -in (influenced by Balinese), and the transition of an open /a/ sound at the end of a word becomes /e/ or /ɛ/ in some local dialects.

Betawi itself is also famous for its culinary diversity related to the culture and traditions of eating in it which you can find in the book Culinary Betawi Selaksa Rasa & Stories which also discusses the sequence of events, ceremonies and celebrations.

5. The Dayak tribe

Dayak comes from the word “Daya” which means upstream, to refer to people who live in the interior or upstream. The Dayak tribe itself is one of the “Original” tribes that inhabit the “Island of Borneo” (Kalimantan).

Borneo is divided based on administrative areas, each of which consists of East Kalimantan with the capital of Samarinda, South Kalimantan with the capital of Banjarmasin, Central Kalimantan with the capital of Palangka Raya, West Kalimantan with the capital of Pontianak, and North Kalimantan with the capital of Tanjung Selor.

The Dayak tribe is divided into 405 sub-tribes. Each Dayak sub-tribe has similar customs and culture, according to their social status, both Dayak in Indonesia and Dayak in Sabah and Sarawak Malaysia as allied countries.

The Dayak tribe has similar cultural characteristics, such as saber, chopsticks, beliong, betang house or long house (radank house) and others. Other Dayak characteristics such as; weapons ownership and cultural arts.

6. Asmat tribe

Known as the incarnation of the Dewa tribe, this tribe from Papua believes that they are descended from the god Fumeripits. The Asmat tribe is also one of the tribes from the province of Papua which is worldwide because of its culture which respects nature and the lives of its ancestors, so the wisdom possessed by the Asmat tribe is also very extraordinary.

This one ethnicity is divided into two, namely tribes who live on the coast and tribes who live in the interior. The two populations differ in many aspects such as way of life, dialect, rituals and even social structure. The division of the Asmat language downstream of the river is divided into parts of the northwestern coast group and parts of the southwest coast group. Meanwhile, the Asmat language division is divided into the Keenok and Kaimok groups.

7. Bugis Tribe

The Bugis tribe is a tribe in Indonesia originating from South Sulawesi Province but has now spread to various regions in Indonesia, such as Papua, Jakarta, Kalimantan, to Riau.

This tribe belongs to the Deutero Malay (young Malay) tribes. Besides that, the Bugis community can also be found in Malaysia and Singapore. On the website of the Wajo District Office of Communication, Informatics and Statistics, the word Bugis comes from the word To Ugi, which means Bugis.

The name Ugi refers to the first king of the Chinese kingdom in Pammana, Wajo Regency, namely La Sattumpugi. They dub themselves as To Ugi or followers of La Sattumpugi. The main feature of this ethnic group is its language and customs. Thus, migrants from Malay and Minangkabau who have migrated to Sulawesi since the 15th century can also be categorized as Bugis people.

8. Madurese

The Madurese are an ethnic group with a sizable population in Indonesia, numbering around 20 million people. They come from the island of Madura and the surrounding islands, such as Gili Raja, Sapudi, Raas, and Kangean. In addition, many Madurese live in the eastern part of Java, usually called the “horseshoe” area, from Pasuruan to North Banyuwangi.

The Madurese are known for their outspoken style of speech and their easily offended nature, but they are also known for being disciplined and diligent in working. Apart from that, the Madurese are also known to have a strong Islamic tradition, although they sometimes perform rituals of sea picking or rokat tasse.

In Madurese society, kinship ties are formed through lineage, both from families based on the father’s and mother’s lines ( paternal and maternal relatives ). In general, the ties of kinship among family members are tighter than the father’s lineage so they tend to “dominate”. The kinship ties of the Madurese themselves include up to four generations up ( ascending generations ) and down ( descending generations ) from the ego.

9. Minangkabau tribe

The next ethnic group in Indonesia is the Minang tribe, which is one of the largest ethnic groups in Indonesia, accounting for approximately 2.73 percent of the total Indonesian population.

Coming from West Sumatra, the Minang people are also often equated with the Padang people, because Padang is the capital of West Sumatra Province. Even so, the Minang people actually call their ethnic group as urang crew, which refers to the Minang people themselves.

In Minang culture, tribe can be interpreted as a clan or also as a clan or family name that descends or is taken from the mother’s lineage which is called Matrilineal. Rumah Gadang is a traditional Minangkabau house which also has other names, Rumah Gadang, Rumah Gadang, and Rumah Baanjuang.

This traditional house is a large stage model house with a rectangular shape. Adat in the Minang tribe, one of which is Adat nan Sabana Adat which is a legal provision, a characteristic found in natural objects, flora and fauna, as well as humans as His creations (Sunnatullah). Adat nan sabana This custom is a source of Minangkabau customary law in managing society in all matters.

10. Baduy tribe

The Baduy tribe is a tribe that lives in the interior of Banten, living isolated from the outside world, especially the Inner Baduy people who live simply and unite with nature. The Baduy tribe is indeed divided into two major groups, namely the Inner Baduy and the Outer Baduy. These two groups have differences, especially in terms of dress.

The Baduy Dalam are a group of Baduy people who strictly adhere to their ancestral customs. They strongly reject technology and modernization, so their lives are still traditional.

Inner Baduy people generally wear white clothes that are woven by themselves. The white color symbolizes purity. Meanwhile, the Outer Baduy are more open to newcomers, although they still uphold the existing customs.

Some of the Outer Baduy people have used modern items such as mattresses, pillows, and several electronic devices. All-black woven clothes are a sign of the Outer Baduy community. The location of the Baduy tribe itself is at the foot of the Kendeng mountains in the village of Kanekes.

The Kanekes people or commonly known as the Baduy people are an ethnic group originating from the Banten region, more precisely in Lebak. The Baduy tribe also still has a relationship with the Sundanese. It is not surprising that their physique resembles most Sundanese people and their daily language is Sundanese.

11. The Balinese

In Balinese, the Balinese are known as Wong Bali, Anak Bali, or Krama Bali. This tribe is the majority ethnic group on the island of Bali. The total population of the Balinese people living on the island of Bali is around 3.3 million people. Meanwhile there are around 600,000 people scattered in several regions in the country.

Some of these areas are West Nusa Tenggara. Lampung, Bengkulu, Central Sulawesi, and several other areas. The Balinese use Balinese in their daily activities. The social life system of the people themselves is called Wangsa. Wangsa is a family system that is regulated through lineage.

Today the Wangsa system is not as strictly enforced as it was in the past. In some respects, however, the Wangsa system was retained. For example, in a traditional ceremony that has become a tradition or in a marriage that still distinguishes one’s ancestral lineage.

12. The Ambonese

The largest tribe in Maluku is a mixture of Austronesian-Papuan tribes originating from the Ambon-Laese Islands from the western side of Seram Island. The language used by the Ambonese is a blend of natives and Ambonese Malay or Nasalaut. As many as 100,000 people use this language and are divided into several dialects, namely Nasalaut, Saparua, Haruku, Hatu, Asilulu, Hila, Wakasihu, and others.

The main source of livelihood for the Ambonese is farming in fields. The crops usually grown are rice, corn, cassava, sweet potatoes, beans, coffee, coconut, vegetables, tobacco, cloves, fruits and sago. Sago is the most important plant for the Ambonese people because it will be processed into their staple food, namely papeda, this food derived from sago is usually served with yellow fish sauce.

Regarding kinship, they pass through the patrilineal line with a pattern of settling after marriage in the patrilocal environment. While the most important kinship unit is a family unit or called the matarumah (nuclear family).

13. Gayo tribe

Approaching the central part of Aceh province, there is a tribe that inhabits the Gayo Highlands, namely the Gayo tribe. However, apart from coming from this area, several Gyao tribal people also live in several areas of East Aceh such as the Serba Jadi, Simpang Jernih and Peunaron sub-districts.

The Gayo tribe belongs to the Proto-Malay race group originating from India. There are 3 groups in the Gayo tribal community, firstly the people who live in the Bener Meriah and Central Aceh areas are called Gayo Laut. Second , the people who live in the Southeast Aceh and GAyo Lues areas are called Gayo Lues, and the three people who live in the Aceh Tamiang sub-district are called Gayo Blang.

When talking about the Gayo tribe, there is something that is characteristic of them, namely Gayo coffee. Who is not familiar with Gayo coffee, Arabica coffee which is famous for having a very strong taste and is much loved by coffee lovers. In Gayo, there are two coffee plantations that produce the best quality coffee, namely Bener Meriah, Central Aceh and Takengon.

14. The Tengger Tribe

The Tengger tribe is a tribe that inhabits the area of ​​Mount Bromo, Malang. In accordance with the region, the people of the Tengger tribe believe that Mount Bromo or Mount Brahma is a sacred mountain. There is one of the Tengger tribal customs which is carried out at the foot of Mount Bromo, namely the Yadnya Kasada or Kasodo ceremony.

The Yadnya Kasada ceremony is a ritual ceremony held by the Tengger people as a form of gratitude as well as a hope to avoid disaster. The process of this ceremony is carried out by providing crops and throwing them into the crater of Mount Bromo.

The tribal people who are descended from the Majapahit kingdom are generally Hindu and still adhere to their customs. Even though it is in a tourist area and many tourists visit, cultural acculturation is still rare. Therefore the customs and culture of the Tengger tribe are still very sustainable today.

15. Sasak tribe

One of the tribes in Indonesia that still adheres to its traditions is the Sasak tribe, which is a tribe located in Lombok. The Sasak people have houses made of clay mixed with buffalo dung. The word Sasak etymologically comes from the word “sak-sak” which means one or main, related to the book written by Mpu Prapanca, namely Nagarakertagama. Therefore, the people assume that the ancestors of the Sasak tribe are Javanese.

There is a unique tradition within the Sasak tribe, namely eloping. In ordinary society this may be considered taboo, but actually this is a unique tradition from the Sasak tribe. If a couple wants to get married, the groom will take the bride for 3 days to a certain place without the knowledge of her parents. After that, the prospective bride’s parents will “redeemed” their child and continue talking about her marriage.

16. Sumbawa Tribe

The Sumbawa tribe originates from Sumbawa, West Nusa Tenggara. Judging from its geographical location, Sumbawa is in an area that has good forest products because it is located on the hills. Some of them are teak, rattan, sepang wood, deer, and honey. The Sumbawa people live in the Sumbawa and West Sumbawa districts.

The majority religion of the Sumbawa people is Islam, so many activities are related to religion. But even so, the people of the Sumbawa tribe generally still believe in superstitions. Such as superstitions about the environment, superstitions about the unseen world, superstitions about the universe, and so on.

17. Flores Tribe

The Flores people are a mixture of Portuguese, Melanesian and Malay ethnicities. If you remember, before that Flores was a colony of the Portuguese, therefore the culture of the Portuguese nation is still very much felt in this region. The name Flores itself is also taken from the Portuguese which means “cape of flowers”.

Generally, the people of the Flores tribe already adhere to religious beliefs such as Islam, Christianity and others. However, there are still many people who believe in ancestor worship. One of them is like special worship to the spirits and ancestors by establishing and maintaining a building.

18. Torajans

The Toraja tribe, originates from South Sulawesi and dominates the population in the city of Makassar. One of the well-known cultures of the Toraja tribe is the death ceremony, in Toraja society the death ceremony is only for someone who has money. So families who don’t have money will wait months or even years to collect money and hold a death ceremony.

19. The Osing Tribe

Javanese Osing or Wong Blambangan, that’s how the native tribe of Banyuwangi is usually pronounced. This tribe, originating from East Java, uses an everyday language known as Osing which is a derivative of Old Javanese and has a slight influence from Balinese, and usually has an accent and style of language which is not difficult to distinguish from Javanese in general. Based on history in general, the East Java region was one of the areas that used to be dominated by Hindu-Buddhist beliefs from the kingdoms that once ruled the area, which later also became the belief of the Osing tribe itself. However, along with the development of Islam in Java, it also had an impact on the beliefs of the Osing Tribe, who then began to adhere to it.

The Osing tribe has a variety of arts and customs that are characteristic, such as the Tumpeng Sewu Tradition (eating big during the month of Hajj), the Barong Dance or Barong Ider Bumi which is held every second day of the month of Shawwal, the Angklung Paglak Tradition is also a characteristic of what is done as a entertainment as well as to help farmers in harvesting, and there is also the Gandrung Dance which has become a typical Banyuwangi dance until now. At traditional events, the Osing tribe usually wears a traditional dress called the Jebeng Thulik Clothing, which is a long-sleeved kebaya with embroidery that looks elegant and simple with a special Banyuwangi bun added.

20. Mandar Tribe

Tanah Mandar or the Mandar tribe is a tribe in West Sulawesi and parts of South and Central Sulawesi. The term Mandar is a bond of unity between the seven kingdoms on the coast (Pitu Babana Binanga) and the seven kingdoms on the mountain (Pitutu Ulunna Salu), all of these peoples are united through an agreement made by their ancestors at Allewuang Batu in Luyo.

The Mandar tribe is known as a tribe that has prowess as sailors, not because of technological superiority, but because of the local fishing equipment they have developed, namely FADs and Sandeq boats which are characterized by traditional outriggers and very fast.

The Mandar tribe has several unique arts and traditions that are characteristic of their area, such as Kalindaqdaq which is a parable when you want to convey a wish to someone, which can be in the form of seduction, poetry or a motivation to other people.

Then there is Sayyang Pattu’du which is interpreted as a dancing horse which is a tradition of thanksgiving for children who have succeeded in completing Juz 30 of the Qur’an in the form of a procession around the village using dancing horses accompanied by rhythmic chants.

The Mandar tribe also has an art called Parrawana or Rebana which is performed every time there is a wedding party or even at the Sayyang Pattu’du event where the horse will dance to the accompaniment of the Tambourine rhythm.

With the various ethnic groups in Indonesia who have their own traditions and culture, the book Encyclopedia of Tribes in Indonesia is here to summarize various important things that you should know about the diversity of ethnic groups in Indonesia.

List of other tribes in Indonesia

• Kubu Tribe – Sumatra (Jambi)
• Sakai Tribe – Sumatra
• Alas Tribe – Sumatra
• Devayan Tribe – Sumatra
• Haloban Tribe – Sumatra
• Kluet Tribe – Sumatra
• The Lekon Tribe – Sumatra
• Pakpak tribe – Sumatra
• The Sigulai Tribe – Sumatra
• Singkil Tribe – Sumatra
• Tamiang Tribe – Sumatra
• Aneuk Jamee Tribe – Sumatra (Aceh)
• Nias Tribe – Sumatra
• Mentawai Tribe – Sumatra
• Sea Tribe – Sumatra
• Belitung Tribe – Sumatra
• Bangka Tribe – Sumatra
• The Inner Child Tribe – Sumatra
• The Great Wood Tribe – Sumatra
• Palembang-Sumatra tribe
• Banjar Tribe – Kalimantan
• Kutai Tribe – Borneo
• Berau Tribe – Borneo
• Paser Tribe – Kalimantan
• Balinese – Balinese
• Loloan Tribe – Bali
• Bima Tribe – West Nusa Tenggara
• Sumbawa Tribe – West Nusa Tenggara
• The Boti Tribe – East Nusa Tenggara
• Bunak Tribe – East Nusa Tenggara
• Manggarai Tribe – East Nusa Tenggara
• Sika Tribe – East Nusa Tenggara
• The Sumba Tribe – East Nusa Tenggara
• The Rote Tribe – East Nusa Tenggara
• Ngada Tribe – East Nusa Tenggara
• Ende Tribe – East Nusa Tenggara
• Gorontalo Tribe – North Sulawesi
• Kaidipang Tribe – North Sulawesi
• Minahasa Tribe – North Sulawesi
• Mongondow Tribe – North Sulawesi
• Sangir Tribe – North Sulawesi
• Bungku Tribe – Central Sulawesi
• Balesang Tribe – Central Sulawesi
• Balantak Tribe – Central Sulawesi
• Wakatobi Tribe – Southeast Sulawesi
• Fordata Tribe – Maluku
• Mamale Tribe – Maluku
• Nuaulu Tribe – Maluku
• Morotai Tribe – Maluku
• Halmahera Tribe – Maluku
• Wemale Tribe – Maluku
• The Wai Apu Tribe – Maluku
• Tribe of Ternate – Maluku
• Tidore Tribe – Maluku
• Seram Tribe – Maluku
• Sawai tribe – Maluku
• Aero Tribe – Papua

Those are most of the tribes in Indonesia, although of course there are many other tribes that we haven’t explored in more depth. I hope this information is helpful!

Also read articles related to “Ethnic Nations in Indonesia” :

• Dimensions of Pancasila as an Open Ideology
• History of Pancasila
• Understanding Pancasila as a Source of Value
• The Meaning and Meaning of Pancasila as State Ideology
• Understanding Pancasila Democracy
• History of the Garuda Pancasila Coat of Arms
• Understanding Archipelagic Insight
• The Meaning of Pancasila as the Source of All Sources of Law
• Meaning of the Youth Pledge
• The Practice of Pancasila Values

Source: from various sources

List of Traditional Weapons for 34 Provinces in Indonesia – Sinaumed’s, have you ever seen traditional weapons? Usually, traditional weapons can be seen in museums or when someone wears traditional clothes. The existence of this traditional weapon is a legacy from our ancestors that are spread throughout Indonesia.

The territory of Indonesia is divided into several islands, namely Sumatra Island, Java Island, Kalimantan Island, Sulawesi Island, Bali Island, Papua Island, Nusa Tenggara Islands and the Maluku Islands. Each of these islands consists of various provinces that have a variety of traditional weapons. Traditional weapons are characteristic of the culture of each province.

Before having separate traditional weapons in each region, our ancestors used to make weapons for hunting or protecting themselves from animals. In primitive times, the traditional weapons used were wooden or bamboo hunting tools. Furthermore, during the Stone Age, traditional wooden-stemmed stone weapons were used.

Traditional weapons are used by people from various regions in Indonesia. Its function is to protect oneself, face challenges, attack enemies, fight, hunt and so on. Studying traditional weapons from Indonesia’s 34 provinces is a great way to get to know Indonesia’s cultural heritage.

Each province develops weapons with manufacturing techniques passed down from generation to generation. A province may have more than one weapon, depending on the needs of the local community. This article will discuss one Indonesian traditional weapon from each province which is summarized from the book Introduction to Traditional Weapons written by Rahmat M.

Indonesian Traditional Weapons

Indonesia is divided into 34 provinces with various traditional weapons as follows.

1. Rencong from Aceh

Rencong is a traditional weapon from Aceh province. The shape resembles the letter L and is similar to a dagger. The handle is in the form of Arabic letters and is taken from the equivalent of the word bismillah. This bismillah sentence is a symbol that shows the characteristics of the Acehnese people who strongly adhere to the glory of Islamic teachings. Rencong began to be used in 1514-1528, namely during the time of Sultan Ali Mughayat Syah ruled the kingdom of Aceh.

2. Hujor from North Sumatra

Hujor traditional weapons come from North Sumatra. This weapon is a spear found in the Batak tribe. Hujors were made of metal and were used for hunting and war. The shape of the hujor resembles a flat leaf and is about 25 centimeters long and 5.5 centimeters wide. The stalk of this traditional weapon is made of wood with a length of two meters.

3. Jenawi Sword from Riau

According to the book Immortalizing Riau: Book II Anthology of Cultural Essays , the Jenawi sword is the most popular traditional weapon in Riau. The Jenawi sword was used by commanders during the royal war. In ancient times, only powerful, respected, and intelligent people could possess this sword. At first glance, the Jenawi sword is similar to the katana sword used by samurai in Japan.

4. Badik Tumbuk Lada from the Riau Archipelago

Pepper-mashed badik is a traditional keris type weapon found in the Riau Archipelago. This weapon is used for stabbing, slicing, and colonizing in short-range combat. According to Riau custom, if the pepper-mashed badik has been pulled from the scabbard, something must be stabbed, such as an object or an animal. The length of this traditional weapon is around 27-29 centimeters. The width of the blade is about 3.5-4 centimeters. At the base of the back of the sarong there is a translucent carving of a flat round shape.

5. Career from West Sumatra

The traditional weapon of West Sumatra is a karih or keris. Karih is usually worn by men and placed in front of the waist. Karih includes stabbing or sharp weapons used for self-defense.

6. Arrowhead Spear from Jambi

The arrowhead spear in terms of the Kerinci area is called Kuju. This weapon was made in the Sungai Full area and is still being produced today. The arrowhead spear consists of arrowheads, nipples, ears, stalks, and manau coating iron. The size of the handle of this weapon is about one meter and the head is 20 centimeters long. The color of the stalk is yellow and the head is black. The material for making arrowheads is selected iron which is burned to a certain degree of heat. The stalk is made of bamboo or manau. Traditionally, the pike is bathed twice a year for treatment and smoked with incense.

7. Kerambi from Bengkulu

Kerambit is a traditional Bengkulu weapon that has a special form and use. The curved shape of the kerambit can only be used by people who are good at martial arts. The kerambit is made to order by a skilled blacksmith. Its main ingredient is iron containing steel. The length is 12 centimeters with a base width of 2 centimeters, while the upper part is 8 centimeters long and the skeleton is 13 centimeters.

8. Siwar from South Sumatra

The traditional siwar weapon comes from Lahat Regency, South Sumatra Province. This weapon is also known as badik. The difference lies in the back of the eye. Badik is usually called straight back siwar. Siwar is an heirloom weapon and is currently no longer mass-produced. Only a few heirs and public figures can make this weapon.

9. Parang from the Bangka Belitung Islands

Based on the book The Beautiful Island of Bangka Belitung , the traditional weapon of the people of the Bangka Belitung Islands is in the form of a machete. This weapon is used for short range fights. The tip of the machete is made wide and heavy to increase the weight so that the target can be cut quickly. Medium-sized machetes are used for felling trees because the tips are bigger and heavier.

10. Spear or Payan from Lampung

The spear according to the Lampung language is called payan. Based on its shape, spears are divided into long and short spears. The long spear is a spear that has a wooden hilt measuring more than 150 centimeters, while the short spear is a spear whose handle is no more than 90 centimeters. Both types of spears have spearheads measuring 34 to 40 centimeters. Spears are classified into four categories, namely heirlooms, hunting tools, ceremonial tools, and religious objects.

11. Mandau from West Kalimantan

Mandau is a traditional machete-type weapon that comes from the culture of the Dayak tribe in Kalimantan. The traditional mandau weapon is carried by the owner wherever he goes because this serves as a person’s honor and identity. In ancient times, the saber was considered to have magical powers so it was only used in certain events, such as war, traditional dance equipment, and ceremonies. The mandau section consists of a blade, handle and sheath.

12. Chopsticks from East Kalimantan

Traditional weapons from East Kalimantan are not much different from West Kalimantan. Mandau is also used by the Dayak tribe in East Kalimantan. There are also chopsticks as traditional weapons. Chopsticks are usually used for hunting and war, as well as traditional Dayak ceremonies or weddings. How to use this traditional weapon by blowing.

According to Dayak beliefs, chopsticks should not be used to kill others. This traditional weapon has a length of 1.9-2.1 meters. Meanwhile, the diameter of the chopsticks is around 2-3 centimeters with a hole in the middle with a hole diameter of about 1 centimeter. This hole serves to insert the chopsticks.

13. The Bujak Beliung Keris from South Kalimantan

The bujak beliung keris is a traditional weapon from South Kalimantan that is up to 30 centimeters long. Its distinctive feature lies in the typical South Kalimantan carving motifs because in it there will be its own philosophy.

14. Dohong from Central Kalimantan

Dohong is a traditional weapon of the Dayak people in Kalimantan. Dohong is shaped like a dagger, but bigger and sharper. Hulu dohong is made of horns. Meanwhile, the scabbard is made of wood. This traditional weapon is only used by tribal chiefs, demang, and basir.

15. Ciomas machete from Banten

The ciomas machete is a typical traditional weapon from Banten, especially in the Ciomas area. This machete is very famous for its sharpness and the mystique contained in it. According to the book Overview of Banten Culture , during the colonial era warriors used this machete to expel invaders. The ciomas machete is only made in the month of birth of the Prophet Muhammad and must go through a special ritual and placement of iron. This traditional weapon is noted for its balance of shape, sharpness, and smooth forging.

16. Machete from DKI Jakarta

Golok is a traditional weapon of the Betawi people in DKI Jakarta. In the past, the Betawi people used machetes to decorate their waists, both inside and outside the home to protect themselves from attacks by criminals. In the Betawi community, the existence of the machete is strongly influenced by the culture of West Java which surrounds it. The difference between the two can be seen from the shape model and the name. The Betawi people divide the golok into four, namely the gobang gobang, the betok golok, the badik badik, and the tip down golok.

17. Kujang from West Java

The traditional cleaver weapon comes from West Java. This weapon has a unique shape with a bulge at the base, jagged on one side and curved at the end. The cleaver is about 20-30 centimeters long and 5 centimeters wide. In the eyes there are 1-5 holes. Kujang weighs approximately 300 grams.

19. Central Java Keris

Keris is a traditional weapon that can be found in Central Java. Kerises come in various forms, for example, some have curved blades and some have straight blades. The procedure for using a keris varies in each region. For example, in the area of ​​Java, a keris is placed at the back of the waist during times of peace, but is placed at the front during times of war.

20. Keris from DI Yogyakarta

Yogyakarta’s traditional weapon is the keris. Keris is a kind of sharp weapon made of metal. The parts of the keris include the wilah (blade), warangka (sheath), and carving (handle of the keris).

21. Celurit from East Java

Celurit is a traditional weapon of the Madurese people in East Java. Celurit has the shape of a curved blade. In the past, celurit was just a sickle that was often used by farmers to mow the grass in the fields and make fences for their houses. Later, the sickle was turned into a self-defense tool used by the people when facing enemies. Curved sickle shape resembling a crescent moon. Celurit made of iron or steel. The sickle blade was tightly tied to the hilt. While the handle is made of wood.

22. Keris from Bali

Balinese people use traditional keris weapons to defend themselves and represent someone to attend a wedding invitation. In addition, they have a belief that the keris can cure someone from the bites of venomous animals by soaking the keris in water. Various Balinese keris carvings. Some have the form of statues of gods, statues of pedanda, dancers, giants, horse heads, and so on. The handle of the keris is made of wood, but some are decorated with gems. Usually the handle of the keris is rather large and long.

23. Sundu from East Nusa Tenggara

Sundu is a traditional weapon from East Nusa Tenggara that resembles a dagger. The people of East Nusa Tenggara consider weapons as sacred objects. Sundu is straight. The shape of the handle or hilt resembles the shape of a bird’s wing. Meanwhile, the sundu sarong has a circular horizontal motif. Also Read Komodo Island, Exotic Tourist Attractions in East Nusa Tenggara

24. Sampari from West Nusa Tenggara

Sampari is a kind of keris from West Nusa Tenggara. This traditional weapon comes from the eastern part of Sumbawa Island.

25. Wamilo from Gorontalo

Wamilo is a traditional weapon from Gorontalo which is shaped like a machete. The difference is that the wamilo has a slightly downward curved tip.

26. Badik from West Sulawesi

Badik is a traditional weapon originating from West Sulawesi and South Sulawesi. This weapon is used by the Malay community. The shape resembles a knife but has a deep curvature at the tip.

27. Pasatimpo from Central Sulawesi

Pasatimpo is a traditional machete-type weapon originating from Central Sulawesi. Pasatimpo has a length of approximately 40 centimeters and is made of copper or brass. The hilt was crooked and the scabbard was tied with a rope.

28. Peda from North Sulawesi

Peda is a traditional weapon originating from North Sulawesi. Peda is a type of machete used for farming or tapping palm sugar. The peda is short with a size of 50 centimeters and is made of iron.

29. Javelin from Southeast Sulawesi

The spear or javelin is a traditional weapon from Southeast Sulawesi which is also used in other areas. The javelin was used for hunting animals, for war, for ceremonial purposes and as a hereditary heirloom.

30. Badik from South Sulawesi

Badik is a traditional weapon originating from Malay, Makassar, Bugis and Mandar in South Sulawesi and West Sulawesi which is short in size. This traditional weapon is shaped like a dagger. Badik is made of iron, steel and prestige. The length of the blade is between 20-30 centimeters, not including the hilt.

31. Parang Sawalaku from North Maluku

The sawalaku machete is a traditional weapon typical of the Maluku region in the form of a machete and shield. The machete is 90-100 centimeters long. The machete is made of special iron. The head of the machete is made of iron wood or gapusa wood. Meanwhile, my sawala (shield) is decorated with motifs that symbolize courage. Sawalaku is made of hard wood. The sawalaku machete is used for war purposes and for hunting animals.

32. Spear from the Moluccas

Spear is a traditional weapon found in Maluku. Spears are used to catch fish. The spear section consists of a stick as a handle and a sharp eye (spear head). Spearheads are made of iron or steel. The spearhead is straight, sharp on both sides, and pointed at the end.

33. Dagger from Papua

The dagger is a traditional weapon in Papua which is made from the leg bone of the cassowary bird. The hilt of the dagger is also decorated with cassowary bird feathers. Daggers are used for hunting or war.

34. Bow and Arrow from West Papua

Similar to Papua, daggers are also used as traditional weapons in West Papua. In addition, there are also traditional bow and arrow weapons. Bows are made of bamboo or wood. While the bowstring is made of rattan. The arrows are made of bamboo, wood or bone.

So, that’s a brief explanation of the List of Traditional Weapons for 34 Provinces in Indonesia . sinaumedia can also visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com to obtain references about other traditional weapons in Indonesia. The following are recommendations for sinaumedia books that Sinaumed’s can read to study them in full. Happy reading.

Find other interesting things at www.sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

• History, Meaning, Property, and Origin of the Umbrella Dance
• History, Meaning, Property, and Origin of Seudati Dance
• The History of the Origin of Serimpi Dance: Resistance Against Colonizers
• History and Origin of Pakarena Fan Dance
• Dance: Definition, Elements, Functions, and Types
• Saman Dance: Definition, History, and Meaning of Movement

The Most Frequently Used Mathematical Formulas – Mathematics for some people is considered a subject that makes a headache and belongs to a category that is not too much interested in. Maybe this assumption is due to the unpleasant experience when learning these calculations, starting from the teacher teaching, lots of assignments or homework, classmates laughing at you when you can’t do it, and so on.

The bad experience that was experienced became material for stories from one person to another which could have made other people afraid and considered mathematics as a difficult subject.

Fear of mathematics can make people feel uncomfortable, stressed, and can even lead to paranoia.

The person will feel excessive fear when learning mathematics. Myths like this must be dispelled so that people don’t feel afraid when they have to solve questions related to arithmetic.

Mathematics does have many formulas that are used, but basically most of these formulas are often used. Mathematical formulas that are often used are usually easy to find in life.

List of Most Often Used Mathematical Formulas

No need to memorize math formulas, just understand them carefully because if we apply the method of memorizing formulas it might just evaporate.

Formulas that are interpreted by rote learning models usually do not last long in memory. Imagine that there are tens to hundreds of mathematical formulas that if memorized will definitely make you dizzy and won’t last long to remember.

On the other hand, if you use the comprehension method to remember mathematical formulas, it will be stored longer and appear in a person’s unconscious. Actually, unconsciously formulas in mathematics are often found around us.

One of them is in the field of research where to solve the problems encountered, researchers use a lot of mathematical formulas in order to overcome existing problems.

Then what about mathematical formulas that can be applied in other situations? Below is a list of the most frequently used mathematical formulas in everyday life.

1. Discount formula

Have you ever taken a walk in a shopping center to see nice clothes being sold at one of the outlets that offer discounts of up to 50%?

For those who like shopping, they might be very interested in buying it, but have you ever calculated how much money you have to pay from the discount given. Here you need to use mathematical calculations. The mathematical formula used to calculate the discount is:

Discount Price = (% Discount) x Item Price

In order to better understand the discount formula, consider the following questions.

While shopping at the mall, Raisa saw a nice dress that she wanted. When approached, it turns out that the clothing store is giving a discount of 40%. The clothes are valued at Rp. 120,000.00. How much money does Raisa have to pay to get the shirt?

It is known that:
Discount = 40%
Price of clothes = IDR 120,000.00
Discounted price = (% discount) x Goods price
Discounted price = (40/100) x 120,000.00
Discounted price = 48,000

So, the discounted price of the item is Rp. 48,000.00 so that the total money Raisa has to pay is IDR 120,000.00 – IDR 48,000.00 = IDR 72,000.00.

2. Calculating Interest in the Banking System

The mathematical formula that is often used next is the formula for calculating bank interest. Bank interest is divided into two, namely bank interest and savings interest. Bank interest is the amount of money that must be paid from the customer to the bank as remuneration for using the facilities at the bank.

Meanwhile, interest on savings accounts is the amount of money paid by the bank to customers for saving money in the bank. For those who often save their money in the bank, bank interest and savings interest will be obtained every month. The formula for calculating interest in the banking system is as follows:

Interest per month = (Loan amount/number of months) x % interest

Below is an example of calculating the amount of bank interest.

Agnes plans to open a franchise in the form of a cafe at her college. However, he did not have enough funds, so he planned to borrow some money from the bank to run his business. Agnes borrowed a total of IDR 15,000,000.00 from Bank A and paid it in installments within one year. The bank interest rate set by Bank A is 2% per month. How much installments must Agnes pay each month?

It is known that:
Amount of loan = IDR 15,000,000.00
Installments = 1 year (12 months)
Bank interest rate = 2%
Interest per month = (loan size/number of months) x % interest Interest
per month = (15,000,000/12) x 2/100
Interest per month = 25,000

So, the amount of interest per month is IDR 25,000, so Agnes has to pay monthly installments of IDR 1,250,000.00 + IDR 25,000.00 = IDR 1,275,000.00.

3. Formulas for Speed, Distance, and Time

The third frequently used mathematical formula is about distance, speed, and time. We often encounter its use, for example when we ride a motorcycle from one place to another, we have to take into account how fast the motorcycle is so that we are not late.

Then this formula can also be used to calculate trans bus queues so that every few minutes passengers can be transported from one place to another. The formula used is as follows.

V = S/t
Description:
V : speed (km/hour)
S : distance (km)
t : time (hour)

The formula above is a formula for calculating speed that can be developed to find distance and time.

Time formula:
t = S/V
Distance formula:
S = tx V

To make it easier to understand this formula, consider the following two example questions

Father now works in a well-known company in the city. There is a rule that every employee is prohibited from arriving late. Office time is 07.30 and Dad estimates that he will be at the office at 07.00 so he has to leave at 06.30. Father drives his vehicle at a speed of 50 km / hour. How far is the house from the office?

Given:
Time (t) = 06.30 – 07.30 = 30 minutes (1/2 hour)
Speed ​​(V) = 50 km
S = tx V
S = ½ x 50
S = 25

So the distance between the house and the office where Dad works is 25 km.

The city of Semarang implements a public transportation system called BRT (Bus Rapid Transit) for the people of Semarang. Every 10 minutes there must be a bus that stops at the next stop to transport people. The distance between stops is 10 km. What is the speed of the BRT so that every 10 minutes it can carry passengers at each stop?

Given :
Time (t) = 10 minutes (1/6 hour)
Distance (S) = 10 km
V = S/t
V = 10 / 1/6
V = 60

Then the speed of the BRT so that every 10 minutes it stops at the next stop is 60 km/hour.

4. Permutations and Combinations

The four mathematical formulas that are often used are permutations and combinations. In everyday life, this formula might be useful for you to use. When you are holding a meeting at a meeting, have you ever imagined how to arrange the seats according to the order you have predicted. If you have trouble arranging them, you can use the permutation formula.

As for what is meant by Permutation is a formula used to find out the possibility of something happening based on a predetermined sequence. Meanwhile, the combination formula is used to calculate the probability that an event will occur without regard to the sequence that may occur.

Both permutations and combinations are used to calculate the probability of occurrence of a possibility, the difference is that permutations must pay attention to order, whereas combinations do not pay attention to order. The permutation and combination formulas are:

Permutations :
P (n,r) = n! / (nr)!
Information:
P = permutation
n = total objects overall
r = total objects that are used as sequences
! = factorial

Combination:
nCr = n! / (r! (nr)!)
Information:
C = combination
n = total objects overall
r = total objects observed
! = factorial

To make it easier to understand what the concept of permutations and combinations looks like, consider the example questions below.

A competition was attended by 5 teams A, B, C, D, and E to fight for the champion. The committee provides places for 1st, 2nd and 3rd place winners. What is the probability that the team will win the competition?

It is known that:
n = 5
r = 3

Because it takes order into account, the permutation formula
P (n,r) = n is used! / (nr)!
P(5,3) = 5! / (5-3)!
P(5,3) = 5! / 2!
P(5.3) = 5 x 4 x 3 x 2 x 1 / 2 x 1
P(5.3) = 120/2
P(5.3) = 60

Then there are 60 possible ways the winner will appear in the race.

Clara will depart for Yogyakarta from Semarang today. He will go by bus. There are 6 buses ready to depart. Clara only chose 2 buses that she wanted to take. How many ways does Clara choose the bus?

It is known that:
N = 6
R = 2

Because it does not take into account the order, the combination formula
nCr = n! / (r! (nr)!)
6C2 = 6! / (2! (6-2)!)
6C2 = 6! / (2! x 4!)
6C2 = 15

Then there are 15 ways for Clara to choose which bus she will take.

5. Slice and Join Sets

Slices and unions are mathematical formulas that are often used in solving problems related to sets or calculations. An intersection or intersection is a set of two parts (A and B) or more whose members include members of the same set A or B.

Meanwhile, a union or union is a set whose members come from two sets, set A or set B. As the name implies, a union combines two sets into one. Slices are denoted by the symbol (∩) while the combined symbol is (∪). The following questions make it easier for you to understand what intersections and unions look like.

Set A = {1, 3, 5, 6} while Set B = {1, 3, 4}. What is the intersection set and the combined set of the two?

Given:
A = {1, 3, 5, 6}
B = {1, 3, 4}

The intersection set becomes A ∩ B = {1, 3, 5} while the combined set A ∪ B = {1, 3, 4, 5, 6}

When depicted with a diagram it will become:

Another example is as follows:

A food consumption survey was conducted in grade 12 of a high school in Semarang City. There are 17 students who like to eat meatballs, 23 students like to eat chicken noodles, and 10 students like both. What is the total number of students who took part in the survey?

It is known:
Likes meatballs = 17
Likes chicken noodles = 23
Likes meatballs and chicken noodles = 10 people

When depicted with a diagram it will become:

Because there are 10 people who like meatballs and chicken noodles, to find out students who only like chicken meatballs and noodles are deducted by 10 each.

Only likes meatballs : 17-10 = 7 people
Only likes chicken noodles : 23-10 = 13 people

So the total number of students who took part in the survey was 7+10+13 = 30 students.

6. Arithmetic Line or Series

The last mathematical formula that is often used is arithmetic. In arithmetic, it can be classified into two, namely arithmetic rows and arithmetic series. An arithmetic row is a sequence of numbers whose differences between terms are always the same (consistent).

While the arithmetic series is the sum of the numbers or the total number of terms that are formed in one series. You can find arithmetic lines or series when you compare your pocket money at school.

For example, when you are in grade 1, your pocket money is Rp. 1,000.00, then when you go up to grade two, your pocket money is Rp. 3,000.00. When you are in grade 3 it becomes IDR 5,000.00. That is what is called an arithmetic row.

Your pocket money consistently increases by Rp. 2,000.00 when you go to class. You can find an arithmetic series when you look at cinema seats, where the number of seats is different for each row, for example, the first row has 7 seats, the second row has 9 seats, and the third row has 11 seats. To find out the number of seats left, you just add each row so that there are a total of 27 seats.

If the number of tribes or lines you are looking for is small, you can still count them, but if the number reaches hundreds, it will certainly be a headache and a hassle if you have to add them up one by one. It’s better if you use a formula to make it easier to calculate. The arithmetic row and series formulas are as follows:

Arithmetic Row:
Un = a + (n-1) xb

Information:
Un = line syllable
a = first term
n = many tribes
b = difference or difference in numbers

Arithmetic Series:
Sn = n/2 x (a+Un)

Information:
Sn = number of terms
a = first term
n = many terms
b = difference or difference in numbers

To understand this, consider the following questions.

Chelsea buys marbles every day. On Monday buy 2 marbles, Tuesday 4 marbles, Wednesday 6 marbles, and so on until Sunday. On Sunday how many marbles does Chelsea buy?

Given:
a = 2
b = 2
n = 7 (Monday-Sunday)
Un = a + (n-1) xb
U7 = 2 + (7-1) x 2
U7 = 14

So on Sunday Chelsea will buy 14 marbles.

Dilan works as a cleaning service in a cinema building. He will clean the first building. The first row has 10 seats, the second row has 12 seats, the third row has 14 seats, and so on up to 10 rows. How many seats will Dilan clean?

Given:
a = 10
b = 2
n = 10

Because the number of seats in the 10th row is unknown, first find the seats in the 10th row using the arithmetic row formula
Un = a + (n-1) xb
U10 = 10 + (10-1) x 2
U10 = 28
Sn = n /2 x (a+Un)
Sn = 10/2 x (10+28)
Sn = 190

So, the total seats cleaned by dilan are 190.

7. Flat Build Formulas

a. Rectangle

A square is a type of flat shape. A square has 4 sides. All four sides are the same length. The angles of all four sides are 90° or right angles. The opposite sides of a square are always parallel. To calculate a square, there are two formulas. The formula for the area of ​​a square and the formula for the perimeter of a square.

The formula for the area of ​​a square (side times side), or:

L = s × s

The formula for the perimeter of a square (4s), or:

K = 4 × s

b. Rectangle

A rectangle is almost similar to a square, it has 4 sides. However, the sides of a rectangle are not all the same size. A rectangle has two pairs of parallel sides that are the same length. The four corners of the rectangle are also right angles.

The two pairs of sides in a rectangle consist of the long side and the short side. The short side is the length of the rectangle. While the short side is the width. To calculate a rectangle, there are two formulas. The formula for the area of ​​a rectangle and the formula for the perimeter of a rectangle.

The formula for the area of ​​a rectangle (length X width), or:

L = p × l

The formula for the perimeter of a square (4s) or:

K = 2 × (p + l)

c. Triangle

A triangle is a flat shape that only has 3 sides. In addition, a triangle also has 3 vertices. All the sides and angles in a triangle are different sizes.

Triangles based on the length of the sides are divided into several types. equilateral triangle, isosceles triangle and any triangle. Meanwhile, triangles based on their angles are also divided into 3. Right triangles, obtuse triangles and acute triangles. To calculate a triangle, there are two formulas. Triangle area formula and triangle perimeter formula.

The formula for the area of ​​a triangle (base times height divided by two), or:

L = ½ × a × t

The formula for the perimeter of a triangle (adding all sides), is:

K = a + b + c

d. Trapezoid

A trapezoid is a flat shape that is a quadrilateral but has a pair of parallel sides. The length of the sides can be different. To calculate the trapezoid, there are two formulas. The formula for the area of ​​a trapezoid and the formula for the perimeter of a trapezoid.

The formula for the area of ​​a trapezoid:

L = ½ × (a + b) × t

Trapezoid circumference formula:

K = AB + BC + CD + DA

e. Parallelogram

A parallelogram is a flat shape that has four sides. It is a quadrilateral, opposite sides are parallel and the same length. In addition, a parallelogram has equal and opposite angles. To calculate a parallelogram, there are two formulas. The formula for the area of ​​a parallelogram and the formula for the perimeter of a parallelogram.

The formula for the area of ​​a parallelogram:

L = a × t

The formula for the perimeter of a parallelogram:

K = 2 × (a + b)

f. Kite

Kites are flat shapes that have four sides, or are rectangular in shape. Kites are divided based on the diagonal shape. The two diagonals have different sizes and are perpendicular. Kites have two pairs of sides that are the same length and close together. To calculate kites, there are two formulas. The formula for the area of ​​a kite and the formula for the circumference of a kite.

The formula for the area of ​​a kite:

L = ½ x diagonal (d) 1 x diagonal (d) 2

The way to calculate the diagonal is:

Diagonal 1 (d1) = 2 × L ÷ d2

Diagonal 2 (d2) = d2 = 2 × L ÷ d1

Kite circumference formula:

K = a + b + c + d or Kll = 2 × (a + c)

g. Cut the rice cake

A rhombus is also a flat shape in the form of a quadrilateral. The four sides of a rhombus are the same length. The two diagonals of a rhombus are perpendicular. The lengths of the sides that are opposite are parallel.

Meanwhile, the angles of the opposite rhombus are the same. A rhombus has four corners. The two angles are acute or more closed. While the other two are obtuse angles or more open. To calculate a rhombus, there are two formulas. The formula for the area of ​​a rhombus and the formula for the circumference of a rhombus.

The formula for the area of ​​a rhombus:

L = ½ x diagonal (d) 1 x diagonal (d) 2

The formula for the circumference of a rhombus:

K = s + s + s + s or s × 4

h. Circle

The circle also includes a flat shape. The circle is formed from a set of all the points around it. These points surround a point and have the same distance. The distance is r or radius, or referred to as the radius.

Circles have an infinite number of rotational and folded symmetries. To calculate a circle, there are two formulas. The formula for the area of ​​a circle and the formula for the circumference of a circle.

Circle area formula:

L = π (pi) x radius (r) squared

Circumference formula:

K = π × diameter or π × r 2

8. The formula for building space

a. Cube

The cube is a geometric shape. A cube has a flat side and six square sides. Each side is identical in size on each. The cube has 12 edges that are the same length. 8 corner points, 12 diagonal fields and 4 diagonal spaces. A cube can be measured by measuring its volume.

Cube Volume Formula:

V = sxsxs

b. Beam

A block is one of the geometric shapes, almost like a cube. A beam is a geometric shape consisting of three pairs of rectangular sides. The three sides face each other. Other than that, they are the same size and shape.

A block also has two pairs of sides. One is rectangular and the other is rectangular. A beam is a geometric shape composed of several components. These components are angles, sides, diagonal spaces, diagonal fields and diagonal fields.

Block Volume Formula:

V = pxlxt

c. Prism

Prism is a geometric shape consisting of a base and a top. The base and top are the same size. Inside the prism shape, there is a vertical side with a rectangular shape. In addition, there are also parallelograms and squares.

A prism is a building that depends on the sides of its base and top. Therefore, this prism building consists of several types.

When viewed from the shape of the base and roof, there are rectangular prisms, triangular prisms and so on. When viewed from the perpendicular component, there are upright prisms and oblique prisms.

Prism volume formula:

V = Area of ​​the triangle x height

d. Pyramid

Limas is a geometric shape with flat sides. Composed on an n-shaped base. has triangular sides. The sides will meet at a single top point. The pyramid is composed of 5 sides, 5 vertices and 8 edges.

There are many kinds of pyramid pedestals. Like rectangles, triangles, rhombuses, and so on. Based on the shape of the base there are rectangular pyramids, triangular pyramids, rectangular pyramids and others.

The formula for the volume of a pyramid

V = 1/3 Base Area x Height

e. Cone

A cone is a geometric shape that has curved sides. The cone is composed of a circular base. The circle will be covered by a triangle. A cone has 2 sides and 1 vertex. A cone has no plane diagonal edges or diagonal planes.

Cone volume formula:

V = 1/3 x π xrxrxt

f. Tube

The next room build is a tube. A tube is a geometric shape whose sides are curved. In addition, the tube has a circular base and lid. The sides of the tube are rectangles.

Tubes do not have edges, corners, diagonal planes and even diagonal planes. The sides of the shape are composed of 3 sides. Those sides are 1 rectangle and 2 circles. The height of the tube will be determined from the distance between the center points of the base and top circles.

Cylinder volume formula:

V = π x r2 xt

g. Ball

A sphere is a geometric figure bounded by a curved plane. The ball has no vertices, edges, diagonals and plane diagonals. The definite components in a ball are the radius and diameter.

The radius is the distance from the ball wall towards the center point. The diameter is the distance from one ball wall to another, this distance will pass through the center point.

Sphere volume formula

V = 4/3 x π x r3

Also read articles related to “The Most Frequently Used Mathematical Formulas”:

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Those are some mathematical formulas that are often used and often encountered in everyday life. In essence, you don’t need to memorize all the formulas in mathematics by heart, you just need to understand how the existing formulas work so that when you forget the details of the formula but you understand how it works it will help you.

Besides being useful for ourselves, we can also help other people who might need help to solve the problems they face. you just need to understand it so you won’t have any trouble if you encounter a problem. Apart from that, you also have to understand units in mathematics and how to convert them, especially if you work in sales, this is very important for you to understand.

List of Roman Numerals and How to Write Them – Do you often pay attention to the writing of roads in addresses where there are still numbers written, for example Jl. Orchid I, don’t use the number 1. Why is that?

Roman numerals or Roman numerals are a numbering system inherited from ancient Rome. This numbering system uses Latin letters as symbols to represent numeric numbers.

Roman numeral function

• Names of kings and popes, for example Elizabeth II of England, Pope Benedict XVI . This is known as the regnal number and is usually read as ordinal ; e.g. II is pronounced “the second”.
• Generation suffixes or order of generations, especially in the US, for people who share the same name across generations, for example William Howard Taft IV.
• In the French Republican Calendar, beginning during the French Revolution, years are numbered with Roman numerals – from the year I (1792) when it was introduced to the year XIV (1805) when it was abandoned.
• Years of production of films, television shows, and other works of art within the work itself.
• Hour mark on watch. In this context, 4 is often written IIII .
• Years of construction on building surfaces and capstones.
• Preface and preface page numbering, and sometimes appendices and appendices as well.
• Book volume and chapter numbers, and several acts in a play (eg Act iii , Scene 2).
• Sequel to several films, video games, and other works (as in Rocky II).
• An outline that uses numbers to show hierarchical relationships.
• Recurring occurrence of major events, eg: Summer and Winter Olympic Games (eg XXI Winter Olympics ; XXX Olympic Games )
• In astronomy, the natural satellites or “moons” of planets are traditionally named with a Roman capital letter added to the planet’s name. For example, Titan’s designation is Saturn VI .
• In chemistry, Roman numerals are often used to denote groups of the periodic table. Roman numerals are also used in inorganic nomenclature, for the oxidation number of cations that can take on several different positive charges. Roman numerals are also used for naming the phases of polymorphic crystals, such as ice.
• In education, school grades (in terms of year groups rather than test scores) are sometimes referred to by Roman numerals; for example, “class IX” is sometimes seen for “class 9”.
• In advanced mathematics (including trigonometry , statistics , and calculus ), when a graph includes negative numbers, the quadrants are named using I , II , III , and IV .
• The names of these quadrants denote positive numbers on the two axes, negative numbers on the X axis, negative numbers on both axes, and negative numbers on the Y axis, respectively.
• In the designation of military units, roman numerals are often used to distinguish units at different levels. This reduces the possibility of confusion, especially when viewing operational or strategic level maps.
• Using Roman numerals to denote quadrants avoids confusion, as Arabic numerals are used for the actual data represented on the graph.
• In particular, army corps were often numbered using Roman numerals (eg the American XVIII Airborne Corps or WW2-era German Panzerkorps III) with Arabic numerals used for divisions and troops.
• Numbers in this system are represented by combinations of letters from the Latin alphabet. Modern usage uses seven symbols, each with a fixed integer value
• In law , roman numerals are usually used to help organize legal codes as part of an alphanumeric outline .
• Recurring occurrence of major events, eg:
  Summer and Winter Olympic Games (eg XXI Winter Olympics ; XXX Olympic Games )

History of Roman Numerals

One hypothesis states that the Roman numerals originated from scratched counts and were used by Italian and Dalmatian herders until the 19th century.

Although Roman numerals were written with the letters of the Roman alphabet, Roman numerals were originally independent symbols.

Etruscan, for example, uses 𐌠, 𐌡, 𐌢, ⋔, 𐌚, and ⊕ to write I, V, X, L, C, and M, meaning that only I and X are letters in their alphabet.

Therefore, (I) does not come from the letter (I), but from a vertical notch on the counting stick. Every multiple of five is double cut, eg ⋀, ⋁, ⋋, ⋌, etc., and every tenth is cross cut (X), (IIIIΛIIIIXIIIIΛIIIIXII…), more like the marks of today’s European talli.

This results in a system of positions: The eight on the tally stick is eight talli, IIIIΛIII. In another way, it can be shortened to ΛIII (or VIII), since the presence of Λ implies there have been four previous notches.

Furthermore, eighteen is the eighth thalli after the first ten thalli, which can be abbreviated as X, and becomes XΛIII. Similarly, the number four on a stick is the I notch before the Λ (V) cut, so it can be written as IIII or IΛ (IV).

Hence, the concept of this system is not addition or subtraction, but sequence (ordinal). When the talli were turned into writing, the signs that were not difficult to identify with the Roman letters at that time were I, V, and X.

In talli, the tenth V or X receives an additional stroke. Thus, 50 is written with variations such as N, И, K, Ψ, ⋔, etc., but perhaps the most common is the form of a chicken claw such as the overlapping V and I: ᗐ.

The shape was then straight up as ⊥ (an inverted T) until Augustus’ reign, and soon thereafter identified with its graphically resembling letter L.

Similarly, 100 is written in variations of Ж, ⋉, ⋈, H, or with the symbols for 50 as described above plus an extra stroke.

The Ж shape (the overlapping X and I) then becomes the dominant shape. The form was then written with variations >I< or ƆIC, then shortened to Ɔ or C, until finally the C variation was chosen because C stands for centum, Latin for “hundred”.
The use of Roman numerals continued long after the fall of the Roman Empire. From the 14th century, Roman numerals began to be replaced by Arabic numerals; However, this process was gradual, and the use of Roman numerals persists in some applications to this day.

Hmm.. reading history is quite long and complicated, isn’t it.

Roman numeral characters

As previously discussed, writing Roman numerals consists of several characters. However, when writing Roman numerals, do not use zero or you could say zero has no character.

This Roman numeral character can be divided into units of tens, hundreds, thousands, and so on. Any of these positions will not affect the Roman numerals. To be more clear, you can see the following examples. number 1 (I), number 10 (X), number 100 (C), number 1000 (M).

List of Roman Numerals 1 – 2000

Roman numerals use a total of seven Latin letters combined to form a specific number. Notice how to write the order. Let’s now get to know Roman numerals even further:

*If you don’t want to be complicated, you can use the site https://romannumerals.site/ to change from normal numbers to Roman numerals.

1. Roman numerals 1 – 100

Number	Roman numerals	Calculation
0	not defined
1	I	1
2	II	1+1
3	III	1+1+1
4	IV	5-1
5	V	5
6	VI	5+1
7	VII	5+1+1
8	VIII	5+1+1+1
9	IX	10-1
10	X	10
11	XI	10+1
12	XII	10+1+1
13	XIII	10+1+1+1
14	XIV	10-1+5
15	XV	10+5
16	XVI	10+5+1
17	XVII	10+5+1+1
18	XVIII	10+5+1+1+1
19	XIX	10-1+10
20	XX	10+10
21	XXI	10+10+1
22	XXII	10+10+1+1
23	XXIII	10+10+1+1+1
24	XXIV	10+10-1+5
25	XXV	10+10+5
26	XXVI	10+10+5+1
27	XXVII	10+10+5+1+1
28	XXVIII	10+10+5+1+1+1
29	XXIX	10+10-1+10
30	XXX	10+10+10
31	XXXI	10+10+10+1
32	XXXII	10+10+10+1+1
33	XXXIII	10+10+10+1+1+1
34	XXXIV	10+10+10-1+5
35	XXXV	10+10+10+5
36	XXXVI	10+10+10+5+1
37	XXXVII	10+10+10+5+1+1
38	XXXVIII	10+10+10+5+1+1+1
39	XXXIX	10+10+10-1+10
40	XL	50-10
41	XLI	50-10+1
42	XLII	50-10+1+1
43	XLIII	50-10+1+1+1
44	XLIV	50-10-1+5
45	XLV	50-10+5
46	XLVI	50-10+5+1
47	XLVII	50-10+5+1+1
48	XLVIII	50-10+5+1+1+1
49	XLIX	50-10-1+10
50	L	50
51	LI	50+1
52	LII	50+1+1
53	LIII	50+1+1+1
54	LIV	50-1+5
55	LV	50+5
56	Lvi	50+5+1
57	LVII	50+5+1+1
58	LVIII	50+5+1+1+1
59	LIX	50-1+10
60	lx	50+10
61	LXI	50+10+1
62	LXII	50+10+1+1
63	LXIII	50+10+1+1+1
64	LXIV	50+10-1+5
65	LXV	50+10+5
66	LXVI	50+10+5+1
67	LXVII	50+10+5+1+1
68	LXVIII	50+10+5+1+1+1
69	LXIX	50+10-1+10
70	LXX	50+10+10
71	LXXI	50+10+10+1
72	LXXII	50+10+10+1+1
73	LXXIII	50+10+10+1+1+1
74	LXXIV	50+10+10-1+5
75	LXXV	50+10+10+5
76	LXXVI	50+10+10+5+1
77	LXXVII	50+10+10+5+1+1
78	LXXVIII	50+10+10+5+1+1+1
79	LXXIX	50+10+10-1+10
80	LXXXX	50+10+10+10
81	LXXXXI	50+10+10+10+1
82	LXXXII	50+10+10+10+1+1
83	LXXXIII	50+10+10+10+1+1+1
84	LXXXXIV	50+10+10+10-1+5
85	LXXXXV	50+10+10+10+5
86	LXXXVI	50+10+10+10+5+1
87	LXXXVII	50+10+10+10+5+1+1
88	LXXXVIII	50+10+10+10+5+1+1+1
89	LXXXIX	50+10+10+10-1+10
90	XC	100-10
91	XCI	100-10+1
92	XCII	100-10+1+1
93	XCIII	100-10+1+1+1
94	XCIV	100-10-1+5
95	XCV	100-10+5
96	XCVI	100-10+5+1
97	XCVII	100-10+5+1+1
98	XCVIII	100-10+5+1+1+1
99	XCIX	100-10-1+10
100	C	100

2. Roman numerals 1 – 2000

1. I
2. II
3. III
4. IV
5. V
6. VI
7. VII
8. VIII
9. IX
10. X
11. XI
12. XII
13. XIII
14. XIV
15. XV
16. XVI
17. XVII
18. XVIII
19. XIX
20. XX
21. XXI
22. XXII
23. XXIII
24. XXIV
25. XXV
26. XXVI
27. XXVII
28. XXVIII
29. XXIX
30. XXX
31. XXXI
32. XXXII
33. XXXIII
34. XXXIV
35. XXXV
36. XXXVI
37. XXXVII
38. XXXVIII
39. XXXIX
40. XL
41. XLI
42. XLII
43. XLIII
44. XLIV
45. XLV
46. XLVI
47. XLVII
48. XLVIII
49. XLIX
50. L
51. LI
52. LII
53. LIII
54. LIV
55. LV
56. Lvi
57. LVII
58. LVIII
59. LIX
60. lx
61. LXI
62. LXII
63. LXIII
64. LXIV
65. LXV
66. LXVI
67. LXVII
68. LXVIII
69. LXIX
70. LXX
71. LXXI
72. LXXII
73. LXXIII
74. LXXIV
75. LXXV
76. LXXVI
77. LXXVII
78. LXXVIII
79. LXXIX
80. LXXXX
81. LXXXXI
82. LXXXII
83. LXXXIII
84. LXXXXIV
85. LXXXXV
86. LXXXVI
87. LXXXVII
88. LXXXVIII
89. LXXXIX
90. XC
91. XCI
92. XCII
93. XCIII
94. XCIV
95. XCV
96. XCVI
97. XCVII
98. XCVIII
99. XCIX
100. C
101. CI
102. CII
103. CIII
104. CIV
105. CV
106. CVI
107. CVII
108. CVIII
109. CIX
110. CX
111. CXI
112. CXII
113. CXIII
114. CXIV
115. CXV
116. CXVI
117. CXVII
118. CXVIII
119. CXIX
120. CXX
121. CXXI
122. CXXII
123. CXXIII
124. CXXIV
125. CXXV
126. CXXVI
127. CXXVII
128. CXXVIII
129. CXXIX
130. CXXX
131. CXXXI
132. CXXXII
133. CXXXIII
134. CXXXIV
135. CXXXV
136. CXXXVI
137. CXXXVII
138. CXXXVIII
139. CXXXIX
140. CXL
141. CXLI
142. CXLII
143. CXLIII
144. CXLIV
145. CXLV
146. CXLVI
147. CXLVII
148. CXLVIII
149. CXLIX
150. CL
151. CLI
152. CLII
153. CLIII
154. CLIV
155. CLV
156. CLVI
157. CLVII
158. CLVIII
159. CLIX
160. CLX
161. CLXI
162. CLXII
163. CLXIII
164. CLXIV
165. CLXV
166. CLXVI
167. CLXVII
168. CLXVIII
169. CLXIX
170. CLXX
171. CLXXI
172. CLXXII
173. CLXXIII
174. CLXXIV
175. CLXXV
176. CLXXVI
177. CLXXVII
178. CLXXVIII
179. CLXXIX
180. CLXXX
181. CLXXXI
182. CLXXXII
183. CLXXXIII
184. CLXXXIV
185. CLXXXV
186. CLXXXVI
187. CLXXXVII
188. CLXXXVIII
189. CLXXXIX
190. CXC
191. CXCI
192. CXCII
193. CXCIII
194. CXCIV
195. CXCV
196. CXCVI
197. CXCVII
198. CXCVIII
199. CXCIX
200. CC
201. CCI
202. CCII
203. CCIII
204. CCIV
205. CCV
206. CCVI
207. CCVII
208. CCVIII
209. CCIX
210. CCX
211. CCXI
212. CCXII
213. CCXIII
214. CCXIV
215. CCXV
216. CCXVI
217. CCXVII
218. CCXVIII
219. CCXIX
220. CCXX
221. CCXXI
222. CCXXII
223. CCXXIII
224. CCXXIV
225. CCXXV
226. CCXXVI
227. CCXXVII
228. CCXXVIII
229. CCXXIX
230. CCXXX
231. CCXXXI
232. CCXXXII
233. CCXXXIII
234. CCXXXIV
235. CCXXXV
236. CCXXXVI
237. CCXXXVII
238. CCXXXVIII
239. CCXXXIX
240. CCXL
241. CCXLI
242. CCXLII
243. CCXLIII
244. CCXLIV
245. CCXLV
246. CCXLVI
247. CCXLVII
248. CCXLVIII
249. CCXLIX
250. CCL
251. CCLI
252. CCLII
253. CCLIII
254. CCLIV
255. CCLV
256. CCLVI
257. CCLVII
258. CCLVIII
259. CCLIX
260. CCLX
261. CCLXI
262. CCLXII
263. CCLXIII
264. CCLXIV
265. CCLXV
266. CCLXVI
267. CCLXVII
268. CCLXVIII
269. CCLXIX
270. CCLXX
271. CCLXXI
272. CCLXXII
273. CCLXXIII
274. CCLXXIV
275. CCLXXV
276. CCLXXVI
277. CCLXXVII
278. CCLXXVIII
279. CCLXXIX
280. CCLXXX
281. CCLXXXI
282. CCLXXXII
283. CCLXXXIII
284. CCLXXXIV
285. CCLXXXV
286. CCLXXXVI
287. CCLXXXVII
288. CCLXXXVIII
289. CCLXXXIX
290. CCXC
291. CCXCI
292. CCXCII
293. CCXCIII
294. CCXCIV
295. CCXCV
296. CCXCVI
297. CCXCVII
298. CCXCVIII
299. CCXCIX
300. CCC
301. CCCI
302. CCCII
303. CCCIII
304. CCCIV
305. CCCV
306. CCCVI
307. CCCVII
308. CCCVIII
309. CCCIX
310. CCCX
311. CCCXI
312. CCCXII
313. CCCXIII
314. CCCXIV
315. CCCXV
316. CCCXVI
317. CCCXVII
318. CCCXVIII
319. CCCXIX
320. CCCXX
321. CCCXXI
322. CCCXXII
323. CCCXXIII
324. CCCXXIV
325. CCCXXV
326. CCCXXVI
327. CCCXXVII
328. CCCXXVIII
329. CCCXXIX
330. CCCXXX
331. CCCXXXI
332. CCCXXXII
333. CCCXXXIII
334. CCCXXXIV
335. CCCXXXV
336. CCCXXXVI
337. CCCXXXVII
338. CCCXXXVIII
339. CCCXXXIX
340. CCCXL
341. CCCXLI
342. CCCXLII
343. CCCXLIII
344. CCCXLIV
345. CCCXLV
346. CCCXLVI
347. CCCXLVII
348. CCCXLVIII
349. CCCXLIX
350. CCCL
351. CCCLI
352. CCCLII
353. CCCLIII
354. CCCLIV
355. CCCLV
356. CCCLVI
357. CCCLVII
358. CCCLVIII
359. CCCLIX
360. CCCLX
361. CCCLXI
362. CCCLXII
363. CCCLXIII
364. CCCLXIV
365. CCCLXV
366. CCCLXVI
367. CCCLXVII
368. CCCLXVIII
369. CCCLXIX
370. CCCLXX
371. CCCLXXI
372. CCCLXXII
373. CCCLXXIII
374. CCCLXXIV
375. CCCLXXV
376. CCCLXXVI
377. CCCLXXVII
378. CCCLXXVIII
379. CCCLXXIX
380. CCCLXXX
381. CCCLXXXI
382. CCCLXXXII
383. CCCLXXXIII
384. CCCLXXXIV
385. CCCLXXXV
386. CCCLXXXVI
387. CCCLXXXVII
388. CCCLXXXVIII
389. CCCLXXXIX
390. CCCXC
391. CCCXCI
392. CCCXCII
393. CCCXCIII
394. CCCXCIV
395. CCCXCV
396. CCCXCVI
397. CCCXCVII
398. CCCXCVIII
399. CCCXCIX
400. CD
401. CDIs
402. CDII
403. CDIII
404. CDIV
405. CDV
406. CDVI
407. CDVII
408. CDVIII
409. CDIX
410. CDX
411. CDXI
412. CDXII
413. CDXIII
414. CDXIV
415. CDXV
416. CDXVI
417. CDXVII
418. CDXVIII
419. CDXIX
420. CDXX
421. CDXXI
422. CDXXII
423. CDXXIII
424. CDXXIV
425. CDXXV
426. CDXXVI
427. CDXXVII
428. CDXXVIII
429. CDXXIX
430. CDXXX
431. CDXXXI
432. CDXXXII
433. CDXXXIII
434. CDXXXIV
435. CDXXXV
436. CDXXXVI
437. CDXXXVII
438. CDXXXVIII
439. CDXXXIX
440. CDXL
441. CDXLI
442. CDXLII
443. CDXLIII
444. CDXLIV
445. CDXLV
446. CDXLVI
447. CDXLVII
448. CDXLVIII
449. CDXLIX
450. CDL
451. CDLI
452. CDLII
453. CDLIII
454. CDLIV
455. CDLV
456. CDLVI
457. CDLVII
458. CDLVIII
459. CDLIX
460. CDLX
461. CDLXI
462. CDLXII
463. CDLXIII
464. CDLXIV
465. CDLXV
466. CDLXVI
467. CDLXVII
468. CDLXVIII
469. CDLXIX
470. CDLXX
471. CDLXXI
472. CDLXXII
473. CDLXXIII
474. CDLXXIV
475. CDLXXV
476. CDLXXVI
477. CDLXXVII
478. CDLXXVIII
479. CDLXXIX
480. CDLXXX
481. CDLXXXI
482. CDLXXXII
483. CDLXXXIII
484. CDLXXXIV
485. CDLXXXV
486. CDLXXXVI
487. CDLXXXVII
488. CDLXXXVIII
489. CDLXXXIX
490. CDXC
491. CDXCI
492. CDXCII
493. CDXCIII
494. CDXCIV
495. CDXCV
496. CDXCVI
497. CDXCVII
498. CDXCVIII
499. CDXCIX
500. D
501. IN
502. DIY
503. DIII
504. DIV
505. DV
506. DVI
507. DVII
508. DVIII
509. DIX
510. DX
511. DXI
512. DXII
513. DXIII
514. DXIV
515. DXV
516. DXVI
517. DXVII
518. DXVIII
519. DXIX
520. DXX
521. DXXI
522. DXXII
523. DXXIII
524. DXXIV
525. DXXV
526. DXXVI
527. DXXVII
528. DXXVIII
529. DXXIX
530. DXXX
531. DXXXI
532. DXXXII
533. DXXXIII
534. DXXXIV
535. DXXXV
536. DXXXVI
537. DXXXVII
538. DXXXVIII
539. DXXXIX
540. DXL
541. DXLI
542. DXLII
543. DXLIII
544. DXLIV
545. DXLV
546. DXLVI
547. DXLVII
548. DXLVIII
549. DXLIX
550. DL
551. DLI
552. DLII
553. DLIII
554. DLIV
555. DLV
556. DLVI
557. DLVII
558. DLVIII
559. DLIX
560. DLX
561. DLXI
562. DLXII
563. DLXIII
564. DLXIV
565. DLXV
566. DLXVI
567. DLXVII
568. DLXVIII
569. DLXIX
570. DLXX
571. DLXXI
572. DLXXII
573. DLXXIII
574. DLXXIV
575. DLXXV
576. DLXXVI
577. DLXXVII
578. DLXXVIII
579. DLXXIX
580. DLXXX
581. DLXXXI
582. DLXXXII
583. DLXXXIII
584. DLXXXIV
585. DLXXXV
586. DLXXXVI
587. DLXXXVII
588. DLXXXVIII
589. DLXXXIX
590. DXC
591. DXCI
592. DXCII
593. DXCIII
594. DXCIV
595. DXCV
596. DXCVI
597. DXCVII
598. DXCVIII
599. DXCIX
600. DC
601. DCI
602. DCII
603. DCIII
604. DCIV
605. DCV
606. DCVI
607. DCVII
608. DCVIII
609. DCIX
610. DCX
611. DCXI
612. DCXII
613. DCXIII
614. DCXIV
615. DCXV
616. DCXVI
617. DCXVII
618. DCXVIII
619. DCXIX
620. DCXX
621. DCXXI
622. DCXXII
623. DCXXIII
624. DCXXIV
625. DCXXV
626. DCXXVI
627. DCXXVII
628. DCXXVIII
629. DCXXIX
630. DCXXX
631. DCXXXI
632. DCXXXII
633. DCXXXIII
634. DCXXXIV
635. DCXXXV
636. DCXXXVI
637. DCXXXVII
638. DCXXXVIII
639. DCXXXIX
640. DCXL
641. DCXLI
642. DCXLII
643. DCXLIII
644. DCXLIV
645. DCXLV
646. DCXLVI
647. DCXLVII
648. DCXLVIII
649. DCXLIX
650. DCL
651. DCLI
652. DCLII
653. DCLIII
654. DCLIV
655. DCLV
656. DCLVI
657. DCLVII
658. DCLVIII
659. DCLIX
660. DCLX
661. DCLXI
662. DCLXII
663. DCLXIII
664. DCLXIV
665. DCLXV
666. DCLXVI
667. DCLXVII
668. DCLXVIII
669. DCLXIX
670. DCLXX
671. DCLXXI
672. DCLXXII
673. DCLXXIII
674. DCLXXIV
675. DCLXXV
676. DCLXXVI
677. DCLXXVII
678. DCLXXVIII
679. DCLXXIX
680. DCLXXX
681. DCLXXXI
682. DCLXXXII
683. DCLXXXIII
684. DCLXXXIV
685. DCLXXXV
686. DCLXXXVI
687. DCLXXXVII
688. DCLXXXVIII
689. DCLXXXIX
690. DCXC
691. DCXCI
692. DCXCII
693. DCXCIII
694. DCXCIV
695. DCXCV
696. DCXCVI
697. DCXCVII
698. DCXCVIII
699. DCXCIX
700. DCC
701. DCCI
702. DCCII
703. DCCIII
704. DCCIV
705. DCCV
706. DCCVI
707. DCCVII
708. DCCVIII
709. DCCIX
710. DCCX
711. DCCXI
712. DCCXII
713. DCCXIII
714. DCCXIV
715. DCCXV
716. DCCXVI
717. DCCXVII
718. DCCXVIII
719. DCCXIX
720. DCCXX
721. DCCXXI
722. DCCXXII
723. DCCXXIII
724. DCCXXIV
725. DCCXXV
726. DCCXXVI
727. DCCXXVII
728. DCCXXVIII
729. DCCXXIX
730. DCCXXX
731. DCCXXXI
732. DCCXXXII
733. DCCXXXIII
734. DCCXXXIV
735. DCCXXXV
736. DCCXXXVI
737. DCCXXXVII
738. DCCXXXVIII
739. DCCXXXIX
740. DCCXL
741. DCCXLI
742. DCCXLII
743. DCCXLIII
744. DCCXLIV
745. DCCXLV
746. DCCXLVI
747. DCCXLVII
748. DCCXLVIII
749. DCCXLIX
750. DCCL
751. DCCLI
752. DCCLII
753. DCCLIII
754. DCCLIV
755. DCCLV
756. DCCLVI
757. DCCLVII
758. DCCLVIII
759. DCCLIX
760. DCCLX
761. DCCLXI
762. DCCLXII
763. DCCLXIII
764. DCCLXIV
765. DCCLXV
766. DCCLXVI
767. DCCLXVII
768. DCCLXVIII
769. DCCLXIX
770. DCCLXX
771. DCCLXXI
772. DCCLXXII
773. DCCLXXIII
774. DCCLXXIV
775. DCCLXXV
776. DCCLXXVI
777. DCCLXXVII
778. DCCLXXVIII
779. DCCLXXIX
780. DCCLXXX
781. DCCLXXXI
782. DCCLXXXII
783. DCCLXXXXIII
784. DCCLXXXIV
785. DCCLXXXV
786. DCCLXXXVI
787. DCCLXXXVII
788. DCCLXXXVIII
789. DCCLXXXXIX
790. DCCXC
791. DCCXCI
792. DCCXCII
793. DCCXCIII
794. DCCXCIV
795. DCCXCV
796. DCCXCVI
797. DCCXCVII
798. DCCXCVIII
799. DCCXCIX
800. DCCC
801. DCCCI
802. DCCCII
803. DCCCIII
804. DCCCIV
805. DCCCV
806. DCCCVI
807. DCCCVII
808. DCCCVIII
809. DCCCIX
810. DCCCX
811. DCCCXI
812. DCCCXII
813. DCCCXIII
814. DCCCXIV
815. DCCCXV
816. DCCCXVI
817. DCCCXVII
818. DCCCXVIII
819. DCCCXIX
820. DCCCXX
821. DCCCXXI
822. DCCCXXII
823. DCCCXXIII
824. DCCCXXIV
825. DCCCXXV
826. DCCCXXVI
827. DCCCXXVII
828. DCCCXXVIII
829. DCCCXXIX
830. DCCCXXX
831. DCCCXXXI
832. DCCCXXXII
833. DCCCXXXIII
834. DCCCXXXIV
835. DCCCXXXV
836. DCCCXXXVI
837. DCCCXXXVII
838. DCCCXXXVIII
839. DCCCXXXIX
840. DCCCXL
841. DCCCXLI
842. DCCCXLII
843. DCCCXLIII
844. DCCCXLIV
845. DCCCXLV
846. DCCCXLVI
847. DCCCXLVII
848. DCCCXLVIII
849. DCCCXLIX
850. DCCCL
851. DCCCLI
852. DCCCLII
853. DCCCLIII
854. DCCCLIV
855. DCCCLV
856. DCCCLVI
857. DCCCLVII
858. DCCCLVIII
859. DCCCLIX
860. DCCCLX
861. DCCCLXI
862. DCCCLXII
863. DCCCLXIII
864. DCCCLXIV
865. DCCCLXV
866. DCCCLXVI
867. DCCCLXVII
868. DCCCLXVIII
869. DCCCLXIX
870. DCCCLXX
871. DCCCLXXI
872. DCCCLXXII
873. DCCCLXXIII
874. DCCCLXXIV
875. DCCCLXXV
876. DCCCLXXVI
877. DCCCLXXVII
878. DCCCLXXVIII
879. DCCCLXXIX
880. DCCCLXXX
881. DCCCLXXXI
882. DCCCLXXXII
883. DCCCLXXXIII
884. DCCCLXXXIV
885. DCCCLXXXV
886. DCCCLXXXVI
887. DCCCLXXXVII
888. DCCCLXXXVIII
889. DCCCLXXXIX
890. DCCCXC
891. DCCCXCI
892. DCCCXCII
893. DCCCXCIII
894. DCCCXCIV
895. DCCCXCV
896. DCCCXCVI
897. DCCCXCVII
898. DCCCXCVIII
899. DCCCXCIX
900. CM
901. CMI
902. CMII
903. CMIII
904. CMIV
905. CMV
906. CMVI
907. CMVII
908. CMVIII
909. CMIX
910. CMX
911. CMXI
912. CMXII
913. CMXIII
914. CMXIV
915. CMXV
916. CMXVI
917. CMXVII
918. CMXVIII
919. CMXIX
920. CMXX
921. CMXXI
922. CMXXII
923. CMXXIII
924. CMXXIV
925. CMXXV
926. CMXXVI
927. CMXXVII
928. CMXXVIII
929. CMXXIX
930. CMXXX
931. CMXXXI
932. CMXXXII
933. CMXXXIII
934. CMXXXIV
935. CMXXXV
936. CMXXXVI
937. CMXXXVII
938. CMXXXVIII
939. CMXXXIX
940. CMXL
941. CMXLI
942. CMXLII
943. CMXLIII
944. CMXLIV
945. CMXLV
946. CMXLVI
947. CMXLVII
948. CMXLVIII
949. CMXLIX
950. CML
951. CMLI
952. CMLII
953. CMLIII
954. CMLIV
955. CMLV
956. CMLVI
957. CMLVII
958. CMLVIII
959. CMLIX
960. CMLX
961. CMLXI
962. CMLXII
963. CMLXIII
964. CMLXIV
965. CMLXV
966. CMLXVI
967. CMLXVII
968. CMLXVIII
969. CMLXIX
970. CMLXX
971. CMLXXI
972. CMLXXII
973. CMLXXIII
974. CMLXXIV
975. CMLXXV
976. CMLXXVI
977. CMLXXVII
978. CMLXXVIII
979. CMLXXIX
980. CMLXXX
981. CMLXXXI
982. CMLXXXII
983. CMLXXXIII
984. CMLXXXIV
985. CMLXXXV
986. CMLXXXVI
987. CMLXXXVII
988. CMLXXXVIII
989. CMLXXXIX
990. CMXC
991. CMXCI
992. CMXCII
993. CMXCIII
994. CMXCIV
995. CMXCV
996. CMXCVI
997. CMXCVII
998. CMXCVIII
999. CMXCIX
1000. M
1001. MI
1002. MII
1003. MIII
1004. MIV
1005. MV
1006. MVI
1007. MVII
1008. MVIII
1009. MIX
1010. MX
1011. MXI
1012. MXII
1013. MXIII
1014. MXIV
1015. MXV
1016. MXVI
1017. MXVII
1018. MXVIII
1019. MXIX
1020. MXX
1021. MXXI
1022. MXXII
1023. MXXIII
1024. MXXIV
1025. MXXV
1026. MXXVI
1027. MXXVII
1028. MXXVIII
1029. MXXIX
1030. MXXX
1031. MXXXI
1032. MXXXII
1033. MXXXIII
1034. MXXXIV
1035. MXXXV
1036. MXXXVI
1037. MXXXVII
1038. MXXXVIII
1039. MXXXIX
1040. MXL
1041. MXLI
1042. MXLII
1043. MXLIII
1044. MXLIV
1045. MXLV
1046. MXLVI
1047. MXLVII
1048. MXLVIII
1049. MXLIX
1050. ML
1051. MLI
1052. MLII
1053. MLIII
1054. MLIV
1055. MLV
1056. MLVI
1057. MLVII
1058. MLVIII
1059. MLIX
1060. MLX
1061. MLXI
1062. MLXII
1063. MLXIII
1064. MLXIV
1065. MLXV
1066. MLXVI
1067. MLXVII
1068. MLXVIII
1069. MLXIX
1070. MLXX
1071. MLXXI
1072. MLXXII
1073. MLXXIII
1074. MLXXIV
1075. MLXXV
1076. MLXXVI
1077. MLXXVII
1078. MLXXVIII
1079. MLXXIX
1080. MLXXX
1081. MLXXXI
1082. MLXXXII
1083. MLXXXIII
1084. MLXXXIV
1085. MLXXXV
1086. MLXXXVI
1087. MLXXXVII
1088. MLXXXVIII
1089. MLXXXIX
1090. MXC
1091. MXCI
1092. MXCII
1093. MXCIII
1094. MXCIV
1095. MXCV
1096. MXCVI
1097. MXCVII
1098. MXCVIII
1099. MXCIX
1100. MC
1101. MCI
1102. MCII
1103. MCIII
1104. MCIV
1105. MCV
1106. MCVI
1107. MCVII
1108. MCVIII
1109. MCIX
1110. MCX
1111. MCXI
1112. MCXII
1113. MCXIII
1114. MCXIV
1115. MCXV
1116. MCXVI
1117. MCXVII
1118. MCXVIII
1119. MCXIX
1120. MCXX
1121. MCXXI
1122. MCXXII
1123. MCXXIII
1124. MCXXIV
1125. MCXXV
1126. MCXXVI
1127. MCXXVII
1128. MCXXVIII
1129. MCXXIX
1130. MCXXX
1131. MCXXXI
1132. MCXXXII
1133. MCXXXIII
1134. MCXXXIV
1135. MCXXXV
1136. MCXXXVI
1137. MCXXXVII
1138. MCXXXVIII
1139. MCXXXIX
1140. MCXL
1141. MCXLI
1142. MCXLII
1143. MCXLIII
1144. MCXLIV
1145. MCXLV
1146. MCXLVI
1147. MCXLVII
1148. MCXLVIII
1149. MCXLIX
1150. MCL
1151. MCLI
1152. MCLII
1153. MCLIII
1154. MCLIV
1155. MCLV
1156. MCLVI
1157. MCLVII
1158. MCLVIII
1159. MCLIX
1160. MCLX
1161. MCLXI
1162. MCLXII
1163. MCLXIII
1164. MCLXIV
1165. MCLXV
1166. MCLXVI
1167. MCLXVII
1168. MCLXVIII
1169. MCLXIX
1170. MCLXX
1171. MCLXXI
1172. MCLXXII
1173. MCLXXIII
1174. MCLXXIV
1175. MCLXXV
1176. MCLXXVI
1177. MCLXXVII
1178. MCLXXVIII
1179. MCLXXIX
1180. MCLXXX
1181. MCLXXXI
1182. MCLXXXII
1183. MCLXXXIII
1184. MCLXXXIV
1185. MCLXXXV
1186. MCLXXXVI
1187. MCLXXXVII
1188. MCLXXXVIII
1189. MCLXXXIX
1190. MCXC
1191. MCXCI
1192. MCXCII
1193. MCXCIII
1194. MCXCIV
1195. MCXCV
1196. MCXCVI
1197. MCXCVII
1198. MCXCVIII
1199. MCXCIX
1200. MCC
1201. MCCI
1202. MCCII
1203. MCCIII
1204. MCCIV
1205. MCCV
1206. MCCVI
1207. MCCVII
1208. MCCVIII
1209. MCCIX
1210. MCCX
1211. MCCXI
1212. MCCXII
1213. MCCXIII
1214. MCCXIV
1215. MCCXV
1216. MCCXVI
1217. MCCXVII
1218. MCCXVIII
1219. MCCXIX
1220. MCCXX
1221. MCCXXI
1222. MCCXXII
1223. MCCXXIII
1224. MCCXXIV
1225. MCCXXV
1226. MCCXXVI
1227. MCCXXVII
1228. MCCXXVIII
1229. MCCXXIX
1230. MCCXXX
1231. MCCXXXI
1232. MCCXXXII
1233. MCCXXXIII
1234. MCCXXXIV
1235. MCCXXXV
1236. MCCXXXVI
1237. MCCXXXVII
1238. MCCXXXVIII
1239. MCCXXXIX
1240. MCCXL
1241. MCCXLI
1242. MCCXLII
1243. MCCXLIII
1244. MCCXLIV
1245. MCCXLV
1246. MCCXLVI
1247. MCCXLVII
1248. MCCXLVIII
1249. MCCXLIX
1250. MCCL
1251. MCCLI
1252. MCCLII
1253. MCCLIII
1254. MCCLIV
1255. MCCLV
1256. MCCLVI
1257. MCCLVII
1258. MCCLVIII
1259. MCCLIX
1260. MCCLX
1261. MCCLXI
1262. MCCLXII
1263. MCCLXIII
1264. MCCLXIV
1265. MCCLXV
1266. MCCLXVI
1267. MCCLXVII
1268. MCCLXVIII
1269. MCCLXIX
1270. MCCLXX
1271. MCCLXXI
1272. MCCLXXII
1273. MCCLXXIII
1274. MCCLXXIV
1275. MCCLXXV
1276. MCCLXXVI
1277. MCCLXXVII
1278. MCCLXXVIII
1279. MCCLXXIX
1280. MCCLXXX
1281. MCCLXXXI
1282. MCCLXXXII
1283. MCCLXXXIII
1284. MCCLXXXIV
1285. MCCLXXXV
1286. MCCLXXXVI
1287. MCCLXXXVII
1288. MCCLXXXVIII
1289. MCCLXXXIX
1290. MCCXC
1291. MCCXCI
1292. MCCXCII
1293. MCCXCIII
1294. MCCXCIV
1295. MCCXCV
1296. MCCXCVI
1297. MCCXCVII
1298. MCCXCVIII
1299. MCCXCIX
1300. MCCC
1301. MCCCI
1302. MCCCII
1303. MCCCIII
1304. MCCCIV
1305. MCCCV
1306. MCCCVI
1307. MCCCVII
1308. MCCCVIII
1309. MCCCIX
1310. MCCCX
1311. MCCCXI
1312. MCCCXII
1313. MCCCXIII
1314. MCCCXIV
1315. MCCCXV
1316. MCCCXVI
1317. MCCCXVII
1318. MCCCXVIII
1319. MCCCXIX
1320. MCCCXX
1321. MCCCXXI
1322. MCCCXXII
1323. MCCCXXIII
1324. MCCCXXIV
1325. MCCCXXV
1326. MCCCXXVI
1327. MCCCXXVII
1328. MCCCXXVIII
1329. MCCCXXIX
1330. MCCCXXX
1331. MCCCXXXI
1332. MCCCXXXII
1333. MCCCXXXIII
1334. MCCCXXXIV
1335. MCCCXXXV
1336. MCCCXXXVI
1337. MCCCXXXVII
1338. MCCCXXXVIII
1339. MCCCXXXIX
1340. MCCCXL
1341. MCCCXLI
1342. MCCCXLII
1343. MCCCXLIII
1344. MCCCXLIV
1345. MCCCXLV
1346. MCCCXLVI
1347. MCCCXLVII
1348. MCCCXLVIII
1349. MCCCXLIX
1350. MCCCL
1351. MCCCLI
1352. MCCCLII
1353. MCCCLIII
1354. MCCCLIV
1355. MCCCLV
1356. MCCCLVI
1357. MCCCLVII
1358. MCCCLVIII
1359. MCCCLIX
1360. MCCCLX
1361. MCCCLXI
1362. MCCCLXII
1363. MCCCLXIII
1364. MCCCLXIV
1365. MCCCLXV
1366. MCCCLXVI
1367. MCCCLXVII
1368. MCCCLXVIII
1369. MCCCLXIX
1370. MCCCLXX
1371. MCCCLXXI
1372. MCCCLXXII
1373. MCCCLXXIII
1374. MCCCLXXIV
1375. MCCCLXXV
1376. MCCCLXXVI
1377. MCCCLXXVII
1378. MCCCLXXVIII
1379. MCCCLXXIX
1380. MCCCLXXX
1381. MCCCLXXXI
1382. MCCCLXXXII
1383. MCCCLXXXIII
1384. MCCCLXXXIV
1385. MCCCLXXXV
1386. MCCCLXXXVI
1387. MCCCLXXXVII
1388. MCCCLXXXVIII
1389. MCCCLXXXIX
1390. MCCCXC
1391. MCCCXCI
1392. MCCCXCII
1393. MCCCXCIII
1394. MCCCXCIV
1395. MCCCXCV
1396. MCCCXCVI
1397. MCCCXCVII
1398. MCCCXCVIII
1399. MCCCXCIX
1400. MCD
1401. MCDI
1402. MCDII
1403. MCDIII
1404. MCDIV
1405. MCDV
1406. MCDVI
1407. MCDVII
1408. MCDVIII
1409. MCDIX
1410. MCDX
1411. MCDXI
1412. MCDXII
1413. MCDXIII
1414. MCDXIV
1415. MCDXV
1416. MCDXVI
1417. MCDXVII
1418. MCDXVIII
1419. MCDXIX
1420. MCDXX
1421. MCDXXI
1422. MCDXXII
1423. MCDXXIII
1424. MCDXXIV
1425. MCDXXV
1426. MCDXXVI
1427. MCDXXVII
1428. MCDXXVIII
1429. MCDXXIX
1430. MCDXXX
1431. MCDXXXI
1432. MCDXXXII
1433. MCDXXXIII
1434. MCDXXXIV
1435. MCDXXXV
1436. MCDXXXVI
1437. MCDXXXVII
1438. MCDXXXVIII
1439. MCDXXXIX
1440. MCDXL
1441. MCDXLI
1442. MCDXLII
1443. MCDXLIII
1444. MCDXLIV
1445. MCDXLV
1446. MCDXLVI
1447. MCDXLVII
1448. MCDXLVIII
1449. MCDXLIX
1450. MCDL
1451. MCDLI
1452. MCDLII
1453. MCDLIII
1454. MCDLIV
1455. MCDLV
1456. MCDLVI
1457. MCDLVII
1458. MCDLVIII
1459. MCDLIX
1460. MCDLX
1461. MCDLXI
1462. MCDLXII
1463. MCDLXIII
1464. MCDLXIV
1465. MCDLXV
1466. MCDLXVI
1467. MCDLXVII
1468. MCDLXVIII
1469. MCDLXIX
1470. MCDLXX
1471. MCDLXXI
1472. MCDLXXII
1473. MCDLXXIII
1474. MCDLXXIV
1475. MCDLXXV
1476. MCDLXXVI
1477. MCDLXXVII
1478. MCDLXXVIII
1479. MCDLXXIX
1480. MCDLXXX
1481. MCDLXXXI
1482. MCDLXXXII
1483. MCDLXXXIII
1484. MCDLXXXIV
1485. MCDLXXXV
1486. MCDLXXXVI
1487. MCDLXXXVII
1488. MCDLXXXVIII
1489. MCDLXXXIX
1490. MCDXC
1491. MCDXCI
1492. MCDXCII
1493. MCDXCIII
1494. MCDXCIV
1495. MCDXCV
1496. MCDXCVI
1497. MCDXCVII
1498. MCDXCVIII
1499. MCDXCIX
1500. MD
1501. MDI
1502. MDII
1503. MDIII
1504. MDIV
1505. MDV
1506. MDVI
1507. MDVII
1508. MDVIII
1509. MDIX
1510. MDX
1511. MDXI
1512. MDXII
1513. MDXIII
1514. MDXIV
1515. MDXV
1516. MDXVI
1517. MDXVII
1518. MDXVIII
1519. MDXIX
1520. MDXX
1521. MDXXI
1522. MDXXII
1523. MDXXIII
1524. MDXXIV
1525. MDXXV
1526. MDXXVI
1527. MDXXVII
1528. MDXXVIII
1529. MDXXIX
1530. MDXXX
1531. MDXXXI
1532. MDXXXII
1533. MDXXXIII
1534. MDXXXIV
1535. MDXXXV
1536. MDXXXVI
1537. MDXXXVII
1538. MDXXXVIII
1539. MDXXXIX
1540. MDXL
1541. MDXLI
1542. MDXLII
1543. MDXLIII
1544. MDXLIV
1545. MDXLV
1546. MDXLVI
1547. MDXLVII
1548. MDXLVIII
1549. MDXLIX
1550. MDL
1551. MDLI
1552. MDLII
1553. MDLIII
1554. MDLIV
1555. MDLV
1556. MDLVI
1557. MDLVII
1558. MDLVIII
1559. MDLIX
1560. MDLX
1561. MDLXI
1562. MDLXII
1563. MDLXIII
1564. MDLXIV
1565. MDLXV
1566. MDLXVI
1567. MDLXVII
1568. MDLXVIII
1569. MDLXIX
1570. MDLXX
1571. MDLXXI
1572. MDLXXII
1573. MDLXXIII
1574. MDLXXIV
1575. MDLXXV
1576. MDLXXVI
1577. MDLXXVII
1578. MDLXXVIII
1579. MDLXXIX
1580. MDLXXX
1581. MDLXXXI
1582. MDLXXXII
1583. MDLXXXIII
1584. MDLXXXIV
1585. MDLXXXV
1586. MDLXXXVI
1587. MDLXXXVII
1588. MDLXXXVIII
1589. MDLXXXIX
1590. MDXC
1591. MDXCI
1592. MDXCII
1593. MDXCIII
1594. MDXCIV
1595. MDXCV
1596. MDXCVI
1597. MDXCVII
1598. MDXCVIII
1599. MDXCIX
1600. MDC
1601. MDCI
1602. MDCII
1603. MDCIII
1604. MDIV
1605. MDCV
1606. MDCVI
1607. MDCVII
1608. MDCVIII
1609. MDCIX
1610. MDCX
1611. MDCXI
1612. MDCXII
1613. MDCXIII
1614. MDCXIV
1615. MDCXV
1616. MDCXVI
1617. MDCXVII
1618. MDCXVIII
1619. MDCXIX
1620. MDCXX
1621. MDCXXI
1622. MDCXXII
1623. MDCXXIII
1624. MDCXXIV
1625. MDCXXV
1626. MDCXXVI
1627. MDCXXVII
1628. MDCXXVIII
1629. MDCXXIX
1630. MDCXXX
1631. MDCXXXI
1632. MDCXXXII
1633. MDCXXXIII
1634. MDCXXXIV
1635. MDCXXXV
1636. MDCXXXVI
1637. MDCXXXVII
1638. MDCXXXVIII
1639. MDCXXXIX
1640. MDCXL
1641. MDCXLI
1642. MDCXLII
1643. MDCXLIII
1644. MDCXLIV
1645. MDCXLV
1646. MDCXLVI
1647. MDCXLVII
1648. MDCXLVIII
1649. MDCXLIX
1650. MDCL
1651. MDCLI
1652. MDCLII
1653. MDCLIII
1654. MDCLIV
1655. MDCLV
1656. MDCLVI
1657. MDCLVII
1658. MDCLVIII
1659. MDCLIX
1660. MDCLX
1661. MDCLXI
1662. MDCLXII
1663. MDCLXIII
1664. MDCLXIV
1665. MDCLXV
1666. MDCLXVI
1667. MDCLXVII
1668. MDCLXVIII
1669. MDCLXIX
1670. MDCLXX
1671. MDCLXXI
1672. MDCLXXII
1673. MDCLXXIII
1674. MDCLXXIV
1675. MDCLXXV
1676. MDCLXXVI
1677. MDCLXXVII
1678. MDCLXXVIII
1679. MDCLXXIX
1680. MDCLXXX
1681. MDCLXXXI
1682. MDCLXXXII
1683. MDCLXXXIII
1684. MDCLXXXIV
1685. MDCLXXXV
1686. MDCLXXXVI
1687. MDCLXXXVII
1688. MDCLXXXVIII
1689. MDCLXXXIX
1690. MDCXC
1691. MDCXCI
1692. MDCXCII
1693. MDCXCIII
1694. MDCXCIV
1695. MDCXCV
1696. MDCXCVI
1697. MDCXCVII
1698. MDCXCVIII
1699. MDCXCIX
1700. MDCC
1701. MDCCI
1702. MDCCII
1703. MDCCIII
1704. MDCCIV
1705. MDCCV
1706. MDCCVI
1707. MDCCVII
1708. MDCCVIII
1709. MDCCIX
1710. MDCCX
1711. MDCCXI
1712. MDCCXII
1713. MDCCXIII
1714. MDCCXIV
1715. MDCCXV
1716. MDCCXVI
1717. MDCCXVII
1718. MDCCXVIII
1719. MDCCXIX
1720. MDCCXX
1721. MDCCXXI
1722. MDCCXXII
1723. MDCCXXIII
1724. MDCCXXIV
1725. MDCCXXV
1726. MDCCXXVI
1727. MDCCXXVII
1728. MDCCXXVIII
1729. MDCCXXIX
1730. MDCCXXX
1731. MDCCXXXI
1732. MDCCXXXII
1733. MDCCXXXIII
1734. MDCCXXXIV
1735. MDCCXXXV
1736. MDCCXXXVI
1737. MDCCXXXVII
1738. MDCCXXXVIII
1739. MDCCXXXIX
1740. MDCCXL
1741. MDCCXLI
1742. MDCCXLII
1743. MDCCXLIII
1744. MDCCXLIV
1745. MDCCXLV
1746. MDCCXLVI
1747. MDCCXLVII
1748. MDCCXLVIII
1749. MDCCXLIX
1750. MDCCL
1751. MDCCLI
1752. MDCCLII
1753. MDCCLIII
1754. MDCCLIV
1755. MDCCLV
1756. MDCCLVI
1757. MDCCLVII
1758. MDCCLVIII
1759. MDCCLIX
1760. MDCCLX
1761. MDCCLXI
1762. MDCCLXII
1763. MDCCLXIII
1764. MDCCLXIV
1765. MDCCLXV
1766. MDCCLXVI
1767. MDCCLXVII
1768. MDCCLXVIII
1769. MDCCLXIX
1770. MDCCLXX
1771. MDCCLXXI
1772. MDCCLXXII
1773. MDCCLXXIII
1774. MDCCLXXIV
1775. MDCCLXXV
1776. MDCCLXXVI
1777. MDCCLXXVII
1778. MDCCLXXVIII
1779. MDCCLXXIX
1780. MDCCLXXX
1781. MDCCLXXXI
1782. MDCCLXXXII
1783. MDCCLXXXIII
1784. MDCCLXXXIV
1785. MDCCLXXXV
1786. MDCCLXXXVI
1787. MDCCLXXXVII
1788. MDCCLXXXVIII
1789. MDCCLXXXIX
1790. MDCCXC
1791. MDCCXCI
1792. MDCCXCII
1793. MDCCXCIII
1794. MDCCXCIV
1795. MDCCXCV
1796. MDCCXCVI
1797. MDCCXCVII
1798. MDCCXCVIII
1799. MDCCXCIX
1800. MDCCC
1801. MDCCCI
1802. MDCCCII
1803. MDCCCIII
1804. MDCCCIV
1805. MDCCCV
1806. MDCCCVI
1807. MDCCCVII
1808. MDCCCVIII
1809. MDCCCIX
1810. MDCCCX
1811. MDCCCXI
1812. MDCCCXII
1813. MDCCCXIII
1814. MDCCCXIV
1815. MDCCCXV
1816. MDCCCXVI
1817. MDCCCXVII
1818. MDCCCXVIII
1819. MDCCCXIX
1820. MDCCCXX
1821. MDCCCXXI
1822. MDCCCXXII
1823. MDCCCXXIII
1824. MDCCCXXIV
1825. MDCCCXXV
1826. MDCCCXXVI
1827. MDCCCXXVII
1828. MDCCCXXVIII
1829. MDCCCXXIX
1830. MDCCCXXX
1831. MDCCCXXXI
1832. MDCCCXXXII
1833. MDCCCXXXIII
1834. MDCCCXXXIV
1835. MDCCCXXXV
1836. MDCCCXXXVI
1837. MDCCCXXXVII
1838. MDCCCXXXVIII
1839. MDCCCXXXIX
1840. MDCCCXL
1841. MDCCCXLI
1842. MDCCCXLII
1843. MDCCCXLIII
1844. MDCCCXLIV
1845. MDCCCXLV
1846. MDCCCXLVI
1847. MDCCCXLVII
1848. MDCCCXLVIII
1849. MDCCCXLIX
1850. MDCCCL
1851. MDCCCLI
1852. MDCCCLII
1853. MDCCCLIII
1854. MDCCCLIV
1855. MDCCCLV
1856. MDCCCLVI
1857. MDCCCLVII
1858. MDCCCLVIII
1859. MDCCCLIX
1860. MDCCCLX
1861. MDCCCLXI
1862. MDCCCLXII
1863. MDCCCLXIII
1864. MDCCCLXIV
1865. MDCCCLXV
1866. MDCCCLXVI
1867. MDCCCLXVII
1868. MDCCCLXVIII
1869. MDCCCLXIX
1870. MDCCCLXX
1871. MDCCCLXXI
1872. MDCCCLXXII
1873. MDCCCLXXIII
1874. MDCCCLXXIV
1875. MDCCCLXXV
1876. MDCCCLXXVI
1877. MDCCCLXXVII
1878. MDCCCLXXVIII
1879. MDCCCLXXIX
1880. MDCCCLXXX
1881. MDCCCLXXXI
1882. MDCCCLXXXII
1883. MDCCCLXXXIII
1884. MDCCCLXXXIV
1885. MDCCCLXXXV
1886. MDCCCLXXXVI
1887. MDCCCLXXXVII
1888. MDCCCLXXXVIII
1889. MDCCCLXXXIX
1890. MDCCCXC
1891. MDCCCXCI
1892. MDCCCXCII
1893. MDCCCXCIII
1894. MDCCCXCIV
1895. MDCCCXCV
1896. MDCCCXCVI
1897. MDCCCXCVII
1898. MDCCCXCVIII
1899. MDCCCXCIX
1900. MCM
1901. MCMI
1902. MCMII
1903. MCMIII
1904. MCMIV
1905. MCMV
1906. MCMVI
1907. MCMVII
1908. MCMVIII
1909. MCMIX
1910. MCMX
1911. MCMXI
1912. MCMXII
1913. MCMXIII
1914. MCMXIV
1915. MCMXV
1916. MCMXVI
1917. MCMXVII
1918. MCMXVIII
1919. MCMXIX
1920. MCMXX
1921. MCMXXI
1922. MCMXXII
1923. MCMXXIII
1924. MCMXXIV
1925. MCMXXV
1926. MCMXXVI
1927. MCMXXVII
1928. MCMXXVIII
1929. MCMXXIX
1930. MCMXXX
1931. MCMXXXI
1932. MCMXXXII
1933. MCMXXXIII
1934. MCMXXXIV
1935. MCMXXXV
1936. MCMXXXVI
1937. MCMXXXVII
1938. MCMXXXVIII
1939. MCMXXXIX
1940. MCMXL
1941. MCMXLI
1942. MCMXLII
1943. MCMXLIII
1944. MCMXLIV
1945. MCMXLV
1946. MCMXLVI
1947. MCMXLVII
1948. MCMXLVIII
1949. MCMXLIX
1950. MCML
1951. MCMLI
1952. MCMLII
1953. MCMLIII
1954. MCMLIV
1955. MCMLV
1956. MCMLVI
1957. MCMLVII
1958. MCMLVIII
1959. MCMLIX
1960. MCMLX
1961. MCMLXI
1962. MCMLXII
1963. MCMLXIII
1964. MCMLXIV
1965. MCMLXV
1966. MCMLXVI
1967. MCMLXVII
1968. MCMLXVIII
1969. MCMLXIX
1970. MCMLXX
1971. MCMLXXI
1972. MCMLXXII
1973. MCMLXXIII
1974. MCMLXXIV
1975. MCMLXXV
1976. MCMLXXVI
1977. MCMLXXVII
1978. MCMLXXVIII
1979. MCMLXXIX
1980. MCMLXXX
1981. MCMLXXXI
1982. MCMLXXXII
1983. MCMLXXXIII
1984. MCMLXXXIV
1985. MCMLXXXV
1986. MCMLXXXVI
1987. MCMLXXXVII
1988. MCMLXXXVIII
1989. MCMLXXXIX
1990. MCMXC
1991. MCMXCI
1992. MCMXCII
1993. MCMXCIII
1994. MCMXCIV
1995. MCMXCV
1996. MCMXCVI
1997. MCMXCVII
1998. MCMXCVIII
1999. MCMXCIX
2000. MM

List of Years in Roman Numerals

Maybe you will write the year in Roman numerals, so below is a table for the years from 1950 – 2050 in Roman numerals. Hope it is useful :

How to Read Roman Numerals

For some people who may not be able to read Roman numerals, below, several steps will be explained to read Roman numerals.

1. Letters or Number Symbols on the Left are Bigger than those on the Right

If the letter or symbol to the right of the number is larger, it is called addition. For example the number VI where V is the number 5 which then adds the number 1 to the number 6.

2. Letters or Number Symbols on the Left are Smaller than those on the Right

If the letter or symbol to the right of the number is larger, then it is called subtraction. For example the number IV or the number 4. In the Roman numeral IV, the symbol I is smaller than the symbol for the number V.

How to Write Roman Numerals

Here are some ways to write roman numerals:

1. The Easiest Way to Convert from Numbers to Roman

The simplest way is to use a converter, we just need to write the numbers and  the Roman numerals will appear automatically. Here is a list of sites that we can use to convert numbers into Roman format:

• https://romannumerals.site/
• https://www.calculatorsoup.com/calculators/conversions/roman-numeral-converter.php
• https://www.rapidtables.com/convert/number/date-to-roman-numerals.html

2. Manual way

How do you write Roman numerals? here’s how to write the first roman numeral grouping the thousands, hundreds, or ones numbers.

Then we look at the mathematical operational system whether addition, subtraction, repetition or mixture.

a. Sum System

If there is a Roman numeral consisting of two or more numbers, with the number on the left being more than or equal to the number on the right, then the number arrangement uses the addition system:

Example 1 :

The number 6 = VI
V = 5
I = 1
V the number is greater than 1, so the operational addition of
VI = 5 + 1 = 6

Example 2 :

LXVII

L = 50
X = 10
V = 5
I= 1
I= 1
50 > 10 > 5 > 1
then the operational addition of
LXVII = 50 + 10 + 5 + 1 + 1 = 67

b. Reduction System

If there is a Roman numeral consisting of two or more numbers, with the number on the left less than the number on the right, then the number arrangement uses a subtraction system.

Example 1 :

IV

I = 1
V = 5
1 < 5
then
IV = 5 – 1 = 4

Example 2 :

XL
X = 10
L = 50
10 < 50
then
XL = 50 – 10 = 40

c. Repetition system

Is a writing system by repeating the same number in sequence.

Example:

III = 1 + 1 + 1 = 3

XXX= 10+10+10 = 30

CC = 100 + 100 = 200

d. Mixed System

Is a writing system that combines the three previous systems:

Example 1:

XCVIII = XC + VIII
X = 10
C = 100
X < C
then the operation is reduction
X – C = 100 – 10
= 90
V = 5
III = 1+1+1 = 3
5 > 3
then the operational addition is
VIII = 8
XC = 90
VIII = 8
90 > 8
, the operational addition of
XCVIII = 90 + 8 = 98

Example 2 :

MDCCCXLVII = M + DCCC + XL + VII
M = 1000
DCCC
D= 500
CCC = 100 + 100 + 100
= 300
DCCC = 500 + 300
= 800
X= 10
L = 50
10 < 50
then the operation is reduction
XL = 50 -10
= 40
VII
V = 5
II = 1+1= 2
5 > 2
then the operation is the addition of
VII = 5+ 2
= 7
so
MDCCCXLVII
M = 1000
DCCC = 800
XL = 40
VII = 7
1000 > 800 > 40 >7
then operational all are the sum
MDCCCXLVII = 1800+40+ 7
= 1847

Roman Numeral Operation Example

1. Roman numeral 9

IX
I = 1
X = 10
1 < 9
then the operational reduction
IX = 10 – 1
= 9

2. Roman numeral 23

XXIII
XX = 10 + 10
= 20
III = 1 + 1 + 1
= 3
20 > 3
then the operational addition of
XXII = 20 + 3
= 23

3. Roman numeral 29

XXIX
XX = 10 + 10
= 20

IX
I = 1
X = 10
1 < 10
, then the operational reduction
IX = 10 – 1 = 9
XX = 10 + 10
= 20

IX = 9
20 > 9

then the operational addition is 20 + 9
= 29

4. Roman numeral 35

XXXIV
XXX = 10 + 10 + 10
= 30
IV
I= 1
V = 5
1 < 5
then the operation is subtraction
IV = 5-1
= 4
XXX = 30
IV = 4
30 > 4
then the operation is addition
XXXIV = 30 + 5
= 35

5. Roman numeral 127

CXXVII
C = 100
XX = 10 + 10
= 20
VII = 5 + 2
= 7
so 20 > 7
, the operational addition
CXXVII = 100 + 20 + 7

6. Roman numeral 49

XCIX
XC
X = 10
C = 50
10 < 50
then the operational reduction
XC = 50 – 10 = 40

IX
I = 1
X = 10
1 < 10, then the operational reduction
IX = 10 – 1
= 9

XC = 40
IX = 9
40 > 9
, so the operational addition is
XCIX = 40 + 9
= 49

7. Roman numeral 74

LXXIV
L = 50
XX = 10 + 10
= 20
is also tens
50 > 20
LXX = 50 + 20
= 70
IV
I = 1
V = 5
1 < 5
IV = 5 – 1
= 4
LXXIV = 50 + 20 + 4
= 74

8. Roman Anka 624

DCXXIV
D = 500
C = 100
DC = 500 + 100
= 600
XX = 10 + 10
= 20
IV
I = 1
V = 5
IV = 5-1
= 4
DCXXIV = 600 + 20 + 4
= 624

9. Roman numeral 753

DCCLIII
D = 500
CC = 100 + 100
= 200
DCC = 500 + 200
= 700
L = 50
III = 1 + 1 + 1
= 3
DCCLIII = 700 + 50 + 3
= 753

The Roman numeral which has the smallest value is…
LXV
CX
XXXIV
DXIII
CID
discussion
a.LXIII
L= 50
X= 10
V= 5
50 > 10 > 5
then the operational addition of
LXIII = 50 + 10+ 5 = 65

CX
C = 100
X = 10
100 > 10
then the operational addition
CX = 100 + 10
= 110

XXXIV
XXX= 10+ 10+ 10
= 30
IV = 4
30 > 49
then the operational addition is
XXXIV = 30 + 4
= 34
e.DXIII
DX
D = 500
X = 10
DX = 50 + 10
= 60
III = 1+1+1
= 3
60> 3
then the operational addition of
DXIII = 60+ 3
= 63

e.CMII
C = 100
M = 1000
100 < 1000
then the operation is reduction
CM= 1000 – 100
= 90
II = 1 + 1
= 2
90 > 2
then the operation is addition
CMII = 90+ 2
= 92

LXIV = 64
CX = 110
XXXIV = 34
DXIII = 63
CMII = 92
so the smallest is XXIV

Examples of Roman Numeral Problems

Write the numbers below in Roman numerals!

Number 25

Answer:
25 = 20 + 5
20 = XX
5 = 5
25 = XXV

Number 19

Answer :

19 = 10 + 9
10 = X
9 = IX
so
19 = XIX

Number 37

Answer:
37 = 30 + 7
30 = XXX
7 = VII
so
37 = XXXVII

Number 49

Answer :

49 = 40+ 9
40 = XD
9 = IX
so = XDIX

Number 123

Answer :

123 = 100 + 20 + 3
100 = C
20 = XX
3 = III
so
123 = CXXIII

Number 279

Answer :

2 79 = 200 + 70 + 9
200 = CC
70 = DXX
9 = IX
so
279 = CCDXXIX

Number 400

Answer :

400 = CD
1745
1745 = 1000 + 700 + 40 + 5
1000 = M
700 = 500 + 200
= D + CC
= DCC
40 = XL
5 = V
1745 = MDCCXLV

2018 figures

Answer :

2018 = 2000 + 10 + 8
2000 = MM
10 = X
8 = VIII
2018 = MMXVIII

Figures 1999

Answer :

1999 = 1000 + 900 +90 + 9
1000 = M
900 = CM
90 = XC
9 = IX
1999 = MCMXCIX

So, that’s a discussion of Roman numerals, complete with sample questions. Roman numerals really feel complicated when writing yes, because there are many letters to represent numbers. that’s probably the reason roman numerals aren’t used much anymore.

Then since the emergence of modern numbers, Roman numerals are no longer widely used. One reason is that there is no 0 in Roman numerals. This is considered to make the development of mathematical systems difficult.

There are no zeros what would be the calculation. After all, who said the number zero is nothing? it turns out that the number zero means you know!
Wikipedia. ‘Roman Numerals’, Wikipedia, [Online]. Link: https://id.wikipedia.org/wiki/Angka_Romawi (Accessed: 27 April 2021)

Book Recommendations & Related Articles